PRO 880T - Hi-Fi System ClearOne - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL PRO 880T ClearOne

Professional Conferencing Systems

Stacked server racks with clearOne branding, no visible text or symbols on the equipment surfaces

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

Telephone [phone]

1.801.974.3760

Fax [phone]

Email [e-mail]

Web www.clearone.com

CONVERGE PRO 880/880T/880TA/840T/8i/TH20/VH20, CONVERGE SR 1212/SR 1212TA INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL

CLEARONE PART NO. 800-151-880 (REVISION 3.8) October 2009

© 2009 ClearOne Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Other product names may be registered trademarks of their respective owners who do not necessarily endorse ClearOne or ClearOne's products in the United States and/or other countries.

ClearOne Document: 800-151-880 Revision 3.7 September 2009.

Adobe® Flash® Copyright and Trademark Notice

Adobe® Flash® Player. Copyright © 1996 – 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. Adobe and Flash are either trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States and/or other countries.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 1

Converge Pro Product Family Overview....1

Important safety information....4

Converge Pro Product Descriptions....6

Customer Service and Support 14

Product Registration 14

Warranty Information....14

Operating Requirements....15

System Requirements....15

Unpacking....16

Controls and Connections 25

CHAPTER 2: EXPANSION BUS & LCD PROGRAMMING 3

Expansion Bus 33

Device IDs....34

LCD Programming Overview 35

LCD Channels Menu....39

LCD Settings Menu 40

LCD Macros Menu 43

LCD Preset Menu 43

CHAPTER 3: CONVERGE CONSOLE PROGRAMMING 4

Installing Converge Console....45

Converge Console Overview 48

Site File Overview 53

Connect to a Site 56

Site Properties 57

Unit Properties 62

Converge Pro VH20 Site Properties 67

Configuration Mode Overview 73

Unit Tab 74

Channel Tab Overview 86

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) 90

NC (Noise Cancellation) 93

Filters. 95

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control) Tab 100

Mic Gating....102

Mic Input Settings 106

Line Input Settings 112

Telco/VoIP RX Settings 117

Output Settings 127

Telco/VoIP TX Settings 131

Processing Settings 138

Fader Settings....146

Matrix Tab 150

AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference Tab 154

Macro Tab 157

Gating Tab....161

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

Control Tab 164

String Tab 167

Event Scheduler Tab 169

Database Tab 171

Optimizing Gain Structure....176

Drag and Drop Configuration 179

Preset Mode 185

File Menu Overview....192

Print Reports 194

View Menu Overview....195

Add Menu 197

Connect Menu Overview....200

Modes Menu Overview....201

Services Menu Overview....202

Dialer....203

Phonebook 205

Label Editor....207

Device Log 208

Event Log 211

Web Builder....213

Firmware Loader 218

Debug Console 220

Execute Presets 226

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION PROGRAMMER'S INTERFACE 228

Type and Device IDs 228

Conventions 228

Command Form Description 228

Groups and Channels. 229

Meter Type Definitions Table 230

Serial Commands 237

APPENDIX B: DEFAULT PINOUTS 298

Control/Status Ports 298

All Models: RS-232 Port 305

APPENDIX C: FIRMWARE LOADING PROCEDURE 306

APPENDIX C: SPECIFICATIONS 307

Converge Pro 880....307

Converge Pro 880T 309

Converge Pro 880TA. 311

Converge Pro 840T 313

Converge Pro 8i 315

CONVERGE PRO 8i (continued) 316

Converge Pro TH20 317

Converge Pro VH20 318

Converge SR 1212 319

Converge SR 1212A 321

APPENDIX D: COMPLIANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

FCC Part 15/ICES-003 Compliance 323

FCC Part 68 Compliance 323

Electrical Safety Advisory 324

IC COMPLIANCE 324

EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE 325

EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE 327

NEW ZEALAND COMPLIANCE 329

Congratulations! You have purchased a ClearOne® Converge™ Pro audio conferencing solution. The Converge Pro product family represents a revolutionary advance in state-of-the-art audio technology for large-scale conferencing applications.

ClearOne introduced its first audio conferencing products to the market in 1990 under the brand name Gentner®. Today, ClearOne has over 80,000 installations worldwide in organizations ranging from the Fortune 1,000 to the federal government. ClearOne products are used in the most demanding conferencing applications, where they consistently deliver industry-leading audio quality and unsurpassed reliability.

ClearOne's proprietary Distributed Echo Cancellation® (DEC) technology forms the foundation of the Converge Pro product family, and provides optimal audio quality for today's distributed conferencing environments. In addition to DEC, other ClearOne innovations – including noise cancellation, automatic gain and level control, advanced microphone gating, adaptive ambient, and ClearEffect™ wideband audio emulation – produce crystal-clear audio that is equivalent to conference participants being in the same room.

Interior view of a large lecture hall with rows of desks and a presentation screen (no visible text or signage)

Applications

The Converge Pro product family provides scalable conferencing solutions for any size venue. Some common applications include:

Boardrooms

Training rooms •

Courtrooms•

Multimedia rooms•

Distance learning•

Auditoriums•

Houses of worship•

Sound reinforcement•

Large meeting venues •

Models

The Converge Pro product family includes the following models:

Converge Pro 880•

Converge Pro 880T•

Converge Pro 880TA •

Converge Pro 840T•

Converge Pro TH20•

Converge Pro VH20•

Converge Pro 8i•

Converge Pro SR1212•

Converge Pro SR1212A•

Common Benefits

Each product in the Converge Pro product family offers the following benefits:

Superior audio quality•

ClearOne's next generation signal processing algorithms

Field-proven conferencing technology•

Flexible configuration and expandability•

Improved configuration and management software

Simplified programming•

Reduced installation times•

• Best-in-class processing speed

- ClearOne's world-class customer service, technical support, and field engineering services

Common Features

The leading-edge features common to all products in the Converge Pro family include:

• USB connector on front panel for easy connectivity with a laptop or PC
  • Dual RJ-45 Ethernet ports
  • Dual RJ-45 expansion bus ports
  • TDM (Time Division Multiplexed) mix/minus audio and control buses
  • RS-232 serial port (up to 115,200 bps)
• Dual DB-25 control/status GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) Ports
• Mini-phoenix audio input/output connectors (color-coded by channel type)
  • Differential inputs and outputs

Feature Enhancements

Converge Pro feature enhancements include:

• ClearOne's next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation—up to eight discrete digital signal processors (DSPs) improve full-duplex performance and remove echo in the most difficult acoustic environments.
• New PTT (Push-to-Talk) microphone compatibility provides greater design and configuration flexibility.
• Advanced noise cancellation reduces background noise caused by fans, HVAC systems, and other relatively constant background noise sources.

• Up to eight independent signal processing blocks, each with 15 user-configurable filters (including all-pass, low-pass, high-pass, low-shelving, high-shelving, and parametric), delay, and compression. ClearOne's unparalleled processing power enables you to use all of these features simultaneously in any combination, allowing you to create optimized audio configurations for every environment and application.

• Enhanced expansion bus (E-bus) capabilities—connect up to 34 Converge Pro units together and use up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines in a single Converge Pro installation.
  Increased distance between units—up to 200 feet/60.96 meters.

• Graphical, user-configurable routing matrix allows you to route any input channel to any output, processing, or fader channel (or combination thereof) on any Converge Pro unit, or across the expansion bus.
  Front panel control of mute and gain for all input and output channels.
  Safety mute button on the Console™ software button bar instantly mutes all outputs.
• ClearOne's DSP (Digital Signal Processing) technology ensures crystal-clear audio between conferencing sites.

AEC (Acoustical Echo Cancellation) Enhancements

Smoothing filters to reduce artifacts•

Pre-AEC bypass channels•

Improved AEC adaption and noise suppression algorithms

Automated Push-to-Talk microphone mode with AEC freezing

Gain and gating control tracking

Cross point gain adjustments•

Four fader channels•

Microphone preamp gain control

• 7 dB coarse gain and .5 dB fine gain increments for improved microphone gain matching
  • AGC (Automatic Gain Control) algorithm
  • ALC (Automatic Level Control) algorithm

Telephone Hybrid Enhancements (880T, 880TA, 840T, TH20)

• Type I & Type II auto-sensing telephone interface (U.S. and E.U.)
  • International impedance matching
• Improved TEC (Telco Echo Cancellation) with 31 millisecond tail time
  • Continual TEC adaptation to telephone line conditions
• ClearEffect™ wideband audio emulation algorithm
  • Digital anti-alias filter minimizes CO switching noise and hum
  • ALC (Automatic Level Control) on telco receive channel
• Improved call management and processing
• Adjustable dial tone, DTMF attenuation
• Off-hook DTMF generation
• Robust dial tone detection
• Caller ID & selectable ringers
• Touch-tone dialing capability (44 character dial string)
• Analog telephone line compatibility
  • 10 W speaker amplifier (880T, 880TA, 840T)
• Custom ring cadence detect

- Custom telephone line settings for international teleconferencing and in-country localization

VoIP and SIP Functionality (VH20)

• Voice over Internet Protocol functionality - Providing telephone functionality over an Internet connection
- SIP - Session Initiation Protocol used to establish, modify and terminate VoIP calls
• Support for wideband Audio – G.722
- ClearEffect™ wideband audio emulation algorithm
• ALC (Automatic Level Control) on telco receive channel
- Caller ID & selectable ringers

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

Read all safety information before using this product.

Read these instructions.1.

Keep these instructions.2.

Heed all warnings.3.

Follow all instructions.4.

Do not use this apparatus near water.5.

Clean only with dry cloth.6.

1. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
3. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Apparatet skal tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.
4. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.11.

1. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
   Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.13.
2. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
3. Use the mains plug to disconnect the apparatus from the AC mains. The mains plug shall remain readily operable.
4. On/Off switch located on the front panel of the Converge Pro 880TA and SR 1212A does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains.
5. To completely disconnect unit power from the AC mains, disconnect the unit's power cord from the mains socket. To reconnect power, plug the unit's power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines.
6. Caution: Danger of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly displaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Battery should only be replaced by qualified personnel and is not intended as a user serviceable part. Do not expose batteries or battery pack to excessive heat such as prolonged sunlight, fire or other heat sources.
7. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock.
8. This product can interfere with electrical equipment such as tape recorders, TV sets, radios, computers and microwave ovens if placed in close proximity.
9. Class 2 Wiring IS REQUIRED for these devices. Wiring and install should only be performed by qualified personnel.

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN AVIS. RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE - NC PAS OUVRIR THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROW HEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF DANGEROUS VOLTAGE INSIDE THE PRODUCT CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. THE EXCLAMATION POINT WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WARNING SIGN ALERTING YOU OF IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT. SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM / BACK OF PRODUCT

Save These Instructions

Front view of a server rack unit with ventilation grilles and control knobs (no visible text or labels)

Front view of a gray rack-mounted network device with ports and connectors (no visible text or labels)

The 880TA stands as the new flagship of the Converge Pro line. Re-designed, re-tooled with added power and functionality, the 880TA also provides industry-leading expansion capabilities.

Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set

Signal Processing Improvements

Telephone noise cancellation (receive channel) »

ClearEffect™ wideband emulation for speech enhancement »

Automatic level control (receive channel) »

Caller ID & selectable ringers »

Custom ring cadence detect »

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

Enhanced Feedback Canceller

Multichannel Control on each amplifier

Next-generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation

Improved duplex performance »

Push-to-talk microphone compatibility »

Next-generation Noise Cancellation•

» Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions

- Pre-AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications

» A maximum processing delay of four (4) milliseconds

• Management Improvements

»Integrated Ethernet and USB connections

» SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts

» Web-based user and management control consoles

»Event scheduler

»Diagnostic console

• Simplified Configuration Software

»Drag & drop A/V and channel objects

» Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel

Superior Audio Performance

• Next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input
• First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end
• 20Hz – 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response
• AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines »18 expansion busses
  • Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix-minus audio buses for routing between units
• Ten microphone gating groups (four internal & six global) allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility
  • 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS

Converge Pro 880

Front view of a silver electronic device with control knobs and a central display (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a black network switch device with ports and connectors (no visible text or symbols)

The successor to the industry-leading XAP® 800. The 880 delivers rich functionality with improved audio performance, enhanced management, and simplified configuration for audio conferencing and sound reinforcement applications.

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

Next-generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation

Improved duplex performance »

Push-to-talk microphone compatibility »

Next-generation Noise Cancellation•

Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions »

Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage

0 - 56dB in 7dB increments »

Pre-AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications

A maximum processing delay of four (4) milliseconds »

Management Improvements

Integrated Ethernet and USB connections »

SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts »

Web-based user and management control consoles »

Event scheduler »

Diagnostic console »

• Simplified Configuration Software

»Drag & drop A/V and channel objects

Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel »

- Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

• Next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input
• First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end
• 20Hz – 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response
• AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
• Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix/minus audio buses for routing between units
• Ten microphone gating groups (four internal & six global) allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility
• 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

Front view of a silver electronic device with control knobs and a central display (no visible text or symbols)

Back view of a network device showing ports, connectors, and a switch (no visible text or labels)

The 880T leverages the rich functionality of the Converge Pro 880, and adds a built-in telephone interface and power amplifier for standalone conferencing applications. The 880T also provides industry-leading expansion capabilities, allowing you to connect it with other Converge Pro units for complex installations.

Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set

Signal Processing Improvements

Telephone noise cancellation (receive channel) »

ClearEffect™ wideband emulation for speech enhancement »

Automatic level control (receive channel) »

Caller ID & selectable ringers »

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

Next-generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation•

Improved duplex performance »

Push-to-talk microphone compatibility »

Next-generation Noise Cancellation

Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions »

Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage

0 - 56dB in 7dB increments »

Pre-AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications

A maximum processing delay of four (4) milliseconds »

• Management Improvements

»Integrated Ethernet and USB connections

» SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts

» Web-based user and management control consoles

»Event scheduler

»Diagnostic console

• Simplified Configuration Software

»Drag & drop A/V and channel objects

Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel »

- Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

• Next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input
• First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end
• 20Hz – 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response
• AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
• Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix-minus audio buses for routing between units
• Ten microphone gating groups (four internal & six global) allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility
  • 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

Front view of a silver electronic device with control knobs and a central display (no visible text or symbols)

Back view of a network switch device showing ports, connectors, and a USB port (no visible text or labels)

The successor to the industry-leading XAP 400. The 840T provides the same rich feature set as the 880T, complete with a built-in telephone interface and power amplifier for standalone conferencing applications. For large venues, the 840T also provides industry-leading expansion capabilities via ClearOne's expansion bus technology.

Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set

Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation (receive channel) » ClearEffect™ wideband emulation for speech enhancement » Automatic level control (receive channel) » Caller ID & selectable ringers »

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

Next-generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance » Push-to-talk microphone compatibility » Next-generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions » Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage »0 – 56dB in 7dB increments

• Pre-AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications
  » A maximum processing delay of four (4) milliseconds
• Management Improvements »Integrated Ethernet and USB connections »SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts »Web-based user and management control consoles »Event scheduler »Diagnostic console
• Simplified Configuration Software »Drag & drop A/V and channel objects » Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel
• Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

• Next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input
• First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end
• 20Hz – 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response
• AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
  • Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix-minus audio buses for routing between units
• Eight microphone gating groups (four internal & four global) allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility
• 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

Converge Pro 8i

Front view of a silver electronic device with control knobs and a display (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a gray network switch device with ports and connectors (no visible text or labels)

An input-only expansion box for the Converge Pro platform. The 8i delivers new economical configuration flexibility. It can be added to 880, 840T, and TH20 systems for additional microphone and line inputs, allowing customers to match the number of inputs and outputs required for specific conferencing and sound reinforcement installations.

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

- Economical Mic/Line only mixer for large configurations where additional output channels are not required

Next-generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation

Improved duplex performance »

Push-to-talk microphone compatibility »

Next-generation Noise Cancellation

Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions »

Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage

0 - 56dB in 7dB increments »

Pre-AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications

A maximum processing delay of four (4) milliseconds »

Management Improvements

Integrated Ethernet and USB connections »

SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts »

» Web-based user and management control consoles

»Event scheduler

»Diagnostic console

- Simplified Configuration Software

»Drag & drop A/V and channel objects

Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel »

- Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

• Next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input
• First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end
• 20Hz – 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response
• AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
  • Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix-minus audio buses for routing between units
• Ten microphone gating groups (four internal & six global) allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility
  • 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

Front view of a silver electronic device with control knobs and a central display (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a network switch device showing ports and connectors (no visible text or labels)

The successor to the industry-leading XAP TH2, the TH20 enables conference call functionality for Converge Pro installations through the addition of a telephone interface. The TH20 expansion bus allows you to link up to 16 TH20 units together for industry-leading conferencing capability. It also adds two line-level inputs and outputs for increased system capacity.

Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set

Signal Processing Improvements•

Telephone noise cancellation (receive channel) »

ClearEffect™ wideband emulation for speech enhancement »

Automatic level control (receive channel) »

Caller ID »

Selectable ringers »

Increased I/O capabilities•

Two line-level inputs and two line-level outputs »

Audio Expansion bus (E-bus) »

Management Improvements•

Integrated Ethernet and USB connections »

SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts »

Web-based user and management control consoles »

Event scheduler »

»Diagnostic console

- Simplified Configuration Software

»Drag & drop A/V and channel objects

» Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel

- Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

• Next-generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input
• 20Hz – 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response
• AGC on line inputs to keep gain levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
• Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix-minus audio buses for routing between units
• Eight microphone gating groups (four internal & four global) allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility
• 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control/configuration with single command execution

Front view of a silver electronic device with ports and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a network switch device showing ports and connectors (no visible text or labels)

The VH20 enables VoIP call functionality for Converge Pro installations through the addition of a SIP interface. The VH20 expansion bus allows you to link to other Converge Pro units and up to 16 VH20 units together for industry-leading conferencing capability. It also adds two line-level audio inputs and outputs for increased system capacity.

Advanced Feature Set

SIP Features• Dual Proxy Registration »

Call Features • Speedial/Redial »

Network Features DNS » VLAN Tagging » TLS Encryption for added security »

Superior Audio Performance

• G.722 Wide band audio
- AGC on line inputs to keep gain levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable: Link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
  • Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix-minus audio buses for routing between units
  • 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
• 255 Macros for customized audio control/configuration with single command execution

Compatibility/Interoperability

• Cisco
  • Avaya
• Nortel
• Codian/Tandberg
• Plycom/Accord
• Radvision MCU

Front view of a server rack unit with ventilation grilles and control knobs (no visible text or labels)

Front view of a network equipment unit with ports and connectors (no visible text or symbols)

The SR1212A is a 12x12 digital matrix mixer that is the ideal solution for sound reinforcement and room combining applications. In addition to improved audio performance, enhanced management, and simplified configuration, the SR1212 offers industry-leading expansion capabilities to accommodate virtually any size venue.

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage

0 - 56dB in 7dB increments »

Management Improvements

Integrated Ethernet and USB connections »

SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts »

Web-based user and management control consoles »

Event scheduler »

Diagnostic console »

Simplified Configuration Software

Drag & drop A/V and channel objects »

Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel »

Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end•

20Hz - 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response

AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
• Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix/minus audio buses for routing between units
• Eight microphone gating groups (four internal & four global) allow separation of microphones into individual gating groups
  • 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
  • 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

Converge Pro SR1212

Front view of a silver electronic device with ports and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a black electronic device rear panel with ports and connectors (no visible text or symbols)

The successor to ClearOne's PSR1212, the SR1212 is a 12x12 digital matrix mixer that is the ideal solution for sound reinforcement and room combining applications. In addition to improved audio performance, enhanced management, and simplified configuration, the SR1212 offers industry-leading expansion capabilities to accommodate virtually any size venue.

Advanced Conferencing Feature Set

Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage

0 - 56dB in 7dB increments »

Management Improvements

Integrated Ethernet and USB connections »

SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts »

Web-based user and management control consoles »

Event scheduler »

Diagnostic console »

Simplified Configuration Software

Drag & drop A/V and channel objects »

Selectable Console views—Unit, Matrix, and Channel »

Expanded serial command set

Superior Audio Performance

First-microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end

20Hz - 22kHz bandwidth for full-range audio response

AGC & ALC to keep all participants' audio levels balanced and consistent

Configuration Flexibility

• Scalable—link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines
• Enhanced expansion bus, featuring 18 mix/minus audio buses for routing between units
• Eight microphone gating groups (four internal & four global) allow separation of microphones into individual gating groups
• 32 user-programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations
• 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command

CUSTOMER SERVICE AND SUPPORT

ClearOne is committed to providing best-in-class customer service and support. If you need assistance installing, configuring, or operating your Converge Pro system, or if you have questions about ClearOne products or services, please contact us at one of the locations listed below. ClearOne also welcomes your comments and suggestions.

ClearOne on the Web

Corporate Website: www.clearone.com

Sales Email: [e-mail]

Tech Support Email: [e-mail]

North America (Worldwide Headquarters)

ClearOne Communications

Edgewater Corporate Park, South Tower

5225 Wiley Post Way, Suite 500

Salt Lake City, Utah 84116 USA

Telephone: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Toll-Free: 800-945-7730

Tech Support: 800-283-5936

Latin America

Telephone: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Sales Email: [e-mail]

Tech Support Email: [e-mail]

EMEA

Telephone: [phone]

Sales Email: [e-mail]

Tech Support Email: [e-mail]

Asia-Pacific/Japan/Oceania

Telephone: [phone]

Sales Email: [e-mail]

Tech Support Email: [e-mail]

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Register your Converge Pro product(s) online at http://www.clearone.com/support/registration.php?content=main.

Registering your Converge Pro product(s) enables ClearOne to provide you with better technical assistance, and to notify you of important information regarding your Converge Pro product including available upgrades, technical bulletins, and new product information.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

ClearOne Communications, Inc. warrants that this Converge Pro product is free of defects in both material and workmanship. For complete warranty information including length, coverage, and limitations, visit http://www.clearone.com/support/warranty.php?content=main

OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

Power

Converge Pro devices automatically accommodate voltages of 100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 W.

Telephone

Converge Pro devices operate on a standard analog telephone line and connect to the telephone system with a standard RJ-11 modular jack. If you do not have an RJ-11 jack where you want to install your Converge Pro, call your local telephone company for installation. Converge Pro 840T, 880T, 880TA and TH20 can be configured to meet compliance requirements of different countries via the Console software.

WARNING: The country code must be set correctly in Console to ensure that the unit operates properly when connected to the telco network, and that it complies with the country's telco requirements. Changing this code to a country other than the intended country of operation might cause Converge Pro devices to be non-compliant.

Equipment Placement

Converge Pro devices are designed for installation in a standard 19-inch equipment rack.

Environmental

Converge Pro devices are designed to operate at ambient unit temperatures between 14°F (-10°C) and 122°F (50°C).

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The Converge Pro Console software minimum system requirements are:

Supported Operating Systems

Windows XP

Windows 2000•

Windows Vista•

Minimum System Requirements

Processor: 300 MHz Pentium III (or AMD equivalent)

RAM: 256 Megabytes RAM•

Video: 1024x768 SVGA (16 bit)

Hard Drive: 40 Megabytes•

Network: 10/100 Mbps Ethernet

USB Port: Version 1.0•

CD Drive: CD/DVD ROM•

Minimum Software Requirements

Browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.0 or higher

Adobe Flash: Version 9.0 or higher

Java: Sun Microsystems' Java Runtime Environment version 6.0 or higher

UNPACKING

Use the illustrations below to verify that you received all components for your Converge Pro product. ClearOne is not responsible for product damage incurred during shipment. Inspect your shipment carefully for obvious signs of damage. If the shipment appears damaged, retain the original boxes and packing material for inspection by the carrier, and contact them immediately.

Converge Pro 880 Package Contents

CONVANCE PRO SIM ClearOne HDCrimer

(1) Converge Pro 880 P/N: 910-151-880

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-212

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

(3) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Black) P/N: 673-017-012

Technical line drawing of a coiled cable or connector with two connectors, placed on a rectangular base (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

(2) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Orange) P/N: 673-017-112

Line drawing of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond shape (no text or symbols)

(1) Converge Pro Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(1) Converge Pro Installation & Operation Manual P/N: 800-151-880

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6' P/N: 830-153-001

Converge Pro 880T Package Contents

CONVERSE PRO SSD ClearOne HDCreference

(1) Converge Pro 880T P/N: 910-151-881

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-212

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

(3) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Black) P/N: 673-017-012

Isometric line drawing of a cable with two connectors, enclosed in a diamond-shaped frame (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

(2) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Orange) P/N: 673-017-112

Line drawing of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond shape (no text or symbols)

(1) Converge Pro Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(1) Converge Pro Installation & Operation Manual P/N: 800-151-880

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6' P/N: 830-153-001

Converge Pro 880TA Packing Contents

Technical line drawing of a rack-mounted server unit with ports, cables, and a central monitor (no text or symbols visible)

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond shape (no text or symbols)

CD, CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY 800-151-881 (QTY 1)

CONN, TERM BLOCK/F 12 POS BLACK 673-017-012 (QTY 2)

Illustration of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

PWR CORD, MOLDED 6' BLK 3 COND 699-150-006 (QTY 1)

Isometric line drawing of a cable and two connector components on a rectangular base (no text or symbols)

CABLE ASSEMBLY, RJ45/RJ45 18" 830-150-004 (QTY 1)

CONN, TERM BLOCK/F 12 POS ORANGE 673-017-112 (QTY 2)

CABLE ASSY, TELEPHONE 12FT. 830-000-012 (QTY 1)

MANUAL, CONVERGE 840T 800-151-880 (QTY 1)

CABLE ASSY, USB A-B TYPE 6FT 830-153-001 (QTY 1)

Converge Pro 840T Package Contents

HDC Power Clearline HD

(1) Converge Pro 840T P/N: 910-151-840

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-212

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond shape (no text or symbols)

(1) Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(2) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Black) P/N: 673-017-012

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

Isometric line drawing of a coiled cable or hose with two connectors, placed on a rectangular base (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Orange) P/N: 673-017-112

(1) Telephone Cable 12' P/N:830-000-012

(1) Installation & Operation Manual P/N: 800-151-880

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6' P/N: 830-153-001

Converge Pro 8i Package Contents

CONVERE PRO 41 ClearOne HDC

(1) Converge Pro 8i P/N: 910-151-810

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-212

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

(2) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Orange) P/N: 673-017-112

Isometric line drawing of a coiled cable or hose with two connectors, enclosed in a diamond-shaped frame (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond shape (no text or symbols)

(1) Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(1) Installation & Operation Manual P/N: 800-151-880

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6° P/N: 830-153-001

CONVERG PRO TSM ClearOne HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC100 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC25 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC26 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC27 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC28 HDC29 HDC29 HDC29 HDC29 HDC29 HDC29 HDC29 HDC29 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30 HDC30

(1) Converge Pro TH20 P/N: 910-151-820

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond-shaped frame (no text or symbols)

(1) Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 6 Position (Black) P/N: 673-017-006

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 6 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-016

Isometric line drawing of a coiled cable or hose component on a square base (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

Line drawing of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

(1) Telephone Cable, 12' P/N: 830-000-012

(1) Installation & Operation Manual P/N: 800-151-880

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6' P/N: 830-153-001

CDIANTAL PRO TUBE ClearOne HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDC1000 HDCriteria

(1) Converge Pro VH20 P/N: 910-151-825

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a tilted square frame (no text or symbols)

(1) Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 6 Position (Black) P/N: 673-017-006

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 6 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-016

Line drawing of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

Illustration of multiple screwdrivers arranged on a flat surface (no text or symbols)

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

Line drawing of a flexible cable or hose with two connectors, enclosed in a tilted rectangular frame (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6' P/N: 830-153-001

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Cable Assembly, 7' P/N: 830-000-023L

Converge Pro SR1212 Package Contents

CONVERSE PRO BRT212 ClearOne HOCodena

(1) Converge Pro SR1212 P/N: 910-151-900

(1) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Green) P/N: 673-017-212

(1) Screw/Washer Kit P/N: 680-000-001

(3) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Black) P/N: 673-017-012

Isometric line drawing of a coiled cable or hose component mounted on a rectangular base (no text or symbols)

(1) RJ-45/RJ-45 Patch Cable, 18" P/N: 830-150-004

(2) Terminal Block Connector, 12 Position (Orange) P/N: 673-017-112

Line drawing of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

(1) Grounded Power Cord, 8' P/N: 699-150-006

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a diamond shape (no text or symbols)

(1) Converge Pro Software & Documentation CD P/N: 800-151-881

(1) Converge Pro Installation & Operation Manual P/N: 800-151-880

(1) USB Type A to Type B Cable, 6' P/N: 830-153-001

Converge SR 1212A Packing Contents

Technical line drawing of a rack-mounted server unit with labeled ports and internal components (no readable text or symbols)

CONVERGE SR
1212A (QTY 1)

CONN, TERM BLOCK/F 12 POS GREEN 673-017-212 (QTY 1)

SCREW/WASHER ACC KIT, RACK DECOR 4EA BLK 680-000-001 (QTY 1)

Simple line drawing of a circular ring inside a tilted square frame (no text or symbols)

CD, CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY 800-151-881 (QTY 1)

CONN, TERM BLOCK/F 12 POS BLACK 673-017-012 (QTY 2)

Line drawing of a coiled electrical sensor or probe with two connectors (no text or symbols)

PWR CORD, MOLDED 6' BLK 3 COND 699-150-006 (QTY 1)

Isometric line drawing of a coiled cable or connector with two terminal blocks, enclosed in a diamond-shaped frame (no text or symbols)

CABLE ASSEMBLY, RJ45/RJ45 18" 830-150-004 (QTY 1)

CONN, TERM BLOCK/F 12 POS ORANGE 673-017-112 (QTY 2)

CABLE ASSY, USB A-B TYPE 6FT 830-153-001 (QTY 1)

MANUAL, CONVERGE 840T 800-151-880 (QTY 1)

CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS

Refer to the following diagrams and descriptions for Converge Pro front panel controls and back panel connectors.

Converge Pro Front Panels

Converge Pro 880 Front Panel

A CONVERGE PRO 880 ClearOne ClearOne Converge 880 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 HDCamera

Converge Pro 880T Front Panel

A B C D E F G ClearOne ClearOne Converge 880T 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8 1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8 ClearOne MENU SELECT METER ON/OFF HDCamera

Converge Pro 880TA Front Panel

A B C D E F G H CONVERSE PRO 201A ClearOne P-04 R-01 T1W-01 T1W-02 T1W-03 T1W-04 T1W-05 T1W-06 T1W-07 T1W-08 T1W-09 T1W-10 T1W-11 T1W-12 T1W-13 T1W-14 T1W-15 T1W-16 T1W-17 T1W-18 T1W-19 T1W-20 T1W-21 T1W-22 T1W-23 T1W-24 T1W-25 T1W-26 T1W-27 T1W-28 T1W-29 T1W-30 T1W-31 T1W-32 T1W-33 T1W-34 T1W-35 T1W-36 T1W-37 T1W-38 T1W-39 T1W-40 T1W-41 T1W-42 T1W-43 T1W-44 T1W-45 T1W-46 T1W-47 T1W-48 T1W-49 T1W-50 T1W-51 T1W-52 T1W-53 T1W-54 T1W-55 T1W-56 T1W-57 T1W-58 T1W-59 T1W-60 T1W-61 T1W-62 T1W-63 T1W-64 T1W-65 T1W-66 T1W-67 T1W-68 T1W-69 T1W-70 T1W-71 T1W-72 T1W-73 T1W-74 T1W-75 T1W-76 T1W-77 T1W-78 T1W-79 T1W-80 T1W-81 T1W-82 T1W-83 T1W-84 T1W-85 T1W-86 T1W-87 T1W-88 T1W-89 T1W-90 T1W-91 T1W-92 T1W-93 T1W-94 T1W-95 T1W-96 T1W-97 T1W-98 T1W-99 T1W-100

Converge Pro 840T Front Panel

A B C D E F G ClearOne Converge 840T 176-22-58 - 3 15.00 ClearOne H I HDConfera

Converge Pro 8i Front Panel

graph LR
    A["CONVERGE PRO N"] --> B["Switch"]
    B --> C["ClearOne"]
    C --> D["ClearOne Converge 8i"]
    D --> E["1.009"]
    D --> F["1.009"]
    D --> G["1.009"]
    D --> H["1.009"]
    D --> I["1.009"]
    D --> J["1.009"]
    D --> K["1.009"]
    D --> L["1.009"]
    D --> M["1.009"]
    D --> N["1.009"]
    D --> O["1.009"]
    D --> P["1.009"]
    D --> Q["1.009"]
    D --> R["1.009"]
    D --> S["1.009"]
    D --> T["1.009"]
    D --> U["1.009"]
    D --> V["1.009"]
    D --> W["1.009"]
    D --> X["1.009"]
    D --> Y["1.009"]
    D --> Z["1.009"]
    D --> AA["1.009"]
    D --> AB["1.009"]
    D --> AC["1.009"]
    D --> AD["1.009"]
    D --> AE["1.009"]
    D --> AF["1.009"]
    D --> AG["1.009"]
    D --> AH["1.009"]
    D --> AI["1.009"]
    D --> AJ["1.009"]
    D --> AK["1.009"]
    D --> AL["1.009"]
    D --> AM["1.009"]
    D --> AN["1.009"]
    D --> AO["1.009"]
    D --> AP["1.009"]
    D --> AQ["1.009"]
    D --> AR["1.009"]
    D --> AS["1.009"]
    D --> AT["1.009"]
    D --> AU["1.009"]
    D --> AV["1.009"]
    D --> AW["1.009"]
    D --> AX["1.009"]
    D --> AY["1.009"]
    D --> AZ["1.009"]
    D --> BA["1.009"]
    D --> BB["1.009"]
    D --> BC["1.009"]
    D --> BD["1.009"]
    D --> BE["1.009"]
    D --> BF["1.009"]
    D --> BG["1.009"]
    D --> BH["1.009"]
    D --> BI["1.009"]
    D --> BJ["1.009"]
    D --> BK["1.009"]
    D --> BL["1.009"]
    D --> BM["1.009"]
    D --> BN["1.009"]
    D --> BO["1.009"]
    D --> BP["1.009"]
    D --> BQ["1.009"]
    D --> BR["1.009"]
    D --> BS["1.009"]
    D --> BT["1.009"]
    D --> BU["1.009"]
    D --> BV["1.009"]
    D --> BW["1.009"]
    D --> BX["1.009"]
    D --> BY["1.009"]
    D --> BZ["1.009"]

Converge Pro TH20 Front Panel

A CONVERGE TH20 H ClearOne C ClearOne Converge TH20 TH20 1.00 0.00 D E F G S ULTR 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 HDConfera I

Converge Pro VH20 Front Panel

A C D E F G ClearOne H I HDCriteria

Converge Pro SR1212 Front Panel

graph LR
    A["Converge PRD SR1212"] --> B["ClearOne"]
    B --> C["ClearOne Converge SR1212"]
    C --> D["Virtual Device"]
    D --> E["PCDC"]

Converge Pro SR1212A Front Panel

A B C D E F G H CONVERON AR IDEA ClearOne 1200 1207 1208 HDC reference

Converge Pro Front Panel Control Descriptions

A. USB Type B Port: Provides convenient front panel connectivity for laptops and PCs.
B. Microphone-On LEDs: Indicate microphone gate status and mute state.
C. LCD Display: Shows model number, unit name, IP address, firmware version, menu pages, menu options, configuration settings, and parameter values.
D. Menu Dial: Navigates the Converge Pro LCD programming menu and enables you to modify basic configuration settings.
E. ESC Button: Returns you to the previous screen on the LCD display.
F. Select Button: Displays the Converge Pro LCD programming menu and selects the highlighted option.
G. LED Bar Meter: Displays the audio level of a selected input, output, processing, or fader channel. Default meters: 880-Output 12, 880T-Output 12, 840T-Output 8, 8i-Mic 1, TH20-Telco Tx, VH20-VolP Tx, SR1212-Output 12.

- AMP Fault Indicator LEDs(880TA, SR 1212A): Indicates amplifier faults:

» 1-4 indicates clip
» 5 indicates thermal overload
» 6 indicates fault
» 7 indicates fan on/off

- Telco/VoIP Tx Rx Indicators (840T, TH20, VH20): Indicates transmit and receive activity during Telco/VoIP calls.

H. Amplifier On/Off Switch (880TA, SR 1212A): Turns power to the amplifiers on or off.

NOTE (880TA, SR 1212A): This does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains. To disconnect unit power from the mains, disconnect the unit's power cord from the mains socket. To reconnect power, plug the unit's power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines.

I. Telco On/Off Button & LEDs: This button connects/disconnects the communications line attached to the device while the LEDs indicate the connection status of the attached line (840T, TH20, VH20 (VoIP only), 880T, 880TA).

Converge Pro Rear Panels

Converge Pro 880 Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Converge Pro 880T Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Converge Pro 880TA Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 CE SR USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB 10 12

Converge Pro 840T Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Converge Pro 8i Rear Panel

1 2 4 6 7 8 9

Converge Pro TH20 Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Converge Pro VH20 Rear Panel

1456 7 8 9

Converge Pro SR1212 Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Converge Pro SR1212A Rear Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CE SB TWO SIN GND SERIAL NO. CALIFORN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CLASS 2 NUMBER COLD 1 COLD 2 COLD 3 COLD 4 THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD ORCH COOKING THE WORLD OYOCOR 10 12

Converge Pro Rear Panel Connectors

1. AC Power: IEC connector, 100 – 240VAC auto-adjusting, 50/60Hz.

Warning: This equipment must be connected to an AC mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection. The third prong of this connector (ground) is an important safety feature. Do not attempt to disable this ground connection by using an adaptor or other method.

1. Mic/Line Inputs: Mini-terminal push-on block connector for any combination of microphone and/or line level inputs. (Converge Pro 880: 8 inputs. Converge Pro 880T: 8 inputs. ConvergePro 880TA: 8 inputs. Converge Pro 840T: 4 inputs. Converge Pro 8i: 8 inputs. Converge Pro TH20, VH20: 0 inputs. Converge SR 1212: 8 inputs. Converge SR 1212A: 8 inputs.)
2. Line Outputs: Mini-terminal push-on connector for line-level outputs (880, 880T, 880TA, 840T, SR 1212, SR 1212A).
3. Line Inputs: Mini-terminal push-on block connector for line level inputs only. (Converge Pro 880: 4 inputs. Converge Pro 880T: 4 inputs. Converge Pro 880TA: 4 inputs. Converge Pro 840T: 4 inputs. Converge Pro 8i: 4 inputs. Converge Pro TH20, VH20: 2 inputs. Converge SR 1212: 4 inputs. Converge SR 1212A: 4 inputs.)
4. Line Outputs: Mini-terminal push-on block connector for line-level outputs (880, 880T, 840T, TH20, VH20, SR1212).
5. Link In and Link Out Ports: Two RJ-45 E-bus (expansion bus) connectors used to connect multiple Converge Pro units together to create a site. You can connect up to twelve Converge Pro 840T/880/880T/880TA/8i/SR 1212/SR 1212A units, up to 16 Converge Pro TH20/VH20 units, or any combination thereof, where the total number of microphone inputs does not exceed 96. Maximum cable length is 200 feet using Category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable.

WARNING: Use the Link In and Link Out ports with Converge Pro Devices ONLY. Connecting ANY other devices to the Link In and Link Out ports, including ClearOne XAP or PSR1212 products, or Power Over Ethernet (PoE) devices, will result in severe equipment damage.

1. RS-232 Serial Port: Female DB9 connector for connecting to a laptop, computer, or remote control serial devices (such as AMX and Crestron controllers).
   NOTE: Converge Console software cannot connect via the RS-232 port; use USB or Ethernet.
2. Control/Status A and B Ports: Two female DB25 connectors used for GPIO interactions between Converge Pro devices and external control devices (such as wall switches and push-to-talk microphones). This enables external devices and controller software to access the Converge Pro command set, including common functions such as volume control, muting, room combining, and preset changes.
3. PC and LAN Ethernet Ports: Two RJ-45 10/100Mbps auto-sensing Ethernet ports. The LAN port connects Converge Pro devices to a network. The PC port provides a pass-through network connection for use with a standard (not crossover) patch cable. The LEDs adjacent to each port indicate connection status and packet traffic activity.
4. Speaker Posts (880T, 840T)/Amplifier Terminal Block (880TA, SR1212A):

- 880T, 840T -- Two post/banana plug connectors used to connect an external speaker (4Ω – 16Ω). Internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier.

- 880TA, SR 1212A -- 8 speaker terminals used to connect an external speaker (8Ω). Four, 35 Watt internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier.

NOTE: To reduce risk of electrical shock and damage to equipment, never connect wiring or external equipment while the amplifier is power is on. Class 2 wiring is required. Maintain the correct polarity (+/-) on output connectors. (For example: Channel 1 positive (+) speaker lead connects to amplifier's channel 1 positive terminal. Channel 1 negative (-) speaker lead connects to amplifier's channel 1 negative terminal. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

140000 LINK OUT CHNL 1 CHNL 2 CHNL 3 CHNL 4 8 OHM - + - +

1. Telco Line and Telco Set Ports: Two RJ-11 connectors telephone ports. The Telco Line port connects an analog telephone line to Converge Pro devices. The Telco Set port provides a pass-through connection for telephone handsets (880TA, 880T, 840T, TH20).

NOTE: The Telco Set port is not available for use when the telephone hybrid is off-hook.

1. Amplifier Terminal Block (880TA, SR 1212A): 12 speaker terminals used to connect an external speaker (70/100 v). Four, 35 Watt internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier.

NOTE: To reduce risk of electrical shock and damage to equipment, never connect wiring or external equipment while the amplifier is power is on. Class 2 wiring is required. Maintain the correct polarity on output connectors. (For example: Channel 1 70/100V speaker lead connects to amplifier's channel 1 70V or 100V terminals. Channel 1 GND (or Common) speaker lead connects to amplifier's channel 1 GND terminal. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

GND 70V CHNL 1 70V 100V END CHNL 2 70V 100V END CHNL 3 70V 100V END CHNL 4 70V 100V END GND 70V

GND 100V CHIL 1 76V 100V END CHIL 2 76V 100V END CHIL 3 76V 100V END CHIL 4 76V 100V END GND 100V

CHAPTER 2: EXPANSION BUS & LCD PROGRAMMING

EXPANSION BUS

The Expansion Bus (E-bus) allows you to connect multiple Converge/Converge-Pro units together to create powerful audio and conferencing solutions for any size venue. The E-bus is a proprietary digital audio bus that provides control and audio data links between devices.

Expansion Bus Connections

Using the E-bus Link In and Link Out ports, you can connect up to 34 Converge Pro 880/880T/880TA/840T/8i and Converge SR 1212/SR 1212A units, and up to 16 Converge Pro TH20 and VH20 units, where the total number of microphone inputs does not exceed 96.

Connect units in daisy-chain fashion (as shown below) using the 18" straight-through patch cable included with each unit (Part # 830-150-004). For larger distances between units, use CAT 5 twisted pair cable with RJ-45 connectors. The maximum cable length between connected units is 200 feet (61 meters).

graph TD
    A["Converge Pro 840T"] -->|Link Out| B["Converge Pro 880"]
    B -->|Link In| C["Converge Pro TH20"]
    C -->|Link Out| B
    B -->|Link In| D["Converge Pro 8i"]
    D -->|Link In| C
    C -->|Link Out| E["Converge Pro TH20"]

Audio and Control Buses

The E-bus allows audio routing between source devices and destination devices on the E-bus network. The E-bus contains 18 independent digital audio buses labeled I–Z, which can route mic or line inputs in any combination across the E-bus network. The E-bus also contains four PA adapt/acoustic echo cancellation reference buses, six global gating buses, and one control bus.

S-Z Buses: These eight buses are line input mixer buses. They are used to route auxiliary audio, such as from a CD player or VCR, to and from other units on the network. These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required.

I-R Buses: These ten audio buses are generally used for routing microphone audio between Converge/Converge Pro devices. Information about the number of gated microphones (NOMcount) and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses. By default, all microphones are routed to the O bus.

PA Adapt/Acoustic Echo Cancellation Reference Buses: These buses allow an input from a Converge/Converge Pro device to reference an output on another linked device for AEC and PA Adaption. See AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference and AEC for more information.

Global Gating Groups A-F: These buses are microphone gating groups that support first-mic priority, maximum number of mics, etc. and work across all linked Converge/Converge Pro devices. Unlike the audio buses, they contain only mic status and gate parameters. See the Gating and Gating Grouptopics for more information.

Control Bus: The control bus is an independent channel from the E-bus's audio channel. This allows control information to pass even if the units are not using the audio link. All models support the use of the Converge/Converge Pro serial command set through the control bus.

DEVICE IDS

Device IDs provide unique identifiers for all units that are linked together using the E-bus. After making Expansion Bus connections, you must set a unique Device ID number for all units of the same Device Type on the E-bus.

Device Types and IDs

Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows:

Model Device Type Device ID Range
880 1 0-B
TH20 2 0-F
VH20 E 0-F
840T 3 0-B
8i A 0-B
880T D 0-B
880TA H 0-B
SR 1212 G 0-B
SR 1212A	I	0-B

NOTE: All models ship from the factory with a default DID of 0.

Assigning Device IDs

Use the following procedure to assign device IDs using the front panel controls:

1. Press the Select button on the front panel. The Converge Menu appears.

CONVERGE MENU Channels Settings Macros Presets

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight the Settings menu. Press the Select button. The Settings menu appears.

SETTINGS PAGE 1/2 RS232 Network DID Default

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight DID. Press the Select button. The Device ID menu appears.

DEVICE ID MENU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight the desired value. Press the Select button to select it.
2. The Change DID Menu prompt appears. Choose Yes to set the selected DID value, or No to return to the Device ID menu.

CHANGING DID MENU Change DID to 4? Yes No

1. Press Esc until to return to the Settings menu.

Repeat this process for each device on the E-bus network.7.

NOTE: You can also set Device IDs in the Unit Properties screen in Console (when disconnected). However, DID assignments made in Console must match the DID assignments made using the front panel.

LCD PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW

LCD Programming allows you to make simple configuration adjustments using front panel controls (shown below).

ABCDEF CONVERSE PRO AUTO ClearOne G I H HDCinference

A. USB Type B Port: Provides convenient front panel connectivity for laptops and PCs.
B. Microphone-On LEDs: Indicate microphone gate status and mute state.
C. LCD Display: Shows model number, unit name, IP address, firmware version, menu pages, menu options, configuration settings, and parameter values.
D. Menu Dial: Navigates the Converge Pro LCD programming menu and enables you to modify basic configuration settings.
E. ESC Button: Returns you to the previous screen on the LCD display.

F. Select Button: Displays the Converge Pro LCD programming menu and selects the highlighted option.

G. LED Bar Meter: Displays the audio level of a selected input, output, processing, or fader channel. Default meters: 880-Output 12, 880T-Output 12, 840T-Output 8, 8i-Mic 1, TH20-Telco Tx, VH20-VolP Tx, SR1212-Output 12.

- AMP Fault Indicator LEDs(880TA, SR 1212A): Indicates amplifier faults:

1-4 indicates clip »

5 indicates thermal overload »

6 indicates fault »

7 indicates fan on/off »

- Telco/VoIP Tx Rx Indicators (840T, TH20, VH20): Indicates transmit and receive activity during Telco/VoIP calls.

H. Amplifier On/Off Switch (880TA, SR 1212A): Turns power to the amplifiers on or off.

NOTE (880TA, SR 1212A): This does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains. To disconnect unit power from the mains, disconnect the unit's power cord from the mains socket. To reconnect power, plug the unit's power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines.

I. Telco On/Off Button & LEDs: This button connects/disconnects the communications line attached to the device while the LEDs indicate the connection status of the attached line (840T, TH20, VH20 (VoIP only), 880T, 880TA).

In addition to making configuration adjustments from the front panel, you can also run macros and execute presets. For more information on using front panel controls, see Controls and Connections.

Adjusting LCD Menu Parameters

Use the following procedure to adjust LCD Menu parameters:

1. Press the Select button to access the Converge Menu.

2. Scroll to the parameter you want to adjust using the Menu Dial.

3. Press the Select button to select the parameter. The parameter will stop flashing when selected.

4. Select the value for the parameter using the Menu Dial.

5. Press the Select button to save the parameter value. To discard the change and return to the previous menu, press the Esc button.

NOTE: Use the Console software in Configuration Mode for advanced configuration tasks.

LCD Menu Tree

graph TD
    A["ClearOne Converge 840T\n32: CONVERGE840T-F0\nIPA: 192.168.1.2\n1.0.00"] --> B["CONVERGE MENU\nChannels\nSettings\nPresets\Macros"]
    B --> C["Channels"]
    B --> D["Settings"]
    B --> E["Macros"]
    B --> F["Presets"]
    C --> G["Mics\nInputs\nOutputs\nProcess\nFaders\nTelco Tx\nTelco Rx\nPwr Amp"]
    D --> H["RS-232\nNetwork\nDID\nDefault\nContrast"]
    E --> I["Macros\n1-255"]
    F --> J["Presets\n1-32"]

As shown above, the main menus on the LCD display are:

Channels•

Settings•

Macros•

Presets

LCD Default Display

When you power up a Converge/Converge Pro unit, the LCD display reads Initializing. If an error occurs, contact ClearOne Technical Support. When initialization is complete, ClearOne Converge[Model Number] appears on the LCD panel, along with the device type, device ID, device name, IP address, and firmware revision level as shown below.

ClearOne Converge 840T 32: CONVERGE840T-F0 IPA: 192.168.1.2 1.0.00

Model

DeviceType, ID, Name

IP Address

Firmware Level

To access the LCD menu, press the Select button. The Converge Menu appears as shown below.

CONVERGE MENU Channels Settings PresetsMacros

Front Panel Lock

Using Console, you can create a PIN code and lock the front panel to prevent unauthorized access to LCD menu functions. When the lock feature is enabled and the front panel is unlocked, it will automatically re-lock after 3 minutes of inactivity. See the Unit Properties topic for instructions on how to enable the lock feature.

For more information, see the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Macros•

Presets•

Controls and Connections•

Console Configuration Mode

Mic Input Settings•

Line Input Settings•

• LCD Settings Menu
• LCD Macros Menu
• LCD Presets Menu
• Device IDs
• Unit Properties

LCD CHANNELS MENU

The LCD Channels Menu allows you to adjust the gain level and turn mute on or off for all channels.

Accessing the Channels Menu

To access the Channels menu, press the Select button on the front panel, use the Menu Dial to select Channels, and press the Select button.

The Channels menu appears as shown below:

graph TD
    A["Mics"] --> B["Inputs"]
    B --> C["ProcessOutputs"]
    style A fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style B fill:#2196F3,stroke:#388E3C
    style C fill:#2196F3,stroke:#388E3C
    subgraph Channels Page 1/2
        direction TB
        M["Mics"] --> N["Inputs"]
        N --> O["ProcessOutputs"]
    end

Channels menu options (i.e. channel types) include:

Mics•

Inputs·

Outputs·

Process•

Faders•

Telco/VoIP TX •

Telco/VoIP RX•

Pwr Amp •

After you select an option, a list of all available channels of that type is displayed. Use the Menu Dial to select the channel you want to configure and press the Select button. The Channels display appears.

Channel Display

The channel display is identical for every channel type, with the exception of the channel ID and channel label, which both vary depending on the channel selected.

As shown below, the display includes a peak-level meter, a peak dB reading, a gain level adjustment box, and a mute selector.

1-Input 1 dB -50 Meter Gain +0 dB Mute Off

Setting Channel Gain and Mute

The procedure for setting gain and mute is the same for all channel types:

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight Gain or Mute

Press the 2. Select button

Select the desired value using the 3. Menu Dial

1. Press the Select button to set the selected value
2. Press the Esc button to return to the Channels menu

NOTE: When mute is set to on for a mic input channel, the Microphone-On LED for that channel illuminates red on the front panel.

For more information, see the Table of Contents for these related topics:

LCD Programming Overview

LCD Channels Menu•

LCD Settings Menu•

LCD Macros Menu•

LCD Presets Menu•

Controls and Connections•

Mic Input Settings•

Line Input Settings•

Output Settings•

Process Settings

• Fader Settings
  • Telco/VoIP TX Settings
  • Telco/VoIP RX Settings
• Pwr Amp

LCD SETTINGS MENU

The LCD Settings Menu allows you to configure serial port settings and Device IDs, view network IP settings, change the LCD contrast level, and restore factory default settings for a unit.

Accessing the Settings Menu

To access the Settings menu, press the Select button on the front panel, use the Menu Dial to select Settings, and press the Select button.

The Settings menu appears as shown below:

SETTINGS PAGE 1/2 RS232 Network DID Default

Settings menu options include:

RS-232
- Network
• DID
- Default
- Contrast

Version•

SIP*•

\*VH20 Only

These options are described in the following sections.

RS-232

There are two parameters in the RS-232 menu: Baud Rate and Flow Control. To change these settings, use the following procedure:

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight Baud Rate or Flow Control

Press the 2. Select button

1. Select the desired value using the Menu Dial
2. Press the Select button to set the selected value
3. Press the Esc button to return to the Settings menu

You can also use the Comm tab of the Unit Properties screen to change these settings.

Baud Rate

This parameter allows you to set the baud rate to 9.6kbps, 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps, 57.6kbps, or 115.2kbps. The default is 57.6 kbps. Select the baud rate you want to use, then press the Select button. A message appears on the LCD display indicating the change is in progress, and another indicating the change is complete. When finished, the display returns to the RS-232 sub-menu.

Flow Control (Hardware)

All models use the RTS and CTS pins on the RS-232 port to regulate the transmission and reception of data. You can enable or disable flow control on the front panel, and set the flow control type in the Unit Properties window in Console.

If you select On (default) from the front panel LCD menu, select Hardware as the flow control type in the Unit Properties window. If you disable flow control on the front panel, select None in the Unit Properties window. When None is selected, the unit ignores flow control, and the relies on the connected external control device to ensure data is not lost.

NOTE: ClearOne recommends that you leave Flow Control enabled and connect all DB9 pins to avoid communication errors.

Network

The Network submenu displays the unit name, IP address, Gateway, and Subnet Mask settings for the unit. You cannot change any of these settings from the Network submenu. Use the Unit Properties screen in Console to change these settings.

DID

The DID submenu allows you to select a Device ID for the unit. Select the DID you want to use, press the Select button. Answer Yes to the prompt to change the DID, or No to keep the existing setting.

You can also use the General tab of the Unit Properties screen in Console to change this setting when disconnected from the unit. However, DID assignments made in Console must match DID assignments made using the front panel.

Default

Default restores ALL settings to their factory default values. Answer Yes to the prompt to restore default settings, or No to retain the existing settings.

Contrast

Contrast allows you to change the LCD contrast level. Use the Menu Dial to adjust the contrast level, then press the Select button to save it.

Version

Version displays all relevant version data related to the device.

SIP

SIP Displays which Proxy Settings are currently enabled on the VH20.

For more information, see the Table of Contents for these related topics:

LCD Programming Overview LCD Channels Menu LCD Macros Menu LCD Presets Menu Site Properties String Tab Unit Properties

LCD MACROS MENU

The LCD Macros Menu allows you to run macros from the front panel. To record Macros, use the Macro Tab in Console.

Accessing the Macros Menu

To access the Macros menu, press the Select Button on the front panel, use the Menu Dial to select Macros, and press the Select Button.

The Macro Menu appears as shown below:

MACRO MENU 1-Gain Adjust 7-8 2-UnProgrammed 3-UnProgrammed 4-UnProgrammed 5-UnProgrammed 6-UnProgrammed 7-UnProgrammed

Executing Macros

Use the following procedure to run macros from the front panel LCD display:

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight the macro you want to run Press the 2. Select button
2. Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected macro, or No to cancel.
3. Press the Esc button to return to the main LCD menu.

You can also run macros using the Macro tab or the Services menu in Console.

For more information, see the Table of Contents for these related topics:

LCD Programming Overview • LCD Settings Menu LCD Channels Menu LCD Presets Menu Macro Tab

LCD PRESET MENU

The LCD Preset Menu allows you to execute presets from the Converge Pro front panel. To create presets, use Console in Preset Mode.

Accessing the Presets Menu

To access the menu, press the Select button on the front panel, use the Menu Dial to select Presets, and press the Select Button.

The Preset Menu appears as shown below:

PRESET MENU 1-Combine Room 2-UnProgrammed 3-UnProgrammed 4-UnProgrammed 5-UnProgrammed 6-UnProgrammed 7-UnProgrammed

Executing Presets

Use the following procedure to execute presets from the front panel LCD display:

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight the preset you want to execute Press the 2. Select button
2. Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected preset, or No to cancel
3. Press the Esc button to return to the main LCD menu

You can also run presets from the Services menu while Console is in Configuration Mode.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

LCD Programming Overview•

LCD Settings Menu•

LCD Channels Menu•

Preset Mode•

Console Overview•

Services Menu Overview•

Configuration Mode Overview

CHAPTER 3: CONVERGE CONSOLE PROGRAMMING

INSTALLING CONVERGE CONSOLE

The Converge Console software is designed for Windows XP and Vista operating systems.

1. Ensure that all other programs or applications are closed and disconnect any USB cables from all Converge/Converge Pro devices (you will reconnect them later).
2. Insert the Converge/Converge Pro Installation & Documentation CD into the CD or DVD-ROM drive.
3. If the Autorun feature is enabled on the PC, the Converge/Converge Pro Installation window opens automatically. Click the Converge Console Software menu option on the left side of the screen to begin installation.

» If Autorun is not enabled, open My Computer navigate to the drive holding the Converge/Converge Pro Installation & Documentation CD. Double-click on the drive icon and launch setup.exe.

1. When the Converge/Converge Pro Installation & Documentation CD window appears, click the Converge Console Software menu option on the left side of the screen.

2. The setup program begins by installing Visual C++ runtime libraries. If prompted, click the Install button (shown below).

ClearOne Converge Console 2.0.18 Setup The following components will be installed on your machine: Visual C++ Runtime Libraries (x86) Do you wish to install these components? If you choose Cancel, setup will exit. Install Cancel

1. When the libraries complete installation, Setup checks the system for Adobe Flash. If Adobe Flash is not installed, Setup starts the Flash installation with a dialog (shown below).

2. Press Yes to install Adobe Flash. Once Flash installs, you will need to repeat this installation procedure starting at step 6 to complete Console installation.

NOTE: Adobe Flash is required to use Console. Clicking No will abort the Flash and Console.

1. The Converge Console Setup Wizard appears. Press the Next button and navigate through the License Agreement and Information screens that appear.

2. At the Select Installation Folder window, choose the directory where you want to install Console. Press the Disk Cost button to analyze available and required free space (if needed).

NOTE: ClearOne recommends that you use the default directory when installing Console.

1. Press the Next button until installation starts.

2. A Windows unsigned driver warning dialog appears as shown below. Click Continue Anyway (Windows XP) or Install this driver software anyway (Windows Vista) to proceed copy Converge/Converge Pro USB drivers onto your system.

Software Installation The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP. [Tell me why this testing is important.] Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future. Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing. Continue Anyway STOP Installation

NOTE: If you click STOP Installation (Windows XP) or Don't install this driver software (Windows Vista), Windows will terminate USB device driver installation. Console installation will continue to completion, and Console will function properly over IP. However, you will not be able to use Console over USB.

Follow the instructions that appear on-screen to complete installation. 14.

When Console installation is complete, the Converge Console icon appears on your desktop. You can now start Console over IP by double-clicking the icon, or through the All Programs > ClearOne Communications > Converge Console program group in the Windows Start menu.

1. To use a USB connection with Console, connect USB cables between the PC and the Converge/Converge Pro device.

NOTE: Windows automatically detects the device and begins the USB device driver installation. This process occurs the first time a new Converge/Converge Pro model is connected to the system, and once when you switch to a different USB port on the system. If you install drivers for a model and subsequently connect another model to the system via USB, Windows will repeat the installation process for the new device type.

1. When the Found New Hardware Wizard appears, select the No, not this time radio button. Click Next to begin installation.

Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer, on the hardware installation CD, or on the Windows Update Web site (with your permission). Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software? ○ Yes, this time only ○ Yes, now and every time I connect a device ● No, not this time Click Next to continue. < Back Next > Cancel

1. Select the Install the software automatically radio button in the second screen of the wizard (shown below), then click Next to proceed with installation.

Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for: ClearOne Converge Pro 840T If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk, insert it now. What do you want the wizard to do? • Install the software automatically (Recommended) • Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) Click Next to continue. < Back Next > Cancel

1. When the Windows unsigned driver warning dialog appears, click Continue Anyway (Windows XP) or Install this driver software anyway (Windows Vista) to install the drivers.

2. When the USB driver installation is complete, click Finish to close the wizard.

3. If you will be using IP to run Console, connect Ethernet cables between your LAN and Converge/Converge Pro device(s).

The Console software and your Converge/Converge device(s) are now ready for use. If you experience any problems during installation, contact ClearOne technical support.

CONVERGE CONSOLE OVERVIEW

The Converge Console software provides a powerful, intuitive interface for configuring and controlling your Converge/Converge Pro system. While you can use LCD Programming for simple configuration tasks, you must use Console to configure the advanced settings required to customize units for your application.

Accessing Converge Console

Start Converge Console by double-clicking the desktop icon, or by clicking the Start button in Windows and selecting All Programs > ClearOne Communications > Converge Console > Converge Console from the program list.

After Console loads, you can open an existing Site File from the File menu, or create a new site file by selecting New Site. When a site file is opened, Console displays the Unit Tab as shown below.

Default User ID and Password

Connecting to a site with Console requires a user name and password. The default user name is clearone; the default password is converge.

NOTE: User names and passwords are not case sensitive. ClearOne recommends that you record user names and passwords and store them in a secure place. There is no way to retrieve passwords. If you forget a password, the only way to connect to the device is to Default the unit.

After connecting, you can add/modify user IDs, change passwords, and set access privileges using the Site Properties dialog.

Navigating Converge Console

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 MLOPTR MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mates Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mates AGC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mates NC Telco RX Pres Gain Mates NC From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A B C D E F G H Process B F G H Process C D E F G H Process D E F G H Process E F G H Process F G H Process G H H Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerTemp 1 PowerTemp 2 PowerTemp 3 PowerTemp 4 NOM Mates Gain Pres Output ROB PS Comp Bit Gain Pres Amp To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N DEL Come Mates Gain Pres Processing TX. Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID) AV Devices Objects + Microphone + + DVD/CD + + Video Codec + + VCR + + Sound Card + + Amplifier + ● Loudspeaker

The Console window consists of the components described in the following sections.

Menu Bar

File View Add Connect Modes Services Help

Menus available on the Menu Bar include:

File•

View·

Add·

Connect•

Modes•

Services•

- Help: Opens the context-sensitive help system; provides software and firmware version information.

Button Bar

ClearOne

Controls on the Button Bar include:

Create Site Open Site Save Site Connect Disconnect Configuration Mode Preset Mode Execute Preset Run Macro Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Debug Console Web Builder Firmware Loader

VH20 Unit Properties: (This button is only active when Console is connected to a VH20)

Safety Mute: Toggles Safety Mute on and off. Safety Mute holds all outputs in a muted state.

Signal Generator LED: Flashes green when the signal generator for any unit in the site is turned on.

Help: Opens the context-sensitive help system; provides software and firmware version information.

Tab Bar

Unit

Channel

Metric

AEC Reference

Macro

Gating

Control

String

Event Scheduler

Database

Tabs available on the Tab Bar include:

Unit·

Channel•

Matrix•

AEC Reference (PA Adapt Reference for SR 1212/SR 1212A)

Macro

Gating•

Control·

String·

Event Scheduler

Database•

Clicking a tab displays the screen for that tab in the Console Center Pane.

Site Pane

Site Selection Site1 Current Unit (34) Converge#DT-03 Site View Tree View (34) Converge#DT-03 USB

Site Selection Board Room Current Unit (30) Converge840T-03 Site View Tree View (30) Converge840T-0 Mic Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco Rx Telco RX Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Fader Fader 1 Fader 2

Copy Unit Paste Unit Rename Channel Add Remove Unit Close Site Channel Routing Unit Properties Site Properties Print Site Report Print Unit Report

In Configuration Mode, the Site Pane contains the Site Selection drop-down list, Site View tab, and Tree View tab. Right-clicking in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab brings up a context menu with site, unit, channel, and reporting options applicable to the selected unit type.

In Preset Mode, the Site Pane displays the Current Site, Current Unit, Preset Selection list, and the Preset Name, Description, and Preset Mask entry fields.

Center Pane

The Center Pane displays the screen for the selected Console Tab. As shown above, the default screen is Unit Tab.

Objects Pane

AV Devices | Objects | | --- | --- | | Microphone Ceiling Tabletop Push to Talk Lectern Audio T AT8592M BeyerD SHM22PF1 BeyerD SHM424-1 Clock Audio C32E Crown LM 300A DVD/CD JVC XL-FZ2588K Kenwood CD-406 Pioneer-M426 Video Codec Aethra VegaStar Polycom VS 128 Polycom VS 4000 Polycom VS 512 Polycom VSX 7000 Polycom VSX 8000 Tandberg 3000MXP Tandberg 6000MXP Aethra AVC 8400 VCR Sony SLV-D350P Sound Card Audigy-LS Ensoniq PCI 128 Sony SLV-N750 Amplifier

AV Devices Objects Mic Tabletop PTT Mic Line Podium DVD Feed Telco Rx Telco Line In Output Ceiling Speakers Telco Tx Telco Line Out Processing PEQ Filter Fader +3.5 dB Fader

The Object Pane contains the AV Devices tab, which allows you to select from a list of pre-configured device settings and apply them instantly to a channel; and the Objects tab, which allows you to select from a list of custom channel objects and instantly apply them to a specific channel type. AV Devices and channel Objects are stored in the Database.

Status Bar

The Status Bar displays the current Console Mode, as well as connection status, site information, and unit information.

The LEDs in the Status Bar indicate current status as follows:

Clear • (no LEDs illuminated): Not connected

Yellow: • Connecting/pending

Green: • Connected

Red: • Off-line

Purple: • Current with error

Console Modes

Console has two modes: Configuration Mode and Preset Mode. Configuration Mode allows you to configure a wide range of advanced settings for your unit(s). Preset Mode allows you to create presets for specific venues and apply them instantly to Converge/Converge Pro unit(s).

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

• LCD Programming
• Site Properties
• Configuration Mode Overview
• Preset Mode Overview

SITE FILE OVERVIEW

Site Files allow you to store configuration settings for one or more units for a specific application or venue. Site files also provide Console with the necessary information to communicate with the Converge/Converge Pro devices using your PC.

Site files are a powerful tool for creating a library of configuration files for specific applications and room types. For example, you can create a baseline site file for divided rooms that specifies mic gating, output crosspoints, AEC, and AGC/ALC, store it on your hard drive, and use the file for other similar installations. This approach allows you to standardize settings across venues.

NOTE: All units ship with a default site configuration file.

Site files also enable you to create users, set passwords, set unit master/slave control status, set up email notification, and configure time/local parameters as described in the Site Properties topic.

Accessing Site Files

To open a Site file, select the File menu in Console.

Converg Console - Board Room.cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Board Room Current Unit (30) Converge840T-03 Site View Tree View (30) Converge840T-0 Mio: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco Rx Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco Tx Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Fader Fader 1 Fader 2 Unit Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Site: Board Room Unit: Converge840T-03 (Device ID: 0) ClearOne Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Griding Control String Event Scheduler Database Telco Rx 1 Telco Rx1 Dial Time Level +12 -9 -6 +3 -4 -30 -40 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +12 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9. +12 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69 -9.69

The File menu appears. Select Open Site as shown below.

File View Add Connec New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save As Site Properties Print 1 Board Room.cvg 2 Site1.cvg 3 Site1.cvg Exit

The Open dialog appears as shown below.

Open Look in: My Documents AdobeStockPhotos iTunes Music My Google Gadgets My Music My Pictures SnagIt Catalog Update Firmware_files Updater Board Room.cvg Site1.cvg Site2.cvg Site4.cvg My Documents My Computer My Network Places File name: Files of type: Converge Site file (*.cvg) Open Cancel

Locate the site file you want to open and click Open. Console opens the site file, and it appears in the Site Selection drop-down list in the Site Pane as shown below. Use the Files of type drop-down list to open G-ware files (.PSR file extension) and convert them to convert G-ware site files to Converge site files.

Site Selection Site1 Current Unit (34) Converge840T-03 Site View Tree View (34) Converge840T-03 USB

The selected site file is now available for use. You can open up to four site files simultaneously and switch between them using the Site Selection drop-down list.

Saving Site Files

To save the current Site configuration parameters, including any changes made since the active Site file was opened, click the Save button 📋 on the Button Bar, or select Save or Save As from the File menu.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Create A Site•

Connect to a Site•

Site Properties•

Console Overview•

Configuration Mode Overview•

Channel Tab Overview

Matrix Tab•

CONNECT TO A SITE

Connect To a Site

Click the Connect button 📋 on the Console Button Bar, or select Connect from the Connect Menu. The Connect dialog appears as shown below.

Connect Pull Data from Unit to Current Document Create New Document and Connect to Site Connect to Site and Push Current Document USB Connection IP Connection Device Information Connection: USB Device Name: ConvergeSRA-C8 Device Type: Converge SR1212A Device ID: 0 Connect Cancel

Connection options include:

• To automatically create a new site file, select the Create New Document and Connect to Site radio button
- To pull data from the unit to the current Site File, select the Pull Data from Unit to Current Document radio button (only available if a site file is open)
- To push data from the current site file to the unit, select the Connect to Site and Push Document radio button (only available if a site file is open the unit is added)
- To connect via USB, select the USB Connection radio button
- To connect via IP, select the IP Connection radio button, and select a unit from the Available Addresses drop-down list (or enter an IP address in the Enter Address entry box)

Press the Connect button to connect to the site or Cancel to close the dialog.

NOTE: The default login user name is ClearOne. The default password is Converge. User names and passwords are not case sensitive.

Disconnect from a Site

To disconnect from a site, press the Disconnect button 📋 on the Console Button Bar, or select Disconnect from the Connect menu. Answer Yes to the Confirm dialog that appears, or No to cancel.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site File Overview•

Site Properties•

Unit Communication (IP) Settings•

SITE PROPERTIES

Site Files are created and modified using the Site Properties window in Console. Site files contain all information about a particular installation including properties for all units in a site. For more information, see the Site File Overview topic.

Accessing Site Properties

To access the Site Properties window, select the File menu in Console, or right-click anywhere in the Site View or Tree View panes and select Site Properties from the shortcut menu.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (HN) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (HN) CONVERGE80TA-0 M L O P T R Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mates Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mates ACC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mates NC Telco RX 0.0dB Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 NCB F1 Comp BIB Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco TX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N From Exp. N From Exp. M From Exp. N From Exp. M From Exp. N From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Matrix Clearing Converge 880TA Exploration Add TX Del Come Max Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

The File menu appears. Select Site Properties as shown below.

File View Add Connec New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save As Site Properties Print 1 Board Room.cvg 2 Site1.cvg 3 Site4.cvg 4 Site2.cvg Exit

The Site Properties window appears with the General tab selected.

Site Properties - Board Room General Management Time:Local File File Name Board Room.cvg Path C:\Program Files\ClearOne\Converge Console\ Created: 4/23/2007 2:08:35 PM Modified: 5/10/2007 9:07:11 AM Site Info. Name Board Room Author k.davis Description OK Cancel

Create A New Site

To create a new site, select New Site from the File menu or by clicking the New Site button on the Console Button Bar. The Site Properties window appears.

NOTE: You must have administrator privileges to connect to units with Console, and to modify user names and passwords. User names and passwords are not case sensitive.

Site Properties are described in the following sections.

Site Properties: General Tab

The General tab of the Site Properties window displays Site file information as shown above. Enter a site name, file

author, and site description in the Site Info section of the tab. Press OK to save the changes, Cancel to close the Site Properties window, or click on the Management or Time/Local tabs to continue site configuration.

Site Properties: Management Tab

The Management tab (shown below) enables you to configure SNMP parameters, email notification settings, as well as user names and passwords.

Site Properties - ctsite2 General Management Time/Local Control Master Unit (H0) CONVERGE880TA-0 SNMP Manager IP Address Manager Port 0.0.0.0 162 Write Community Read Community private public Email Notifications SMTP Server Address Resolved SMTP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 Email Address Username/Passwords Edit Administrator Username/Password Edit Manager Username/Password Edit User Username/Password OK Cancel

Control Master Unit

All units in the site appear in the Control Master unit list. Selecting a Control Master unit designates that unit to control the SNMP interactions for the entire site across IP-based networks. To use SNMP, the Control Master unit(s) must be connected to the LAN via IP.

All other units in the site are Control Slave units. Control Slave units report events to the Control Master Unit for SNMP reporting and SMTP email notifications.

Serial Control interactions and Audio Control interactions are not affected by a unit's Control Master designation.

NOTE: All units are Control Slave units by default.

SNMP

In the SNMP section, enter the SNMP settings for the site. The Control Master nit uses this information to communicate SNMP events, including events reported by Control Slave nits.

NOTE: The Installation & Documentation CD contains SNMP MIB files for each device type for use with third-party SNMP management software.

Email Notifications

In the Email Notifications section, enter the SMTP Server address in the SMTP Server Address field and the IP address of the server that will receive email notifications in the SMTP Server IP Address field. The recipient's email address in the Email Address field.

User name/Passwords

In the User name/Passwords section, click the button for the user type that you want to create. The Name/Password dialog appears as shown below.

Admin Name/Password Username ClearOne New password ****** Confirm new password ****** OK Cancel

NOTE: The default user name is clearone. The default password is converge. User names and passwords are not case sensitive.

User access privilege levels are as follows:

Administrator• : Full Console and web portal access.

• Manager: Web access to Dialer, Maintenance, Registration, About, and Help pages.
• User: Web access to the Dialer, Registration, About, and Help pages.

Enter the appropriate user information and press OK to save the user information, or Cancel to return to the Site Properties dialog.

Site Properties: Time/Local Tab

The Time/Local tab enables you to configure time settings and specify location information as shown below. As shown below, you can set the date and time manually, synchronize the time with a PC, or use network time servers.

Site Properties - Board Room General Management Time&Local Time Current Site Time: Offline Date Time Use PC Local Time 05/18/2007 09:46:07 Apply Time Server 1 Time Server 2 Network Time 10.101.24.135 0.0.0.0 Time Zone ✓ Use Daylight Savings (GMT-07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada) Location Building Headquarters City Salt Lake City State Utah Country USA Company ClearOne Communications, Inc. Region North America OK Cancel

In the Time section of the tab, select Local Time or Network Time for the clock synchronization source.

When Local Time is selected, the Apply button is activated; pressing it updates the date and time on all units in the current site.

When Network Time is selected, you must enter the IP address(es) for the time synchronization server(s). The date and time is updated for all units in the site when you press the OK button, and it is automatically synchronized with the specified server(s).

Enter location information in the Location section of the tab (optional). Press OK to save the site file, or Cancel to close the Site Properties window.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site File Overview•

Connect To A Site•

Unit Properties•

Configuration Mode Overview

UNIT PROPERTIES

Unit Properties define properties for a specific Converge/Converge Pro unit. Unit Properties enable you to configure general unit settings such as name, and telephone country code, as well as IP and serial communication settings. Properties that apply to all units in a site are configured using Site Properties.

Accessing Unit Properties

To access the Unit Properties window, right click the unit you want to configure in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab of the Site Pane in Console.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (HW) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (HW) CONVERGE80TA-0 sxtt M L O P T E Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Max AEC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Max NC Telco RX 0.0dB From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A B C D E F G H Process B C D E F G H Process C D E F G H Process D E F G H Process E F G H Process F G H Process G H G H Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16 Output 17 Output 18 Output 19 Output 20 Output 21 Output 22 Output 23 Output 24 Output 25 Output 26 Output 27 Output 28 Output 29 Output 30 Output 31 Output 32 Output 33 Output 34 Output 35 Output 36 Output 37 Output 38 Output 39 Output 40 Output 41 Output 42 Output 43 Output 44 Output 45 Output 46 Output 47 Output 48 Output 49 Output 50 Output 51 Output 52 Output 53 Output 54 Output 55 Output 56 Output 57 Output 58 Output 59 Output 60 Output 61 Output 62 Output 63 Output 64 Output 65 Output 66 Output 67 Output 68 Output 69 Output 70 Output 71 Output 72 Output 73 Output 74 Output 75 Output 76 Output 77 Output 78 Output 79 Output 80 Output 81 Output 82 Output 83 Output 84 Output 85 Output 86 Output 87 Output 88 Output 89 UAV Devices Objects Microphone DVD/CD Video Codec VCR Sound Card Amplifier Loudspeaker MACB PS Comp Gain Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp P PowerAmp TELCO TX To Exq O To Exq P To Exq Q To Exq R To Exq S To Exq T To Exq U To Exq V To Exq W To Exq X To Exq Y To Exq Z To Exq I To Exq J To Exq K To Exq L To Exq M To Exq N Del Come Max Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID) Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

The Site/Unit menu appears. Select Unit Properties as shown below.

Input 4 Copy Unit Paste Unit Rename Channel Add Remove Unit Close Site Channel Routing Unit Properties Site Properties Print Site Report Print Unit Report

The Unit Properties window appears as shown below.

Converge 8BOTA Unit Properties - Device ID 0 General Comm Info. Unit ID FFFFFFFF MAC Address FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Device Name Converge8BOTA00 Device ID 0 Audio Master Slave Room Default Meter Meter Type Channel (O) Output Post Gain 8 Front Panel Mode Front Panel Pin Unlock 0000 Telephone Country Code US Versions Firmware Version Dictionary Version FPGA Version Host DSP Date SAT DSP Date Telco DSP Date OK Cancel

Add A New Unit

To add a unit to a Site, right-click in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab of the Site View pane, or select the unit type you want to add from the Add menu on the Menu Bar as shown below.

The Unit Properties window appears. Unit Properties settings are described in the following sections.

Unit Properties: General Tab

The Unit ID and MAC Address for the selected unit are automatically displayed at the top of the Info section of the tab. When connected, the firmware version, dictionary version, and DSP date versions are displayed in the Versions section at the bottom of the tab (when connected). These settings cannot be modified.

Device Name

Enter a descriptive name in the Device Name field. Device names are used as network identifier on NetBIOS

networks. They must start with a letter and can contain both letters and numbers, with a maximum length of 15 characters. No special characters are allowed except for “-”.

Device ID

Select a Device ID from the Device ID drop-down list.

Device IDs ensure that Console synchronizes with the proper unit when there are multiple units of the same type in a site. Therefore, each unit of the same type in a site must have a unique Device ID assigned using the front panel LCD Settings menu. All units ship from the factory with a default DID of 0.

Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows:

Model Device Type Device ID
880 1 0-B
TH20 2 0-F
VH20 E 0-F
840T 3 0-B
8i A 0-B
880T D 0-B
880TA H 0-B
SR 1212 G 0-B
SR 1212A	I	0-B

For example, if there are two Converge Pro 880s and one 840T in a site, the 880s must have unique DIDs. They could be assigned DIDs of 0 and 1 respectively, while the 840T could be assigned a DID of 0 without any conflicts.

NOTE: You must disconnect from the site in order to set the Device ID. Press the Disconnect button on the Button Bar.

NOTE: The DID specified in Console MUST match the DID set for that unit in the LCD Settings Menu. Otherwise when you reconnect to the site, Console will correctly recognize the unit with the correct DID, but it also adds a duplicate unit with the incorrect DID.

Audio Master

Select Slave (default) or Master from the Audio Master drop down list. Audio Master units ignore audio from upstream units in a site as shown in the sample stack below.

graph TD
    A["Slave"] --> B["RS-232 control device"]
    B --> C["Master"]
    C --> D["Slave"]
    D --> E["Master"]
    E --> F["Converge Pro 840T"]
    C --> G["Audio flow is stopped"]
    G --> H["Converge Pro 980"]
    H --> I["Converge Pro 860"]
    D --> J["Audio flow is stopped"]
    J --> K["Converge Pro 840T"]

This prevents audio from being received from units above the master unit in a site. For example, you can configure a site with multiple units for a room-combining application where all units act together when three smaller rooms are combined into a larger room. When the rooms are divided again, the audio from one room will not be available in the other two rooms due to the Audio Master configuration.

In graphic above, the third unit in the network is an Audio Master with an RS-232 control device attached. Audio from the first and second units in the network does not pass beyond the second unit. Likewise the second Audio Master unit in the network does not pass audio from the unit before it. Sites can use multiple RS-232 devices, which you can connect to any unit regardless of Control Slave or Master designations.

Serial control is not affected by Audio Master or Slave designations. Global serial control of the site is maintained by the unit connected to a control device through its RS-232 port, in this case the third unit in the stack, which is also designated as the first Audio Master in the network.

NOTE: A master unit is not required for Converge/Converge Pro sites, and in most installations, all units will be slaves. Also, SNMP Control is not affected by Audio Master designations.

For information about the Link In and Link Out connections used to build sites, see Controls & Connections.

Room

Enter a descriptive name for the room in the Room field.

Default Meter & Channel

Select an input, output, or processing channel to be the Default Meter on the front panel LED Meter when a channel is not specifically selected.

Front Panel Mode & PIN (Front Panel Lock/Unlock)

Select Lock in the Front Panel Mode field to lock the front panel LCD of the unit and require a PIN code to unlock it. Enter the unlock code in the Front Panel Pin field. Select Unlock in the Front Panel Mode field to leave the front panel LCD unlocked.

Telephone Country Code

Select the appropriate Telephone Country Code for your installation (880TA, 880T, 840T, TH20 models only).

Unit Properties: Comm (Communications) Tab

The Comm tab contains IP protocol selection and address settings, as well as serial port configuration settings as shown below.

Converge BBOTA Unit Properties - Device ID 0 General Comm IP Settings ✓ Use DHCP IP Address 0.0.0 Subnet 0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0 ✓ Use DNS DNS Address 2.0.0 IP Filters Filter 1 Filter 3 0.0.0 0.0.0 Filter 2 Filter 4 0.0.0 0.0.0 Serial Port Settings Baud Rate Serial Echo 57600 On Flow Control Hardware AMX Duet Discovery

IP Settings

If you want to use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), select the DHCP checkbox. (Selecting DHCP disables the remaining IP settings.) Otherwise, enter the IP Address, Subnet, and Gateway information, and DNS (Domain Name Server) addresses for your installation. The default is Use DHCP.

IP Filters

Use IP Filters to enter specific IP addresses that will be allowed to connect to the selected unit. You can specify a range of IP addresses by using zeros. For example, entering 192.168.105.0 will allow any IP addresses in the 192.168.105.1 to 192.168.105.254 range to access the unit.

Serial Port Settings

Select the Serial Port settings (Baud Rate and Flow Control) that are appropriate for your installation. Serial Echo enables and disables echo on the serial port. The default for Baud Rate is 57600. The default for Flow Control is Hardware. The default for Serial Echo is On.

When you are finished configuring unit properties, click OK to save the changes, or Cancel to close the Unit Properties window.

AMX Duet Mode

Sets a beacon to signify the device is AMX compatible and looks for new or updated modules on the AMX Web Site. If new or updated modules are available, the user will be prompted to download the module.

CONVERGE PRO VH20 SITE PROPERTIES

Site Properties for the Converge Pro VH20 are accessed identically to any other Converge unit. However, once the Properties, SIP Properties window has launched, several new configuration features are available.

NOTE: The SIP Properties window is also accessible by right-clicking the VH20 icon under Site View and selecting SIP Properties.

Converg VH20 Unit Properties - General Comm SIP Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Phone Number Local Phone Number: Display Name (Hostname): CONVER0EVHQ0-0 Proxy 1 Proxy 2 □ SIP Authentication Authorization User: admin Authorization Password: clearone □ SIP Proxy Registration User Domain: Default Proxy IP AddressAURL: Proxy Port: 5060 □ Outbound Proxy Proxy IP AddressAURL: Proxy Port: 5060 SIP Transport □ UDP Listen Port: 5060 □ TCP Listen Port: 5060 □ TLS Listen Port: 5061 □ CA Certs Private Key: Browse... Local Cert: Browse... Export Certificates... □ SIP Proxy 1 Registration: Disabled □ SIP Proxy 2 Registration: Disabled OK Cancel

Five tabs contain most of the configuration settings required to customize the Converge Pro VH20. Do not modify these settings unless you have in-depth knowledge of VoIP, SIP and Network functions, setup and protocols. Also,

be sure you have sufficient network privileges and access required to make required changes to your network during setup. If you are unsure, contact your Network Administrator before proceeding.

Proxy

The Proxy tab consists of 6 sections.

Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Phone Number Local Phone Number: Display Name (Hostname): CONVERGEVH20-0 Proxy 1 Proxy 2 SIP Authentication Authorization User: admin Authorization Password: clearone SIP Proxy Registration User Domain: Default Proxy IP Address/URL: Proxy Port: 5060 Outbound Proxy Proxy IP Address/URL: Proxy Port: 5060 SIP Transport UDP Listen Port: 5060 TCP Listen Port: 5060 TLS Listen Port: 5061 CA Certs Private Key: Browse... Local Cert: Browse... Add... Del Export Certificates...

Phone Number

• Displays the local phone number assigned to the specific unit. This number is usually obtained through your Network Administration.
• Display Name (Hostname): The name assigned to the specific unit. This name is configured within the Converge Console software.

Proxy 1, Proxy 2: Proxy 1 and Proxy 2 are identical and used as redundancy items.

SIP Authentication• : Enables SIP Authentication from the Network

Authorization User• : User name assigned for network authorization

Authorization Password• : Password assigned for network authorization

SIP Proxy Registration•

User Domain•

Default·

Proxy•

Domain Name•

Proxy IP Address/URL• : Enter the IP address/URL of the proxy server

- Proxy Port: Enter the port number for the proxy server

- Outbound Proxy: Enable this feature to use a proxy outside or alongside a firewall.

Proxy IP Address/URL• : Enter the IP address/URL of the proxy server

- Proxy Port: Enter the port number for the proxy server

- SIP Transport: Set transport settings here.

• UPD Listen Port: Specify the UPD Listen Port.
  • TCP Listen Port: Specify the TCP Listen Port.
• TLS Listen Port: Primarily used by Avaya systems, the TLS Listen Port is specified here.

- Private Key: Click the Browse button to upload your Private Key file

• Local Cert: Click the Browse button to upload your Local Certificate file
  • CA Certs: Use the Add or Del buttons to add or remove CA Certs

Timers

Timers are used to keep SIP sessions "alive" on the network. Normally, default values are appropriate.

Occasionally your Network Administrator may want to customize the settings. Do not change these settings unless directed to do so.

All Values are in milliseconds unless otherwise noted.

Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Timers ✓ Use SIP Session Timers Refer Timeout: 2000 sec Retransmission Timer T1: 500 ms Retransmission Timer T2: 4000 ms Retransmission Timer T4: 5000 ms Session Expires Timer: 1800 sec Min SE Timer: 1000 sec Register Timeout: 3600 sec

- Use SIP Session Times: This box is checked by default. Removing the check will disable all timers.

Refer Timeout• : Number of ms the server waits for a reply

Retransmission Timers• : Refers to three Timers

T1• : Sets the round-trip time for a packet

- T2: Sets the retransmit time from a non-invite request (REFER, BYE, etc.) and INVITE responses

T4: Sets the total time a given message can be on the network

• Session Expires Timer (Value is listed in Seconds): Default time before the current session expires due to inactivity. This value MUST be greater than the Min SE Timer value.
• Min SE Timer (Value is listed in Seconds): Minimum Session Timer
• Register Timeout (Value is listed in Seconds): The period of time a given device is registered on the network.

Network

Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Provisioning Use local settings Use DHCP/TFTP TFTP from DHCP TFTP Server 0.0.0.0 VLAN VLAN Priority: 0 VLAN ID: 1 (1 - 4094)

The Network tab allows the user to set basic network settings. Have your Network Administrator modify these settings.

- Provisioning: Provides the VH20 with access to data and network resources by receiving authorization and privileges via resource management.

• Use local settings: The unit uses local settings provided by the server
• Use DHCP/TFTP: User provides settings for the VH20 to gain access to the network

- TFTP from DHCP: TFTP settings are received from the server.

- TFTP Server: User manually enters the IP address of the TFTP Server.

- VLAN: Virtual LAN - A LAN configured through software rather than hardware. Toggling this setting activates the flexibility a VLAN can provide SIP configurations.

• VLAN Priority: Establishes the priority of the ID data coming from this specific unit.

VLAN ID• : Provides the ID number to the specific unit

Audio Stream

The Audio Stream tab contains user configurable settings for the audio stream, encryption, QOS and Codec details. Do not change these settings unless you have detailed knowledge of their purpose, they could dramatically effect call quality and performance.

Converge V120 Unit Properties - General Comn SP Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan RTP/RTCP RTP Base Port: 50000 RTCP Enable QoS Description/Precedence: Express Forwarding Custom/Current DSCP Value: 0x0 - (0x0 - 0x3F) SRTP Cipher: AES CTR MAC: HMAC SHA100 HDR Offer: 24 (0 - 24) SRCTP: NEGOTATE VAD VAD Noise Matching: None Level DTMF Relay Payload: 97 (96 - 127) Codec Priority G.722 - 64 Kbps G.722 - 56 Kbps G.722 - 48 Kbps G.711 uLaw G.711 ALaw G.729AB G.723.1 6.3 Kbps G.723.1 5.5 Kbps Select a codec on the left and press the up/down arrow to change its priority SIP Proxy 1 Registration: Disabled SIP Proxy 2 Registration: Disabled OK Cancel

RTP/RTCP·

RTP Base Port• : Port set to transmit RTP data.

RTCP Enable• : Check this box to enable RTCP

- QOS (Quality of Service): QOS is a method in which certain high demand (VoIP, Video, etc.) applications are allowed to maintain a minimum standard of service across a network to avoid unacceptable delays, dropouts or service interruptions during their communications by determining which packets have priority over others.

• Description/Precedence: This drop-down consists of several options.

- Express Forwarding: Default Best Effort•

- Class 1

- Class 2

- Class 3

- Class 4

• Control 6

- Control 7

- Custom: Selecting this option enables Custom/Current DSCP Value. Adjust values to fit QOS needs.

SRTP• : Enabling this setting activates encryption on the VH20

Cipher• : This drop-down selects the cipher to be used.

Null•

AES CTR•

AES F8•

MAC·

Null·

HMAC SHA180•

HMAC SHA13·2

KDR Offer

0-24

- SRCTP:

- Negotiate

- Enable

- Disable

- VAD: Enables "comfort noise" which simulates background noise found in analog phone lines.

• VAD Noise Matching: Settings are None or Level. Default is Level.

- DTFM Relay: This setting emulates normal key tones on a regular phone when used during a call (for example, to select options from an in-call menu).

- Payload:

- Codec Priority: Negotiates the best possible codec for each call that both sides can utilize; both units must have a given codec in order to use it. If the codec is not present, the next one in the list is tried. This process is repeated until the best match is found. To use the Priority setting, follow the instructions given in the tab.

Dial Plan

Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Load From File View... Provide... Manual Configuration Manual Send Key: # Total Dial Timer: 3 Minutes Interdigit Timer: 30 Seconds First Digit Timer: 30 Seconds Extension Dialing: 4 Local Dialing Prefix: Long Distance Dialing Prefix: International Dialing Prefix: Emergency Dialing: Operator Dialing: Number of Digits Min. Max. 8 8 12 12 4 4

Dial Plan: The Dial Plan consists of numbers and pattern digits for any given telephone number. Since businesses deal in World-wide calling, this should consist of country codes, access codes, area codes and any combination of digits that can be dialed. To accommodate this, Dial Plans are required.

• Load from File
• Manual Configuration

Note: After any changes are made, CLICK OK to save all changes!

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

LCD Programming Overview•

LCD Settings Menu•

Site File Overview•

Site Properties•

Connect To A Site•

Preset Mode Overview•

Controls & Connections•

Serial Control•

SNMP Control•

CONFIGURATION MODE OVERVIEW

Converge Console has two modes: Configuration Mode (default) and Preset Mode. Configuration Mode enables you to perform advanced configuration of devices to customize them to your specific application.

Accessing Configuration Mode

Console automatically starts in Configuration Mode with the Unit tab displayed as shown below.

Converg Console - Site1.cme File View Add Connect Models Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Mode/Mode Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Signal 0 Signal 11 Signal 12 Talve RX Talve RX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M Processing RX Forward Ar Forward Br Forward Cr Forward Fr Forward Sy Forward Sy Output Dynded I Dynded J Dynded K Dynded L Dynded M Dynded N Dynded O Dynded P Dynded Q Dynded R Dynded S Dynded T Dynded U Dynded V Dynded W Dynded X Dynded Y Dynded Z Dynded U Dynded V Dynded W Dynded X Dynded Y Dynded Z Dynded U Dynded V Dynded W Dynded X Dynded Y Dynded Z Dynded U Dynded V Dynded W Dynded X Dyrd: Focus Male - Sign - Sign - Output - AV Devices Objects - Monophore - DVD/CD - Video Codec - VOR - Sound Cord - Amplifier - Loaduppler - Data: Configuration Site Data Default Unit Data Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: MBDCT Unit: CONVERGEMISTA-0 (Device ID)

You can switch between modes by clicking on the Mode buttons on the Button Bar. For a description of the Console screen components while in Configuration Mode, see Navigating Converge Console.

Configuration Mode Tabs

Console has ten tabs on the Tab Bar that provide specific configuration options while in Configuration Mode:

Unit
Channel
Matrix
AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference Tab
Macro
Gating
Control
String
Event Scheduler
Database 

These tabs are described in the following sections.

UNIT TAB

The Unit Tab shows a detailed block diagram for the unit selected in the site pane. The diagram shows the path of the audio signal based on the current unit configuration, and provides a graphical explanation of each stage of audio processing.

Accessing the Unit Tab

Console automatically starts in Configuration Mode. When you load a site file, Console displays the Unit tab by default as shown below. To switch to the Unit tab from any other tab, click the Unit tab on the Tab Bar.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BBOCT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H9) CONVERGE80TA-0 6881 M L O J P T R Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ACC Input 9 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Gain Mate NC MACRIX NOM Mate Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 808 Ft Comp Bnk Gain Pres Amp PowerImp 1 PowerImp 2 PowerImp 3 PowerImp 4 Telco TX From Exp. O To Exp. O From Exp. P To Exp. P From Exp. Q To Exp. Q From Exp. R To Exp. R From Exp. S To Exp. S From Exp. T To Exp. T From Exp. U To Exp. U From Exp. V To Exp. V From Exp. W To Exp. W From Exp. X To Exp. X From Exp. Y To Exp. Y From Exp. Z To Exp. Z From Exp. I To Exp. I From Exp. J To Exp. J From Exp. K To Exp. K From Exp. L To Exp. L From Exp. M To Exp. M From Exp. N To Exp. N Processing RX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Del Come Mate Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process A Process B Process B Process C Process C Process D Process D Process E Process E Process F Process F Process G Process G Process H Process H Model: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BBOCT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

NOTE: The Unit tab shown above is for an 880AT with the Tree View tab selected in the Site Pane. All units that are connected and belong to the site also appear in the Tree View tab. The Unit tab display for other Converge/Converge Pro unit types will vary from that shown, depending on the number of inputs, outputs, telco connections, etc. for the model selected.

Unit Tab Functionality

The graphical elements shown in the block diagram of the Unit tab provide shortcuts to the basic configuration settings for each channel type. For full configuration control of a channel, use the Channel tab.

For all channels in the Unit tab display, the blue Pres (Audio Presence) LEDs illuminate to indicate the presence of audio on the channel. For Mic Input Channels, the green Gate LEDs illuminate to indicate that the Mic is gated on.

The following sections describe the configuration setting shortcuts available in the Unit tab.

Input Channel Settings

MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mute Gate Input 1 9.0dB Input 2 9.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mute AGC Input 5 -30.0dB Input 6 -30.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mute NC Telco RX 0.0dB

NOM Mate Gain Pres Output 0.0dB Output 1 0.0dB Output 2 0.0dB Output 3 0.0dB Output 4 0.0dB Output 5 0.0dB Output 6 0.0dB Output 7 0.0dB Output 8 -21.0dB Speaker NOM Mate Gain Pres Telco TX Telco TX

Pointing to an input channel on the left side of the screen highlights it in orange, and shows the routing for the channel in white on the right side of the screen (shown above). Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the site pane (shown below).

(30) Converge840T-03 040T M L D P F T R Input 1

Set the desired Gain settings for the Input channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display. Toggle AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation), NC (Noise Cancellation), and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons.

To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel, click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel.

Output Channel Settings

MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mute Gate Input 1 9.0dB Input 2 9.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mute AGC Input 5 -30.0dB Input 6 -30.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mute NC Telco RX 0.0dB

NOM Mate Gain Pres Output 0.0dB Output 1 0.0dB Output 2 0.0dB Output 3 0.0dB Output 4 0.0dB Output 5 0.0dB Output 6 0.0dB Output 7 0.0dB Output 8 -21.0dB Speaker NOM Mate Gain Pres Telco TX Telco TX

Pointing to an output channel on the right side of the screen highlights it in orange, and shows the routing for the channel in white on the left side of the screen (shown above). Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane (shown below).

(30) Converge840T-03 840T M L O P F T R Output 1

Set the desired Gain settings for the output channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display. Toggle NOM (Number of Open Mics/Constant Level), and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons.

To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel, click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel.

Processing Channel Settings

Pointing to a processing channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange, and shows the routing for the channel in white (shown above). Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane (shown below).

(H0) CONVERGE880TA-0 880T M L O J P T R

Set the desired Gain settings for the processing channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display. Toggle Del (Delay), Comp (Compression), and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons.

To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel, click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel.

Fader Channel Settings

NOTE: The Converge Pro 880TA and Converge SR 1212A do not have fader settings.

MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mute Gate Input 1 0.0dB Output 1 Input 2 0.0dB Output 2 Input 3 0.0dB Output 3 Input 4 0.0dB Output 4 Line Pres Gain Mute ABC Input 5 0.0dB Output 5 Input 6 0.0dB Output 6 Input 7 0.0dB Output 7 Input 8 0.0dB Output 8 Telco RX Pres Gain Mute NC 1 Telco RX 0.0dB NCM 1 Expansion Audio RX O From Exp. O P From Exp. P Q From Exp. Q R From Exp. R S From Exp. S T From Exp. T U From Exp. U V From Exp. V W From Exp. W X From Exp. X Y From Exp. Y Z From Exp. Z Processing RX A Process A B Process B C Process C D Fader RX 1 Fader 1 2 Fader 2 3 Fader 3 4 Fader 4 NOM Mute Gain Pres Output 0.0dB Output 1 0.0dB Output 2 0.0dB Output 3 0.0dB Output 4 0.0dB Output 5 0.0dB Output 6 0.0dB Output 7 0.0dB Output 8 -10.0dB Speaker NOM Mute Gain Pres Telco TX 0.0dB Telco TX O Expansion Audio TX P To Exp. O Q To Exp. P R To Exp. Q S To Exp. R T To Exp. S U To Exp. T V To Exp. U W To Exp. V X To Exp. W Y To Exp. X Z To Exp. Y To Exp. Z Del Comp Mute Gain Pres Processing TX B Process A C Process B D Process C Mute Gain Pres Fader TX 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 2 Fader 2 Fader 2 3 Fader 3 Fader 3 4 Fader 4 Fader 4

Pointing to a fader channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange, and shows the routing for the channel in white (shown above). Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane (shown below).

(30) Converge840T-03 840T M L O P F T R IP Fader 1

Set the desired gain settings for the fader channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display. Toggle mute on and off by clicking the associated Mute LED Button.

To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel, click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel.

Expansion Audio RX and TX

MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AGC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB 0.0dB -38-10 NOM Mute Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 NOM FB Comp Mute Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 NOM Mute Gain Pres Telco TX From Exp. O Q From Exp. P P From Exp. Q P From Exp. R Q From Exp. S Q From Exp. T Q From Exp. U Q From Exp. V Q From Exp. W Q From Exp. X Q From Exp. Y Q From Exp. Z Q From Exp. I Q From Exp. J Q From Exp. K Q From Exp. L Q Expansion Audio RX 887A CLEAR To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L

Pointing to an Expansion RX or Expansion TX channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange. Clicking the channel selects it and shows the Input (TX channels only), Output (RX channels only), Processing, Expansion, and Fader channel routing (white highlights) for the selected channel as shown above.

Power Amp Channels (Converge Pro 880TA and SR 1212A)

The Converge Pro 880TA and SR 1212A units are equipped with four 35 watt amplifiers capable of running in either 8 ohm or 70/100 volt modes. Each amplifier operates independently to provide maximum flexibility.

Click the Channel Tab and refer to the Matrix Row. The four Power Amp channels are listed after the Outputs -- click any of the Power Amp channels to access the available options.

graph TD
    A["Input 1: Mic 1"] --> B["PPWR"]
    B --> C["Pre Gain: -86 dBu"]
    C --> D["Gain Coarse: -56 dB"]
    D --> E["Fine: -20 dB"]
    E --> F["Post Gain: -30 dB"]
    F --> G["Post Process: -30 dB"]
    G --> H["Post Gate: -30 dB"]

    subgraph Input 1
        I["0 Output 1"] --> J["1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8"]
        J --> K["Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8"]
        K --> L["Output 8"]
        M["0 Power Amp 1"] --> N["NOM"]
        O["0 Power Amp 1"] --> P["IMPED 8 ohm 70/100"]
    end

    subgraph Gated
        Q["Gated"] --> R["Non Gated"]
        S["Pre AEC"] --> T["Crosspoint"]
    end

    subgraph Pre AEC
        U["PowerAmp 1"] --> V["Noise Gate"]
        W["PowerAmp 2"] --> X["Filter"]
        Y["PowerAmp 3"] --> Z["Feedback"]
        AA["PowerAmp 4"] --> AB["Mute"]
        AC["PowerAmp 5"] --> AD["PowerAmp 6"]
        AE["PowerAmp 7"] --> AF["PowerAmp 8"]
        AG["PowerAmp 9"] --> AH["PowerAmp 10"]
        AI["PowerAmp 11"] --> AJ["PowerAmp 12"]
        AK["PowerAmp 13"] --> AL["PowerAmp 14"]
        AM["PowerAmp 15"] --> AN["PowerAmp 16"]
        AO["PowerAmp 17"] --> AP["PowerAmp 18"]
        AQ["PowerAmp 19"] --> AR["PowerAmp 20"]
        AS["PowerAmp 21"] --> AT["PowerAmp 22"]
        AU["PowerAmp 23"] --> AV["PowerAmp 24"]
        AW["PowerAmp 25"] --> AX["PowerAmp 26"]
        AY["PowerAmp 27"] --> AZ["PowerAmp 28"]
        BA["PowerAmp 29"] --> BB["PowerAmp 30"]
        BC["PowerAmp 31"] --> BD["PowerAmp 32"]
        BE["PowerAmp 33"] --> BF["PowerAmp 34"]
        BG["PowerAmp 35"] --> BH["PowerAmp 36"]
        BI["PowerAmp 37"] --> BJ["PowerAmp 38"]
        BK["PowerAmp 39"] --> BL["PowerAmp 40"]
        BM["PowerAmp 41"] --> BN["PowerAmp 42"]
        BO["PowerAmp 43"] --> BP["PowerAmp 44"]
        BQ["0.0 dB"] --> BR["-65 dB"]
    end

    subgraph Output Level
        BS["-30 dB"] --> BT["-5 dB"]
        BU["-30 dB"] --> BV["-30 dB"]
    end

    style Input 1 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Gated fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Pre AEC fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style Crosspoint fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Options for the selected Power Amp appear below the Matrix row.

- IMPED: Selects the Power Amplifier's impedance. Options are 8 ohm and 70/100 volt.

Sound Mask• : Launches the Sound Mask pane.

Debug Capsule Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Mask | Unit (HD) CONVERGED00GTA-6 Power Amp 1 Power Amp 1 Gain Enable Masking Mode Voice Timer 0 min Power Amp 2 Power Amp 2 Gain Enable Masking Mode Voice Timer 0 min Power Amp 3 Power Amp 3 Gain Enable Masking Mode Voice Timer 0 min Power Amp 4 Power Amp 4 Gain Enable Masking Mode Voice Timer 0 min Close

» Sound Masking is an Amplifier Out only feature consisting of three modes:

Off1. : Disables the feature

1. Voice: Masking operates only in the range usually used when the target audio is vocal.
2. Wideband: Masking operates throughout the audible range of the unit.

- Filter: Filters selected from the Power Amp channel are only applied to the amplifier. Otherwise they operate in any combination consistent with the Processing channel filters.

Channel Property Configuration: PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Active Filter Type SEQ 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 -12 -14 -16 -18 20 K 50 Hz 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 deg -20 -40 -60 -80 -100 -120 -140 -160 -180 Phase Add Filter Filters Remaining Table View Processing Channels Bypass All Remove Filter 4 Show A B C D Active Close

Channel Property Configuration: PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Enable Feedback Cancellation Automatic Setup Run Setup Setup Complete Target Gain Before Feedback 0 dB Feedback Gain totals nodes used 0 dB Feedback Controls Reset Feedback Eliminator Reset Reset Dynamic Nodes Reset Status Fixed Node Count 0 Dynamic Node Count 0 Node Report Feedback Eliminator Settings Filter Settings Number of Fixed Filters 0 Filter Bandwidth 0 = 5 Filter Depth Mode Locked Mode Settings Mode Voice Enable Ringing Elimination Close

This feature allows you to reduce feedback through a simple configuration window.

Enable Feedback Cancellation1. : Enables or Disables the feature.

1. Automatic Setup: Creates notch filters based on your choice of Feedback Cancellation settings.

Target Gain Before Feedback: Set your desired dB rating. The unit slowly increases dB, adding notch filters at detected feedback frequencies until it either reaches the target level or reaches the number of Fixed Filters (specified in the Filter Settings - Number of Fixed Filters). The system detects feedback through an open mic while levels are increased. If the target is reached without using the specified number of fixed filters, the remaining "slots" are used as Dynamic Filters to be applied as the environment changes.

Feedback Controls »:

• Reset Feedback Eliminator: Clicking Reset clears all settings related to this feature.
• Reset Dynamic Nodes: Clicking Reset only clears dynamic filters; Fixed Filters remain in place.

» Status: Reports the number of Fixed and Dynamic nodes. A total of 16 nodes can be used, regardless of type.

- Node Report: Creates a text report listing existing node details.

» Feedback Eliminator Settings:

- Filter Settings: Filters are applied according to the specifications the user sets.

» Number of Fixed Filters: Up to 16 Fixed Filters are applied. If the specified number of filters are not required, they become Dynamic Filters.

» Filter Bandwidth: Bandwidth is determined by the specified Q factor. A lower Q creates a filter that works across a wider frequency range. A higher Q utilizes a narrower range.

Filter Depth Mode »:

- Locked re-uses filters. A replacement filter, with new settings and increased filter depth is applied in place of an existing filter.

Unlocked adds a new filter at a specific frequency. No filters are replaced, so this setting will count against the total number of filters available.

» Mode Settings: Voice and Music presets are available to fine-tune the feedback eliminator.

NOTE: Voice Mode is the more aggressive setting.

» Enable Ringing Elimination: Allows the Feedback Cancellation to attempt to suppress ringing.

NOTE: This setting adjusts slowly to eliminate ringing.

1. Click Close to close the window once the Setup Complete indicator has switched from yellow (in process) to green (setup complete).

- Noise Gate: This feature reduces buzz and hum from the amp when the system is on but not in use.

Channel Property Configuration: PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Enable Noise Gate Mode Adaptive Timer 0 sec Filter None Threshold -0 -25 -50 -75 -100 -100 dB Close

Enable Noise Gate1. : Enables or Disables the feature.

Mode »:

- Adaptive: Actively monitors the noise floor of the environment and determines when to enable gating.

Manual• : User sets Threshold.

» Timer: Time before the Amp begins gating.

NOTE: The Noise Floor must be at the Threshold Level for the duration set in the Timer in order to enable the Noise Gate.

Filter »:

None• : No filtering is applied to noise.

• High Pass: A High Pass filter is applied to noise before threshold reading.
- Low Pass: A Low Pass filter is applied to suppress noise before threshold reading.
- High/Low Pass: High and Low Pass filtering is applied to noise before threshold reading.

- Compressor: Allows the user to enable compression on an amp channel based on configurable parameters. With a few exceptions (noted below) this feature operates identically to the Processing Compressors.

Channel Property Configuration: PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Enable Compressor Group Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 None Post Cmprs Gain -20 -15 -10 -5 0.0 dB Output level -40 -33 -25 -18 -10 -3 5 13 20 Input -30 dB Compression 0 0 dB Enable Delay Mode Delay 0 ms Threshold -60 -44 -28 -12 4 20 0 dBu Attack 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 10.0 ms Ratio 1 3 5 7 9 11 12 14 16 18 20 1:1 Release 100 480 860 1240 1620 2000 500 ms Close

» Delay Mode: Enabling Delay Mode sets a timed delay after which the Compressor activates. Timing

ranges from 0 to 20ms.

Note: Groups do not interact with Processor channels.

Mute• : Mutes the specific Power Amp channel.

Polarity• : Reverses the amplifier's output polarity.

- EQ Filter: Adjusts specific frequency bands within a +/-12db range.

» Enable EQ Filter: Enables or disables the EQ.

Limiter• : Establishes a ceiling level for the amplifier output.

Channel Property Configuration: PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Enable Limiter Enable Soft Clipper Threshold/Max Level -20 -1 -23 -44 -65 dB Close

» Enable Limiter: Limits the output to the Threshold/Max Level specified by the user.

» Enable Soft Clipper: Softens the clipping effect at Threshold/Max level to prevent damage to external equipment.

Note: Both settings can be active simultaneously.

- Multichannel Control: Multichannel Control is only available on amplifier channels. Each of the 4 amplifiers can be assigned to one of two Multichannel groups. When amplifier channels are assigned to a Multichannel group, Mute and Gain for the group are controlled from a single point.

NOTE: Mutiple PA Channel Selections cannot be applied to both groups simultaneously. If you assign PA 1 and 3 to Multichannel Group1, those amplifiers cannot be assigned to Multichannel Group 2 without removing them from the first group.

Channel Property Configuration: PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Mulichannel Group 1 Volume PA Channel Selection -20 1 2 3 4 -65 0 dB Enable Adaptive Volume Reference Microphone Input 1 PA Gain to Ambient Change Ratio 1:1 Adaptive Threshold Noise Floor Maximum Gain Adaptive Gain -0 -0 -18 -27 -40 -12 -53 -80 -6 -80 dBu 0 dB 0 dBu Mulichannel Group 2 Volume PA Channel Selection -20 1 2 3 4 -65 0 dB Close

• Volume: Indicates the volume level assigned to the Multichannel Group
- PA Channel Selection: Each box represents a PA Channel. Check the box you wish to assign to the corresponding Multichannel Group.
Mute• : Mutes the Multichannel Group
- Enable Adaptive Volume: When enabled the level of the PA Channel will adjust based on the Noise Floor "heard" by the selected reference microphone. As the level of noise changes, the output level adjusts according to the selected PA Gain to Ambient Change Ratio. For example, if the rate is set to 2:1 the amplifier level will adjust by 2 dB for every 1 dB in noise for increase. The gain applied is governed by the Maximum Gain setting. Before any gain is applied the noise floor heard by the mic must be equal to or greater than the Adaptive Gain setting.

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

AEC (Auto Echo Cancellation)

NC (Noise Cancellation)

Configuration Mode

• Channel Tab
• Matrix Tab
• Processing Settings
• Fader Settings

CHANNEL TAB OVERVIEW

The Channel section of Console makes the full set configuration controls available for a given channel, from input to processing to output. The type of channel selected in the Tree View tab of the Current Unit pane determines the contents of the Channel pane in the center of Console.

The channels available in the Tree View tab are:

Mic Input Channels Line Input Channels Telco/VoIP rx Channel Output Channels Telco/VoIP tx Channel Processing Channels Fader Channels

Accessing Channel Tab

Selecting a channel in the Tree View tab displays the Channel Tab for that channel. For example, the channel tab for a mic channel is shown below:

Converge Console : 880ta1.csg File View Help Connect Master Devices Help ClearOne Site Selection Current Unit (W) Converge880TA0 Site View Tree View (HO) Converge880TA0 Mio 1 Input 1 Pre Gain -36 -56 -20 -41 -35 -28 -21 -14 -7 -0 65 dB -30 dB Post Gain -39 -5 -30 dB Post Process -30 dB Post Gain -30 dB PA Attach and AEC Reference Power Amp 4 ADC MF Max Filter ADC ALC Date Input 1 Glob Non Glob Pre AEC Outspot Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Telco Rx Telco RX Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Gain -20 -45 -5 -30 dB Output Level -30 dB Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Site: Unit: Converge880TA0 (Device ID 0)

Channel Configuration Controls

As shown above, the configuration settings for a channel are displayed as controls (buttons, sliders, check-boxes, selection lists, text entry boxes) in the Channel pane. Use the text entry boxes to assign custom names. Use the drop-down lists to select from a list of configuration values. Use the sliders to set a discrete value for channel configuration parameters.

Some buttons, such as the PPWR (Phantom Power) button shown above, toggle features on and off.

graph LR
    A["AEC"] --> B["NC"]
    B --> C["Mute"]
    C --> D["Filter"]
    D --> E["AGC"]
    E --> F["ALC"]
    F --> G["Gate"]

Other buttons, including AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation), NC (Noise Cancellation), Filter, AGC (Automatic Gain Control), ALC (Automatic Level Control), shown above, bring up the Channel Property Configuration screen shown below.

Channel Property Configuration Screen

Channel Property Configuration: Input 1 AEC NC Filter AOCIALC Oating ERLE Meter ERL Mater AEC NLP EPL + ERLE + Total Echo Reduction Enable Acoustic Echo Cancelier (AEC) Non-linear Processing (NLP) PA Adapt and AEC Reference Ebux Ref. 1 Echo Return Loss (ERL) -20 -5 -30 -30 dB Echo Return Loss Enhancement (ERLE) -20 -5 -30 -30 dB Total Echo Reduction (ERL + ERLE) -50 -50 dB Enable Push to Talk Mode Pre Gain -36 PTT Threshold -0 -86 dBu -90 dB -86 dBu -90 dBu Close

The Channel Property Configuration screen is used to configure Mic Input, Line Input, and Processing channels. The tabs available in this screen change depending on the type of channel selected in the Tree View pane of Console.

Meters

In addition to the configuration controls available in the Channel pane, there are meters showing signal levels in real time at each stage of signal processing. The meters shown change with the type of channel selected. For example, the meters for Mic Input channels are shown below:

Pre Gain -21 -46 -71 -71 dBu Gain Coarse -56 -50 -41 -35 -28 -21 -14 -7 0.0 dB Fine -20 -65 Post Gain -20 -5 -30 -30 dB Post Process -20 -5 -30 dB Post Gate -20 -5 -30 dB -30 dB

NOTE: All meters in Console are peak-level meters.

Channel Routing Matrix

The channel routing matrix of the Channel pane shows the associated Matrix row and routing configuration for the channel selected in the Tree View tab of the Current Unit pane. The channel routing matrix of the Channel pane for a Mic Input channel is shown below.

Input 1 Gated Non Gated Pre ABC Cronpoint Process A 13-Ep M 13-Ep N 13-Ep L 13-Ep N 13-Ep U 13-Ep V 13-Ep X 13-Ep Y 13-Ep Z 13-Ep X 13-Ep Y 13-Ep Z 13-Ep X 13-Ep Y 13-Ep Z 13-Ep X 13-Ep Y 13-Ep Z 13-Ep X 13-Ep Y 13-Ep Z 13-Ep X 13-Ep Y 13-Ep Z 13-Ep X 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-H 13-EN_L 13-EN_M 13-EN_N 13-EN_O 13-EN_P 13-EN_S 13-EN_T 13-EN_U 13-EN_V 13-EN_W 13-EN_X 13-EN_Y 13-EN_Z 13-EN_A 13-EN_B 13-EN_C 13-EN_D 13-EN_E 13-EN_F 13-EN_G 13-EN_H 13-EN_I 13-EN_J 13-EN_K 13-EN_L 13-EN_M 13-EN_N 13-EN_O 13-EN_P 13-EN_S 13-EN_T 13-EN_U 13-EN_V 13-EN_W 13-EN_Z 13-EN_A 13-EN_B 13-EN_C 13-EN_S 13-EN_T 13-EN_U 13-EN_V 13-EN_W 13-EN_X 13-EN_Y 13-EN_Z 13-EN_A 13-EN_B 13-EN_C 13-EN_S 13-EN_T 13-EN_U 13-EN_V 13-EN_W 13-EN_Z 13-EN_A 13-EN_B 13-EN_C 13-EN_S 13-EN_T 13-EN_U 13-EN_V 13-EN_W 13-EN_Z 13-EN_A 13-EN_B 13-EN_C 13-EN_S 13-EN_T 13-EN_U 13:EAH0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Use the routing legend to determine the current cross-point configuration of the selected input channel. As shown in the example above, Input 1 is non-gated and cross pointed by default to Output 1. It is also gated and cross pointed by default to Outputs 5-7, Telco/VolP tx, and Exp Bus O.

Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a colored box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box. To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu as shown below.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears as shown below. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to +12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 -6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

In the channel routing matrix section of the Channel pane, pressing the channel button underneath an Output, Process, or Fader cross point box (shown above) displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel (shown below).

graph LR
    A["Input 1"] --> B["Output 1"]
    B --> C["NOM"]
    C --> D["Mate"]
    D --> E["Gain"]
    E --> F["Output Level -30 dB"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

This display is identical to that shown on the Channel Tab when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane.

NOTE: Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to the channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Output 1" to "Ceiling Speakers" changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Mic Input Channels•

Line Input Channels•

Telco/VoIP rx Channel •

Output Channels•

Telco/VoIP tx Channel •

Processing Channels•

Fader Channels•

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) •

NC (Noise Cancellation), Filter•

AGC (Automatic Gain Control)

ALC (Automatic Level Control) •

- Mic Gating

- Filters

- Site Pane

- Objects Pane

AEC (ACOUSTIC ECHO CANCELLATION)

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) reduces or removes acoustical echo from an input signal, thereby improving audio clarity. Converge Pro devices perform AEC using the full bandwidth (20hz to 22kHz) of the signal.

AEC uses a reference source to perform AEC based on the acoustic characteristics and dynamics of a specific room. Use the AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference tab to set up these references.

Accessing AEC

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane, and press the AEC button (located just below the Pre Gain meter).

Converg Conazole - 880ta1.cq File View Add Connect Model Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Oating Control String Event Scheduler Database Current Unit (H) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View Mio 1 Input 1 Pre Gain 64 dB Gain -56 dB Flow -20 dB Post Gain -30 dB Post Process -30 dB Post Gate -30 dB PA Abact and AEC Reference Power Amp 4 AEC KC Max Filter AOC ALC Lots Input 1 Globd Non Globd Pre AEC Component Output 1 Output 1 NOM Max Gain -20 dB Output Level -30 dB Telco Rx Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Line Power Amp 1 Power Amp 2 Power Amp 3 Power Amp 4 Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Sites Unit: Converge880TA00 (Device ID 0)

The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the AEC tab selected (see below).

Channel Property Configuration: Input 1 AEC AOCIALC NC Oating Filter ERLE Meter ECL AEC Rel NLP DRL + EPLE = Total Echo Reduction Enable Acoustic Echo Canceler (AEC) Non-linear Processing (NLP) PA Adapt and AEC Reference Output 8 Aggressive Medium Soft Off Echo Return Loss (ERL) -20 -5 -30 -30 dB Echo Return Loss Enhancement (ERLE) -20 -5 -30 dB Total Echo Reduction (ERL + ERLE) -50 dB -50 dB Enable Push to Talk Mode Pre Gain -21 PTT Threshold -0 -46 -71 -75 -71 dBu -76 dBu Close

The AEC tab shows a signal flow diagram for AEC, and has the following features: Enable AEC, PA Adapt and AEC Reference, NLP (Non-linear Processing), and PTT (Push-to-Talk) mode. These features are described in the following sections.

Enable AEC Checkbox

Select the checkbox to enable AEC.

PA Adapt and AEC Reference Button

This button displays the expansion bus output channel currently used as the AEC reference for the selected channel. Clicking the button closes the Channel Property Configuration window and opens the AEC Reference tab in the center pane of Console.

NLP (Non-Linear Processing) Radio Buttons

NLP increases the power of echo cancellation for difficult acoustical environments. NLP features four settings: Soft, Medium, Aggressive, Off. The default is soft.

NOTE: Use NLP with care. There are corresponding trade-offs associated with NLP, including suppression and half-duplex operation.

The AEC tab also includes meters for Echo Return Loss (ERL), Echo Return Loss Enhancement (ERLE), and Total Echo Reduction (ERL + ERLE).

ERL (Echo Return Loss) Meter

Shows the coupling between the reference signal and the input to the echo canceller—the difference of the two levels. This is an average meter that updates when a receive-only signal is present.

ERLE (Echo Return Loss Enhancement) Meter

Shows the loss through the echo cancellation and non-linear processing chain—the difference of the two levels. This is an average meter that updates when a receive-only signal is present.

ERL + ERLE Meter

Shows the total ERL and ERLE reduction. This is an average meter that updates only when a receive -only signal is present.

PTT (Push to Talk) Mode

Select the Enable Push to Talk Mode checkbox to enable PTT. PTT notifies AEC when a microphone is switched off, and freezes AEC convergence until the microphone is switched back on. As a result, PTT helps prevent AEC divergence and improves overall AEC performance with push to talk microphones.

When the microphone is off, set the PTT Threshold slider to the level of the Pre-Gain Meter for the channel.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference Tab

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

NC (Noise Cancellation) •

Mic Gating•

Filters•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings •

NC (NOISE CANCELLATION)

NC (Noise Cancellation) is a process in which ambient (background) noise is removed from an input signal, with no noticeable degradation in signal quality. NC is available on Mic Input (excluding SR 1212 and SR 1212A) and Telco/VolP rx channels.

Accessing NC

With the Channel tab selected in the Center Pane, select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane, and press the NC button (located just below the Coarse Gain slider).

Converge Console - 880xt1.cq File View Edit Correct Window Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Unit Channel Macro AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Current Unit (M) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (MO) Converge880TA00 Mcc Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power Amp Power Amp-1 Power Amp-2 Power Amp-3 Power Amp-4 Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Ma: Gain: -36 Gain: -56 Flow: -20 Post Gain: -40 Post Process: -30 Post Set: -30 PPWR: -66 dBu -8.0 dB -66 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -35 dBu -8.0 dB -6.0 dB -4.0 dB -2.0 dB -1.0 dB -0.5 dB -0.25 dB -0.125 dB -0.0625 dB -0.03125 dB -0.015625 dB -0.0078125 dB -0.0039125 dB -0.00195625 dB -0.00114125 dB -0.000777125 dB -0.000588125 dB -0.000439125 dB -0.000349125 dB -0.000279125 dB -0.000219125 dB -0.000179125 dB -0.000139125 dB -0.000119125 dB -0.000099125 dB -0.000079125 dB -0.000069125 dB -0.000059125 dB -0.000049125 dB -0.000039125 dB -0.000031125 dB -0.000029125 dB -0.000021125 dB -0.000019125 dB -0.000017125 dB -0.000015125 dB -0.000013125 dB -0.000011125 dB -0.000011125 dB -0.66dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-66dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-66dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8.4dB u-8,6,8,16,24,32,4Objects Mcc Line Telco Rx Output Power Amp Telco Tx Processing Fader

The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the NC tab selected as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration Input * OK No Print FROM... Closing Enable mode Correct Correction Length -40 -12 -5 next 0 0.00 0.00 Next

Configuring Noise Cancellation

Select the Enable Noise Canceller checkbox to enable NC for the channel. Adjust the Cancellation Depth slider to the dB setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity. The cancellation depth can also be set using the arrow buttons or by entering a value directly in the field. The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from 6dB to 15dB. The default is 6dB. The default NC is Off.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview•

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

Mic Gating•

Filters•

Mic Input Settings•

Telco/VoIP Rx Settings (TH20, VH20, 840T, 880, 880T, 880TA)

FILTERS

Filters enable you to shape the audio signals from Mic Input channels for improved audio quality.

There are four configurable filter types available:

All Pass•

High Pass•

Low Pass•

Notch·

PEQ (Parametric Equalizer)

Accessing Filters

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane, and press the Filter button (located just below the Post Gain meter).

Converge Console interface showing ADC and Pre-Dam/Pre-ADC comparison and output generation flow

The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the Filter tab selected as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration: Input 1 ABC NC Filter ADCSILC Gating Input Rate Rate 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg 0 deg

The following sections describe how to configure and activate input channel filters.

Active Filter

Use the Active Filter drop-down list to select among active filters. Selecting a filter highlights its node on the graph and displays its current settings. You can configure up to four active filters per input channel.

NOTE: There are no filters configured by default. Press the Add Filter button to create a filter for the input channel. When you add a filter, it appears in the Active Filter drop-down list, and on the active filter graph.

In graph view, you can click on a filter node and drag it to the desired location on the graph. The setting fields immediately reflect changes made by dragging filter nodes.

Filter Nodes

In graph view, you can click on a filter node and drag it to the desired location on the graph. The setting fields immediately reflect changes made by dragging filter nodes.

Filter node colors represent the following:

- Green: The filter node is selected and active. Dragging a green node changes the gain setting for PEQ filters and the frequency for all filter types.

Grey• : The filter node is selected but not active.

White• : The filter node is not selected and not active.

- Black: Dragging a black filter node changes bandwidth settings for Notch and PEQ filter types.

Adding Filters

To add additional filters, click the Add Filter button. The number of remaining available filters for the channel is shown under Filters Remaining.

Filter Types

Use the Type drop-down list to select from the following input filters:

- All Pass. Frequency range is 20.00Hz to 20.00kHz. All pass changes the phase of the audio signal at the set frequency.

- High Pass. Selectable frequency cutoff is 20.00Hz to 20.00kHz. Rolloff is 12dB/octave. Level is fixed at 0dB.

- Low Pass. Selectable frequency cutoff is 20.00Hz to 20.00kHz. Rolloff is 12dB/octave. Level is fixed at 0dB.

- Notch. Center frequency range is 20.00Hz to 20.00kHz. Bandwidth is from .05 to 5.00 octaves in .01 octave increments. Level is fixed at -80dB.

- PEQ (Parametric Equalizer). Center frequency range is 20Hz to 20kHz in .01Hz increments. Bandwidth is .05 to 5 octaves in .01 octave increments. Level range is -15 to +15dB in 0.5dB increments.

Frequency (Available for all filter types)

Use the Frequency selector box to set the center frequency (in Hertz) for the filter you are configuring. Range is from 20Hz to 20kHz in 1Hz increments. The default is 1kHz.

Gain (Available for PEQ filters only)

Use the Gain selector box to set the gain value for the filter you are configuring. Range is from -15 to 15dB. The default is 0dB.

Q (Available for Notch and PEQ filters only)

Use the Q (Quality Factor) selector box to select the ratio of the center frequency divided by the bandwidth. Q is the inverse of bandwidth, and the two parameters are linked. Therefore changing the Q value also changes the bandwidth value. Range is from .18 to 28.85.

Bandwidth (Available for Notch and PEQ filters only)

Use the Bandwidth selector box to set the difference between the upper and lower points of a filter's audio passband. Bandwidth is the inverse of Q, and the two parameters are linked. Hence changing the bandwidth value also changes the Q value. The range is .05 to 5.00 octaves.

Bypass (Available for all filter types)

Use the Bypass checkbox to bypass the currently selected active filter. This feature allows you to configure different filters and save them for future use without having to recreate them.

Phase

Press the Phase button to display the phase relationship of the graphed frequency response (appears as a grey line on the active filter graph). The phase scale appears on the right vertical axis of the graph.

Bypass All

Press the Bypass All button to bypass all filters for the selected input channel. The filters are grayed out in graph view, and the bypass status is shown as on in table view.

Add Filter

Press the Add Filter button to create a filter for the input channel. When you add a filter, it appears in the Active Filter drop-down list, and on the active filter graph. You can configure up to four active filters per input channel. The number of remaining available filters for the channel is shown under Filters Remaining.

Remove Filter

Press the Remove Filter button to remove the filter currently selected in the Active Filter drop-down list. Removing a filter increments the Filters Remaining by one.

Table View

Press the Table View button to toggle the display between graph view and table view. Table view displays filter settings in table format for all filters configured for the input channel. Clicking on a row in table view selects the filter, displays the current settings for that filter, and allows you to edit the values in the setting fields. Changes made in the setting fields are immediately reflected in the table.

Channel Property Configuration: Input 1 AEC NC Filter AOCIALC Gating Active Filter Type Frequency Gain Q Bandwidth 3 PEQ PEQ 3997.85 2.43 28.85 0.05 Bypass 1 PEQ PEQ 199.06 2.29 16.03/0.00 Off 2 PEQ PEQ 962.35 -2.99 8.01/0.18 Off 3 PEQ PEQ 3997.85 2.43 28.85/0.06 Off Phase Add Filter Filters Remaining Table View Bypass All Remove Filter

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview•

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

NC (Noise Cancellation)

Mic Gating•

Mic Input Settings

AGC/ALC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL/AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL) TAB

AGC/ALC enables AGC or ALC and allows you to configure AGC settings for the selected input channel. Either AGC or ALC can be enabled—you cannot use them both at the same time.

AGC keeps an input signal at a target gain level that you select, and is generally used for Line Input channels.

ALC automatically keeps an input signal at a constant level, and is generally used to keep speech levels constant on Mic Input channels.

Accessing AGC/ALC

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired Mic input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane, and press either the AGC or ALC button (located just below the Post Gain meter).

graph TD
    A["Input 1: Non Gated"] --> B["Pre Gated"]
    C["Input 2: Non Gated"] --> D["Pre Gated"]
    E["Input 3: Non Gated"] --> F["Pre Gated"]
    G["Input 4: Non Gated"] --> H["Pre Gated"]
    I["Input 5: Non Gated"] --> J["Pre Gated"]
    K["Input 6: Non Gated"] --> L["Pre Gated"]
    M["Input 7: Non Gated"] --> N["Pre Gated"]
    O["Input 8: Non Gated"] --> P["Pre Gated"]
    Q["Input 9: Non Gated"] --> R["Pre Gated"]
    S["Input 10: Non Gated"] --> T["Pre Gated"]
    U["Input 11: Non Gated"] --> V["Pre Gated"]
    W["Input 12: Non Gated"] --> X["Pre Gated"]
    Y["Input 13: Non Gated"] --> Z["Pre Gated"]
    AA["Input 14: Non Gated"] --> AB["Pre Gated"]
    AC["Input 15: Non Gated"] --> AD["Pre Gated"]
    AE["Input 16: Non Gated"] --> AF["Pre Gated"]
    AG["Input 17: Non Gated"] --> AH["Pre Gated"]
    AI["Input 18: Non Gated"] --> AJ["Pre Gated"]
    AK["Input 19: Non Gated"] --> AL["Pre Gated"]
    AM["Input 20: Non Gated"] --> AN["Pre Gated"]
    AO["Input 21: Non Gated"] --> AP["Pre Gated"]
    AQ["Input 22: Non Gated"] --> AR["Pre Gated"]
    AS["Input 23: Non Gated"] --> AT["Pre Gated"]
    AU["Input 24: Non Gated"] --> AV["Pre Gated"]
    AW["Input 25: Non Gated"] --> AX["Pre Gated"]
    AY["Input 26: Non Gated"] --> AZ["Pre Gated"]
    BA["Input 27: Non Gated"] --> BB["Pre Gated"]
    BC["Input 28: Non Gated"] --> BD["Pre Gated"]
    BE["Input 29: Non Gated"] --> BF["Pre Gated"]
    BG["Input 30: Non Gated"] --> BH["Pre Gated"]
    BI["Input 31: Non Gated"] --> BJ["Pre Gated"]
    BK["Input 32: Non Gated"] --> BL["Pre Gated"]
    BM["Input 33: Non Gated"] --> BN["Pre Gated"]
    BO["Input 34: Non Gated"] --> BP["Pre Gated"]
    BZ["Output 1: Non Gated"] --> CA["Non-Gated"]
    CB["Output 2: Non Gated"] --> CD["Non-Gated"]
    CE["Output 3: Non Gated"] --> CF["Non-Gated"]
    CG["Output 4: Non Gated"] --> DH["Non-Gated"]
    DI["Output 5: Non Gated"] --> DJ["Non-Gated"]
    DK["Output 6: Non Gated"] --> DL["Non-Gated"]
    DM["Output 7: Non Gated"] --> DE["Non-Gated"]
    FD["Output 8: Non Gated"] --> DF["Non-Gated"]
    DG["Telco Rx: Non Gated"] --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    DH --> DH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> BH
    BH --> DH

The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the AGC/ALC tab selected as shown below:

Channel: Property to Configuration, Input 1 ADC | ADC | Filter | AC/DC/DC | Setting | AC AC Amplitude Gain -0 +1 -3 400 -6 -9 0.45 Target Level (NTC) 200 60 100 -20 -30 0.40 Active Gain -10 300 -10 8.0000 Response Time 7:30 2000 4:30 6:30 8:30 12:30 20.0 MHz Threshold (MHz) 0.0 45 25 20 -12 0 25.45 5 Cancel

Use the AGC/ALC radio buttons to select Off, ALC, or AGC. The default is Off. ALC is performed automatically; there are no user-configurable settings for ALC.

NOTE: AGC occurs after gain and filter settings in the audio signal path.

The configuration controls for AGC are described in the following sections.

Maximum Gain Slider

Set the Target Level first, then set the Maximum Gain that you want the AGC to apply to the signal. Maximum Gain is set using an RMS (Root Mean Square) level, which is the average magnitude of the audio signal over time. Maximum Gain range is 0 to 18dB in 1dB steps. The default value is 6dB.

Target Level Slider

Target Level (RMS) sets dB level for AGC to maintain. Target Level range is from -30 to 20dB in 1dB steps. The default target level is 0dB.

Active Gain Meter

The Active Gain Meter displays the gain adjustment being applied to the channel by AGC.

Response Time Slider

Response Time sets the amount of time (in milliseconds) over which the level is averaged before AGC is activated or deactivated.

Threshold Slider

Threshold sets the dB level at which AGC engages. The Threshold is set using an RMS (Root Mean Square) level, which is the average magnitude of the audio signal over time.

NOTE: Setting the Threshold above the background noise level will prevent AGC from amplifying background noise.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview•

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)

NC (Noise Cancellation) •

Mic Gating•

Filters•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings•

MIC GATING

The Gate button on the Channel tab enables you to configure gating control for individual Mic Input channels, and assign them to Gating Groups. There are two types of gating for Mic Input channels: Auto Gating and Manual Gating.

For more information about Gating Groups, see the Gating Tab section.

Accessing Channel Gating Configurations

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane, and press the Gate button (located just below the Post Process meter).

graph TD
    A["Input 1"] --> B["Pre Gain: -36"]
    B --> C["Gain Charge: -58"]
    C --> D["Flow: -20"]
    D --> E["Punt Gain: -20"]
    E --> F["Punt Process: -20"]
    F --> G["Punt Data: -20"]
    G --> H["Output 1"]
    H --> I["NOM"]
    I --> J["Output Label: -20"]
    J --> K["Output 2"]
    K --> L["Non Gads"]
    L --> M["Pre ADC"]
    M --> N["Ompstead"]
    N --> O["Output 1"]
    O --> P["Output 2"]
    P --> Q["Non Gads"]
    Q --> R["Pre ADC"]
    R --> S["Ompstead"]
    S --> T["Output 1"]
    T --> U["NOM"]
    U --> V["Output Label: -20"]
    V --> W["Output 2"]
    W --> X["Non Gads"]
    X --> Y["Pre ADC"]
    Y --> Z["Ompstead"]

The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the Gating tab selected.

Channel Property Configuration - Input 1 ABC NC Fiber AOC/AC Setting Color Status Color Settings Auto Chating Auto Chating Manual Chating Manual Chating Manual Chating Settings Settings Settings Settings Processing Processing Output Group Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16 Output 17 Output 18 Output 19 Output 20 Output 21 Output 22 Output 23 Output 24 Output 25 Output 26 Output 27 Output 28 Output 29 Output 30 Output 31 Output 32 Output 33 Output 34 Output 35 Output 36 Output 37 Output 38 Output 39 Output 40 Output 41 Output 42 Output 43 Output 44 Output 45 Output 46 Output 47 Output 48 Output 49 Output 50 Output 51 Output 52 Output 53 Output 54 Output 55 Output 56 Output 57 Output 58 Output 59 Output 60 Output 61 Output 62 Output 63 Output 64 Output 65 Output 66 Output 67 Output 68 Output 69 Output 70 Output 71 Output 72 Output 73 Output 74 Output 75 Output 76 Output 77 Output 78 Output 79 Output 80

Use the radio buttons to select Auto Gating, Manual On or Manual Off, which are described in the sections below.

Gating Settings: Auto Gating

The upper section of the Gate Settings section of the screen contains the gating controls for Auto Gating as shown below.

Gate Settings Auto Gating Settings 15 dB Gate Ratio 0.30 sec Hold Time 12.0 dB Off Attenuation Decay Rate Medium Ambient Tracking Adaptive Ambient Manual -30 dB Processing Functions Chairman Override PA Adaptive Mode PA Adapt and AEC Reference Output 8

Auto Gating: Settings

• Gate Ratio: Specifies how much louder than the ambient level the audio level must be before the channel automatically gates on. The gate ratio range is from 0 to 50dB. The default is 15dB.
• Hold Time: Determines how long the channel stays gated on after the audio falls below the Gate Ratio threshold. The hold time range is from .1 to 8.0 seconds. The default is .3 seconds.
• Off Attenuation: Sets the amount of level reduction applied to a channel when it is gated off. The range is from 0 to 60dB. The default is 12dB.
• Decay Rate: Determines how fast a channel gates off after the Hold Time expires. The default is Medium.

NOTE: Changing Hold Time, Off Attenuation, and Decay Rate also changes the same settings under Manual Gating.

Auto Gating: Ambient Tracking

• Adaptive Ambient: Adjusts the ambient reference level as noise and room conditions change. When Adaptive Ambient is on, the mic channel monitors the ambient noise level on the input and adjusts the ambient level reference automatically. This means that the gate threshold level automatically increases or decreases based on background noise. The default is On.
• Manual: When Adaptive Ambient is set to Manual, the input will use the fixed ambient level you specify in the Ambient Level field as its gating reference.

Auto Gating: Processing Functions

- Chairman Override: Provides gating priority for this mic input over any other mic input within the same gating control (mixer) group. When a mic with Chairman Override enabled gates on, all mics which do not have Chairman Override enabled will gate off. The default is Off.

- PA Adaptive Mode: Uses the audio level on a specified output as the new ambient level when audio is present at the power amplifier. This prevents loudspeaker audio from gating on the mic while still allowing people in the room to gate on microphones when they speak (provided that their voices are louder than the loudspeaker audio). For example, you might decide to play background music from a CD player during a presentation. PA Adaptive Mode allows you to use the output routed from the CD player as the ambient reference to prevent the CD player's audio from gating on microphones. The default is on.

- PA Adapt and AEC Reference: When PA Adaptive Mode is selected, you must define the output that will be used as the reference source for PA adaptation and Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC). Select a source in the PA Adapt and AEC Reference drop-down list. You can use any one of the outputs, expansion bus references, virtual references, or speaker output channels as the reference.

Gate Settings: Manual Gating

The lower section of the Gate Settings section of the screen contains gating configuration controls for Manual Gating as shown below.

Manual Gating Settings 0.30 sec Hold Time 12.0 dB Off Attenuation Manual On Manual Off Decay Rate Medium Processing Chairman Override

Manual Gating: Manual On/Manual Off

Select the Manual On radio button to gate the channel on, or Manual Off to gate the channel off. Off gating behavior is controlled by the settings described in the next section.

Manual Gating: Settings

• Hold Time: Determines how long the channel stays gated on after the channel is manually gated off. The hold time range is from .1 to 8.0 seconds. The default is .3 seconds.
• Off Attenuation: Sets the amount of level reduction applied to a channel when it is manually gated off. The range is from 0 to 50dB. The default is 12dB.
• Decay Rate: Determines how fast a channel gates off after the Hold Time expires. The default is Medium.

NOTE: Changing Hold Time, Off Attenuation, and Decay Rate also changes the same settings under Auto Gating.

Both Auto Gating and Manual Gating are affected by Gating Group membership as described in the next section.

Gating Groups

In addition to specifying gating characteristics for each Mic Input channel, you can assign the channel to a Gating Group for greater flexibility and control. When inputs are assigned to a gating group, the gating information from the inputs is used to control how the entire mixer behaves. Gating Groups are created and defined using the Gating Tab on the Tab Bar in Console.

The 880, 880T, 880TA 840T, 8i, SR 1212 and SR 1212A feature four internal gating groups (Internal 1–4) and six global gating groups across the expansion bus (Global A–F). Mic Inputs can only be used in one gating group at a time. If an input is not assigned to a gating group, that mic's gating properties are independent, and they have no effect on any gating group. When gating groups span two or more units (global gating groups), the settings must be the same for each unit attached to the global gating group.

NOTE: Input channels can be assigned to one and only one Gating Group at a time.

Mic Inputs are routed to Global Group A by default. To assign a gating group, select an Internal or Global radio button in the Gating Group section of the screen, or select None to have the Mic Input gate independently of any gating group.

Post Gate Meter

The Post Gate Meter displays the audio level of the selected channel after Auto or Manual Gating settings are applied. Meter range is from -30 to +20dB.

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Gating Tab•

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

NC (Noise Cancellation)

Filters•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings•

MIC INPUT SETTINGS

Mic Input Settings enable you to customize mic input channel settings using the Channel screen.

Accessing Mic Input Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired mic input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

graph TD
    A["Input 1: Non-Delay"] --> B["Add"]
    C["Add"] --> D["Output 1: Non-Delay"]
    E["Output 1: Non-Delay"] --> F["Add"]
    G["Output 1: Non-Delay"] --> H["Output Level: -5"]
    I["Input 2: Non-Delay"] --> J["Add"]
    K["Input 2: Non-Delay"] --> L["Output 2: Non-Delay"]
    M["Input 3: Non-Delay"] --> N["Add"]
    O["Input 3: Non-Delay"] --> P["Output 3: Non-Delay"]
    Q["Input 4: Non-Delay"] --> R["Add"]
    S["Input 4: Non-Delay"] --> T["Output 4: Non-Delay"]
    U["Input 5: Non-Delay"] --> V["Add"]
    W["Input 5: Non-Delay"] --> X["Output 5: Non-Delay"]
    Y["Input 6: Non-Delay"] --> Z["Add"]
    AA["Input 6: Non-Delay"] --> AB["Output 6: Non-Delay"]
    AC["Input 7: Non-Delay"] --> AD["Add"]
    AE["Input 7: Non-Delay"] --> AF["Output 7: Non-Delay"]
    AG["Input 8: Non-Delay"] --> AH["Add"]
    AI["Input 8: Non-Delay"] --> AJ["Output 8: Non-Delay"]
    AK["Input 9: Non-Delay"] --> AL["Add"]
    AM["Input 9: Non-Delay"] --> AN["Output 9: Non-Delay"]
    AO["Input 10: Non-Delay"] --> AP["Add"]
    AQ["Input 10: Non-Delay"] --> AR["Output 10: Non-Delay"]
    AS["Input 11: Non-Delay"] --> AT["Add"]
    AU["Input 11: Non-Delay"] --> AV["Output 11: Non-Delay"]
    AW["Input 12: Non-Delay"] --> AX["Add"]
    AY["Input 13: Non-Delay"] --> AZ["Output 13: Non-Delay"]
    BA["Input 14: Non-Delay"] --> BB["Add"]
    BC["Input 15: Non-Delay"] --> BD["Output 15: Non-Delay"]
    BE["Input 16: Non-Delay"] --> BF["Add"]
    BG["Input 17: Non-Delay"] --> BH["Output 17: Non-Delay"]
    BI["Input 18: Non-Delay"] --> BJ["Add"]
    BK["Input 19: Non-Delay"] --> BL["Output 19: Non-Delay"]
    BM["Input 20: Non-Delay"] --> BN["Add"]
    BO["Input 21: Non-Delay"] --> BP["Output 21: Non-Delay"]
    BQ["Input 22: Non-Delay"] --> BR["Add"]
    BS["Input 23: Non-Delay"] --> BT["Output 23: Non-Delay"]
    BU["Input 24: Non-Delay"] --> BV["Add"]
    BW["Input 25: Non-Delay"] --> BX["Output 25: Non-Delay"]
    BY["Input 26: Non-Delay"] --> BZ["Add"]
    CA["Input 27: Non-Delay"] --> CB["Output 27: Non-Delay"]
    CC["Input 28: Non-Delay"] --> CD["Add"]
    CE["Input 29: Non-Delay"] --> CF["Output 29: Non-Delay"]
    DG["Input 30: Non-Delay"] --> DH["Add"]
    DI["Input 31: Non-Delay"] --> DJ["Output 31: Non-Delay"]
    DK["Input 32: Non-Delay"] --> DL["Add"]
    DV["Input 33: Non-Delay"] --> DW["Output 33: Non-Delay"]
    DX["XOM"] --> DY
    DXX["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] --> DY
    DY["XOM"] <--> DY["XOM"]

The center pane displays a signal processing diagram, meters, and configuration controls for the selected mic input channel as shown above. Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path.

The meters and configuration controls for mic input channels are explained in the following sections.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

PPWR (Phantom Power)

The PPWR (Phantom Power) button toggles phantom power on and off. Phantom power is an auxiliary power source used to power certain types of microphones. Phantom power voltage is 24VDC. The default is On.

Pre Gain Meter

The Pre Gain meter displays the mic input level before gain adjustments. Meter range is determined by the Coarse Gain Slider in the Gain section of the screen as described below.

NOTE: All meters in Console are peak-level meters.

Gain Section

The Coarse and Fine gain sliders are used to match the level settings between mic inputs, and to adjust the volume level for a given mic input channel. The Min/Max fine gain sliders are used to set minimum and maximum gain settings, and to report min/max gain settings via serial commands.

In general, you should set the Coarse gain slider to 56dB for a mic input, 28dB for active equipment that requires an input between mic and line level, or 0dB for a line level input device.

Use the Fine gain slider to adjust input volume level. You can also set fine gain in .5dB increments using the Up/Down buttons, or enter a value directly in the field.

Post Gain Meter

The Post Gain Meter displays the audio level after gain adjustments.

Post Process Meter

The Post Process Meter displays the audio level after it passes through all mic input processing, such as Processing channels, Filters, AEC, NC, AGC/ALC, and Mute.

Post Gate Meter

The Post Gate Meter displays the audio level after gating. Channel gating for mic inputs is configured on the Gating tab of the Channel Property Configuration window for mic input channels, which is described in the next section.

Channel Configuration Buttons

The Channel Configuration Buttons enable you to configure the available features for mic input channels. With the exception of the Mute button, which toggles muting, clicking a channel configuration button displays the Channel Property Configuration window. Each feature is shown on a tab in the window that corresponds with the configuration button shown in the Center Pane.

For example, clicking the AEC button displays the Channel Property configuration window with the AEC tab selected as shown below:

Channel Property Configuration: Input 1 AEC NC Filter AOC/ALC Gating ERLE Meter Gain ERL Meter AEC Re NLP ERL + ERLE = Total Echo Reduction Enable Acoustic Echo Canceler (AEC) Non-linear Processing (NLP) PA Adapt and AEC Reference Ebuz Ref. 1 Aggressive Medium Soft Off Echo Return Loss (ERL) -20 -5 -30 dB -30 dB -30 dB -50 dB -50 dB -50 dB -86 dBu Echo Return Loss Enhancement (ERLE) -20 -5 -30 dB -30 dB -50 dB -50 dB -86 dBu Total Echo Reduction (ERL + ERLE) -50 dB Enable Push to Talk Mode Pre Gain -36 -61 -86 dBu FTT Threshold -0 -25 -50 -75 -100 -90 dB Close

For more information on each configuration feature, see the following topics:

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

NC (Noise Cancellation)

Mic Gating•

Filters•

Channel Routing Matrix: Inputs

The channel routing matrix section of the Channel screen shows the matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel (mic input 1 in this case). Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a colored box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box.

Input 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 T O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z I J K L M N A B Gated Non Gated Pre AEC Crosspoint Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Teko TX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N Process A Process B Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Teko TX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Teko TX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. l To Exp. M To Exp. N Process A

To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB. Note that the level to the nearest dB is displayed in the cross point for the channel on the Matrix.

-12 6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

Expanded Channel Routing Matrix

In the channel routing matrix, pressing the button underneath an Output, Process, or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel. For example, clicking on Output 5 displays the routing configuration for output channel 5 as shown below.

graph LR
    A["Input 1: Gated"] --> B["Output 1: Non Gated"]
    B --> C["Output 2: Gated"]
    C --> D["Output 3: Non Gated"]
    D --> E["Output 4: Gated"]
    E --> F["Output 5: Non Gated"]
    F --> G["Output 6: Gated"]
    G --> H["Output 7: Gated"]
    H --> I["Output 8: Gated"]
    I --> J["Output 9: Gated"]
    J --> K["Output 10: Gated"]
    K --> L["Output 11: Gated"]
    L --> M["Output 12: Gated"]
    M --> N["Output 13: Gated"]
    N --> O["Output 14: Gated"]
    O --> P["Output 15: Gated"]
    P --> Q["Output 16: Gated"]
    Q --> R["Output 17: Gated"]
    R --> S["Output 18: Gated"]
    S --> T["Output 19: Gated"]
    T --> U["Output 20: Gated"]
    U --> V["Output 21: Gated"]
    V --> W["Output 22: Gated"]
    W --> X["Output 23: Gated"]
    X --> Y["Output 24: Gated"]
    Y --> Z["Output 25: Gated"]
    Z --> AA["Output 26: Gated"]
    AA --> AB["Output 27: Gated"]
    AB --> AC["Output 28: Gated"]
    AC --> AD["Output 29: Gated"]
    AD --> AE["Output 30: Gated"]
    AE --> AF["Output 31: Gated"]
    AF --> AG["Output 32: Gated"]
    AG --> AH["Output 33: Gated"]
    AH --> AI["Output 34: Gated"]
    AI --> AJ["Output 35: Gated"]
    AJ --> AK["Output 36: Gated"]
    AK --> AL["Output 37: Gated"]
    AL --> AM["Output 38: Gated"]
    AM --> AN["Output 39: Gated"]
    AN --> AO["Output 40: Gated"]
    AO --> AP["Output 41: Gated"]
    AP --> AQ["Output 42: Gated"]
    AQ --> AR["Output 43: Gated"]
    AR --> AS["Output 44: Gated"]
    AS --> AT["Output 45: Gated"]
    AT --> AU["Output 46: Gated"]
    AU --> AV["Output 47: Gated"]
    AV --> AW["Output 48: Gated"]
    AW --> AX["Output 49: Gated"]
    AX --> AY["Output 50: Gated"]
    AY --> AZ["Output 51: Gated"]
    AZ --> BA["Output 52: Gated"]
    BA --> BB["Output 53: Gated"]
    BB --> BC["Output 54: Gated"]
    BC --> BD["Output 55: Gated"]
    BD --> BE["Output 56: Gated"]
    BE --> BF["Output 57: Gated"]
    BF --> BG["Output 58: Gated"]
    BG --> BH["Output 59: Gated"]
    BH --> BI["Output 60: Gated"]
    BI --> BJ["Output 61: Gated"]
    BJ --> BK["Output 62: Gated"]
    BK --> BL["Output 63: Gated"]
    BL --> BM["Output 64: Gated"]
    BM --> BN["Output 65: Gated"]
    BN --> BO["Output 66: Gated"]
    BO --> BP["Output 67: Gated"]
    BP --> BQ["Output 68: Gated"]
    BQ --> BR["Output 69: Gated"]
    BR --> BS["Output 70: Gated"]
    BS --> BT["Output 71: Gated"]
    BT --> BU["Output 72: Gated"]
    BU --> BV["Output 73: Gated"]
    BV --> BW["Output 74: Gated"]
    BW --> BX["Output 75: Gated"]
    BX --> BY["Output 76: Gated"]
    BY --> BZ["Output 77: Gated"]
    BZ --> CA["Output 78: Gated"]
    CA --> CB["Output 79: Gated"]
    CB --> CC["Output 80: Gated"]
    CC --> CD["Output 81: Gated"]
    CD --> CE["Output 82: Gated"]
    CE --> CF["Output 83: Gated"]
    CF --> CG["Output 84: Gated"]
    CG --> CH["Output 85: Gated"]
    CH --> CI["Output 86: Gated"]
    CI --> CJ["Output 87: Gated"]
    CJ --> CK["Output 88: Gated"]
    CK --> CL["Output 89: Gated"]
    CL --> CM["Output 90: Gated"]
    CM --> CN["Output 91: Gated"]
    CN --> CO["Output 92: Gated"]
    CO --> CP["Output 93: Gated"]
    CP --> CQ["Output 94: Gated"]
    CQ --> CR["Output 95: Gated"]
    CR --> CS["Output 96: Gated"]
    CS --> CT["Output 97: Gated"]
    CT --> CU["Output 98: Gated"]
    CU --> CV["Output 99: Gated"]
    CV --> CW[Output 100: Gain = -65 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -30 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -30 dB Output Level = -20 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -5 dB / -10 dB / -10 dB (Gated) |

This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane. See Output Settings for more information.

You can change the channel Label (name) of the output channel in the label entry field; toggle NOM constant gain on or off; toggle Mute on or off; and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel. The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time as you make configuration changes.

NOTE: Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Output 1" to "Ceiling Speakers" changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Audio Devices and Channel Objects. Channel objects contain all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save an input channel configuration, right click in the Channel screen (anywhere above the channel routing matrix). From the shortcut menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

NOTE: You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option. Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Mic 1 as Podium Mic Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen.

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree pane as shown below.

Objects Mic Podium Mic PTT Microphone Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Fader

For more information on using audio devices and channel objects, refer to the Table of Contents for the following topics:

AV Devices• Creating AV Devices• Channel Objects• Database Tab• Drag & Drop Configuration•

Optimizing Input Gain Structure

Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal-to-noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance. Before configuring an input channel, ClearOne recommends that you review the Optimizing Gain Structure topic.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control) Mic Gating Gating Tab Matrix Tab Drag & Drop Configuration Database Tab Line Input Settings Output Settings

LINE INPUT SETTINGS

Line Input Settings enable you to customize line input channel settings. All settings for a given line input are available on the Channel screen.

Accessing Line Input Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired line input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Sitev Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-C Mic Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Input 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Telco Rx Output Power Amp Telco Tx Processing Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Pre Gain 20 -6 Gain 20 -6 Post Gain 20 -6 Post AOC 20 -6 30 dBu 0.0 dB 30 dBu 30 dBu Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Powering 1 Powering 2 Powering 3 Powering 4 TEo X TEo Y TEo Z TEo AA TEo AB TEo AC TEo AD TEo AE TEo AF TEo AG TEo AH TEo AI TEo AJ TEo AK TEo AL TEo AM TEo ANA TEo AOA TEo APX TEo APYX TEo APZX TEo APAXX TEo APAYX TEo APZAYX TEo APAXAYX TEo APAYAYX TEo APZAYAYX TEo APAXAYX TEo APAYAYX TEo APZAYAYX TEo APAXAYX TEo APAYAYX TEo APZAYAYX TEo APAXAYX TEo APAYAYX TEo APZAYAYX TEo APAXAYX TEo APAYAYX TEo APZAYAYX TEo APAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAYAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYX TEePAXAYYX TEePAXAYYX TEePAXAYYX TEePAXAYYX TEePAXAYYX TEePAXAYYX TEePAXAYYYX TEePAXAYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

The Center Pane displays a signal processing diagram, meters, and configuration controls for selected line input channel as shown above. Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path.

The meters and configuration controls for line inputs are explained in the following sections.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

Pre Gain Meter

Pre Gain -36 -61 -86 -86 dBu

The Pre Gain Meter shows the line input level before gain adjustments.

NOTE: All meters in Console are peak-level meters.

Gain Slider

The Gain Slider adjusts the line input volume level. The Min/Max fine gain sliders are used to set minimum and maximum gain settings, and to report min/max gain settings via serial commands. You can also set the gain in .5dB increments using the Up/Down buttons, or enter a value directly in the field.

Post Gain Meter

The Post Gain Meter shows the input level after gain adjustments.

Mute Button

Clicking the Mute button toggles muting. The default is Off.

AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Button

Clicking the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) button displays the Channel Property Configuration dialog for the selected input channel as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration: Input 5 AGC Enable AGC Maximum Gain -18 -12 -6 -0 6 dB Target Level (RMS) -20 -10 -0 -10 -20 -30 0 dB Active Gain -18 0 -0 -18 0 dBu Response Time 100 2080 4060 6040 8020 10000 2000 ms Threshold (RMS) -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 -25 dB Close

Select the Enable AGC checkbox to enable AGC, or deselect it to disable AGC. For AGC configuration details, see AGC Configuration Settings.

Channel Routing Matrix: Line Inputs

The channel routing matrix shows the associated matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel (line input 5 in this case). Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a green box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box.

Input 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 T O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z I J K L M N A B Process A Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power/amp 1 Power/amp 2 Power/amp 3 Power/amp 4 Teko TX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N To Exp. N Process B

To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

Channel Routing Matrix: Outputs, Processing, Faders

In the channel routing matrix, pressing the button underneath an Output, Process, or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel. For example, clicking on Output 5 displays the routing configuration for output channel 5 as shown below.

graph LR
    A["Input 1"] --> B["0"]
    B --> C["0"]
    C --> D["0"]
    D --> E["0"]
    E --> F["0"]
    F --> G["0"]
    G --> H["0"]
    H --> I["0"]
    I --> J["0"]
    J --> K["0"]
    K --> L["0"]
    L --> M["0"]
    M --> N["0"]
    N --> O["0"]
    O --> P["0"]
    P --> Q["0"]
    Q --> R["0"]
    R --> S["0"]
    S --> T["0"]
    T --> U["0"]
    U --> V["0"]
    V --> W["0"]
    W --> X["0"]
    X --> Y["0"]
    Y --> Z["0"]
    Z --> AA["0"]
    AA --> AB["0"]
    AB --> AC["0"]
    AC --> AD["0"]
    AD --> AE["0"]
    AE --> AF["0"]
    AF --> AG["0"]
    AG --> AH["0"]
    AH --> AI["0"]
    AI --> AJ["0"]
    AJ --> AK["0"]
    AK --> AL["0"]
    AL --> AM["0"]
    AM --> AN["0"]
    AN --> AO["0"]
    AO --> AP["0"]
    AP --> AQ["0"]
    AQ --> AR["0"]
    AR --> AS["0"]
    AS --> AT["0"]
    AT --> AU["0"]
    AU --> AV["0"]
    AV --> AW["0"]
    AW --> AX["0"]
    AX --> AY["0"]
    AY --> AZ["0"]
    AZ --> BA["0"]
    BA --> BB["0"]
    BB --> BC["0"]
    BC --> BD["0"]
    BD --> BE["0"]
    BE --> BF["0"]
    BF --> BG["0"]
    BG --> BH["0"]
    BH --> BI["0"]
    BI --> BJ["0"]
    BJ --> BK["0"]
    BK --> BL["0"]
    BL --> BM["0"]
    BM --> BN["0"]
    BN --> BO["0"]
    BO --> BP["0"]
    BP --> BQ["0"]
    BQ --> BR["0"]
    BR --> BS["0"]
    BS --> BT["0"]
    BT --> BU["0"]
    BU --> BV["0"]
    BV --> BW["0"]
    BW --> BX["0"]
    BX --> BY["0"]
    BY --> BZ["0"]

This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane. See Output Settings for more information.

You can change the channel Label (name) of the output channel in the label entry field; toggle NOM constant gain on or off; toggle Mute on or off; and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel. The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time as you make configuration changes.

NOTE: Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Output 1" to "Ceiling Speakers" changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the Database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save an input channel configuration, right click in the Channel screen (anywhere above the channel routing matrix). From the shortcut menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

NOTE: You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option. Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Line 5 as Podium DVD Player Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen.

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below.

Objects Mic Podium Mic PTT Microphone Line Podium CD Changer Podium DVD Player Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Fader

Optimizing Input Gain Structure

Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal-to-noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance. Before configuring an input channel, ClearOne recommends that you review the Optimizing Gain Structure topic.

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview•

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

Mic Gating•

Gating Tab·

Matrix Tab·

Drag & Drop Configuration•

Database Tab•

Mic Input Settings

Output Settings•

TELCO/VOIP RX SETTINGS

Telco/VoIP Rx Settings enable you to customize telephone receive channel settings using the Channel tab.

Accessing Telco/VoIP Rx Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the Telco/VoIP Rx channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

Converg Console - 880ia1.cng File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Current Unit (HI) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (HO) Converge880TA00 Mcc Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx Output Power Amp Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Telco Rx 1 Telco Rx Ring Int Dial Tree Level -4 dB -6 dB -3 dB -2 dB -1 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -5 dB Gain Clean Distrust ACC Max Punt Gain Telco RX Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Recn Boost Recn Input -4 dB -6 dB -3 dB -2 dB -1 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0 dB -0dB

Converge Console 3.0.1 - Untitled-1.csv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Site1 Current Unit (E0) CONVERGEVHD-8 Site View Tree View (EO) CONVERGEVHD-0 Line VoIP Rx VoIP Rx Output VoIP Tx Voip TX Unit Channel Metrics ABC Reference Macro Control String Event Scheduler Database VoIP Rx 1 Voip Rx Ring Int Dial Tone Level 50 dBu Gain 20 40 60 Out Gain 20 30 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0dB RLP R1 RLP R2 RLP R3 RLP R4 RLP R5 RLP R6 RLP R7 RLP R8 RLP R9 RLP R10 RLP R11 RLP R12 RLP R13 RLP R14 RLP R15 RLP R16 RLP R17 RLP R18 RLP R19 RLP R20 RLP R21 RLP R22 RLP R23 RLP R24 RLP R25 RLP R26 RLP R27 RLP R28 RLP R29 RLP R30 RLP R31 RLP R32 RLP R33 RLP R34 RLP R35 RLP R36 RLP R37 RLP R38 RLP R39 RLP R40 RLP R41 RLP R42 RLP R43 RLP R44 RLP R45 RLP R46 RLP R47 RLP R48 RLP R49 RLP R50 RLP R51 RLP R52 RLP R53 RLP R54 RLP R55 RLP R56 RLP R57 RLP R58 RLP R59 RLP R60 RLP R61 RLP R62 RLP R63 RLP R64 RLP R65 RLP R66 RLP R67 RLP R68 RLP R69 RLP R70 RLP R71 RLP R72 RLP R73 RLP R74 RLP R75 RLP R76 RLP R77 RLP R78 RLP R79 RLP R80 RLP R81 RLP R82 RLP R83 RLP R84 RLP R85 RLP R86 RLP R87 RLP R88 RLP R89 RLP R90 RLP R91 RLP R92 RLP R93 RLP R94 RLP R95 RLP R96 RLP R97 RLP R98 RLP R99 RLP R100

As shown above, the center pane displays a signal flow diagram for the telco/VoIP rx channel, real-time peak-level meters, as well as a channel routing matrix that displays the audio routing configuration for the channel. Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path.

The following sections describe how to use these controls (in order from left-to-right and top-to-bottom as they appear in the signal flow) to configure the telco receive channel settings for your installation.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Labels are shown throughout Console wherever the channel is referenced.

Channel Configuration Buttons

The Channel Configuration Buttons enable you to configure settings for the Telco/VoIP Rx channel. With the exception of the Mute, ClearEffect ^™ , and ALC buttons, which toggle their respective functions and have no user-configurable settings, clicking a channel configuration button displays the Channel Property Configuration window as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration: Telco RX NC | Telco Settings | Telco Meters | Enable Noise Canceler Cancellation Depth -15 - -12 - -9 - -6 6 dB Close

The window contains three tabs: NC (Noise Cancellation), Telco Settings, and Telco Meters, which are described in the following sections.

NC (Noise Cancellation) Tab

Select the Enable Noise Canceller checkbox to enable NC for the channel. Adjust the Cancellation Depth slider to the dB setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity. The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from 6dB to 15dB. The default is 6dB. The default for NC is off.

Channel Property Configuration: Telco RX NC Telco Settings Telco Meters Telco Settings Auto Answer 4-Rings 3-Rings 2-Rings Disabled Auto Disconnect Loop Drop + Call Progress Call Progress Loop Drop Off Ring Type Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Telco Adaption Auto Burst Hook Flash 50 440 830 1220 1610 2000 250 ms DTMF Level -12 -6 -0 -6 -12 0 dB Audible Ringer Indication -12 -6 -0 -6 -12 0.0 dB Audible Hook Indication -12 -6 -0 -6 -12 0 dB Ringer Cadence Standard Custom Min On Time 100 ms any Min On Time 30 ms any Close

You can use noise cancellation on all types of input channels. See NC (Noise Cancellation) for more information.

Telco Settings Tab

Channel Property Configuration: Telco R3 NC Telco Settings Telco Meters Taco Settings Auto Ancestor 4-Fings 3-Fings 2-Fings Disabled Auto Disconnected Loop Drop + Cell Progress Cell Progress Loop Drop Off Flip Type Type 1 Type 2 Type 2 Taco Ablation Auto Burst Hook Flash 50 440 830 1220 1610 2000 200 ms UWR Lows -12 -6 -4 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -12 -10 -6 -4 -2 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0dB

Settings available on the Telco Settings Tab include:

Auto Answer: Set the number of rings before the unit connects an incoming call (or disable the function). The default is Disabled.

Auto-Disconnect: Select the auto disconnect mode to control when the unit disconnects a connected call. Modes include Loop Drop + Call Progress, Call Progress, and Loop Drop, and Off. The default is Loop Drop + Call Progress. (Not used in VoIP Settings)

Ring Type: Select from three different ring tones (Type 1, Type 2, Type 3). To test a particular tone, click Test after you have selected the tone.

Note: VH20 Units have five selectable ring types.

Telco Adaptation: Some applications require the unit to adapt to line conditions using a white-noise burst (Noise) rather than automatically (Auto). The default is Auto. (Not used in VoIP Settings)

Hook Flash: Sends a momentary interruption in the line seizure, allowing activation of options such as 3-way calling, call waiting, and call hold. This feature is dependent on the services offered by your telephone company. You can set the duration of the hook flash using the slider or the selector box. Range is 50ms to 2 seconds in 10ms steps. The default is 250ms.

DTMF Level: This feature allows you to adjust the DTMF tone level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room. The level can be adjusted in 1dB steps from a nominal level of 0dB to plus or minus 12dB in 1dB increments. The default is 0dB.

Audible Ring Indication: When this feature is enabled, an audible ring is heard for incoming calls. The level adjustment allows you to customize the level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room. The level can be adjusted in 1dB steps from a nominal level 0 (default) to plus or minus 12dB in 1dB increments. The default is 0dB.

Audible Hook Indication: When the unit goes off hook (connects) a beep is injected into the receive channel and transmit channel of the unit. When the unit goes on hook (disconnects), a series of two beeps is injected into the receive channel to indicate that the call has been dropped.

Ringer Cadence: (Not used in VoIP Settings)

• Standard: Uses the cadence specified in the Country Code to detect the standard ring cadence per country.
• Custom: Set for distinctive ring cadences. When custom is set, the Min On and Min Off times must be selected from their respective drop-down boxes. PBX's can have distinctive ring cadences that are not country specific. These times are the minimum values the ring cadence must be for the unit to detect the ring. If the ring cadence signal provided by the PBX is greater than the custom settings, the unit will detect the ring.

Telco Meters Tab (Not available on the VH20)

The Telco Meters tab displays a round-trip signal flow diagram for the selected Telco Rx, as well as real-time level meters for the signal at each stage of processing. The settings on this tab cannot be modified.

graph TD
    A["Matrix"] --> B["NOM"]
    B --> C["Mute"]
    C --> D["TX Post Gain"]
    D --> E["Limiter"]
    E --> F["TX Output"]
    F --> G["D/A"]
    G --> H["TERL"]
    H --> I["HP"]
    I --> J["A/D"]
    J --> K["RX Boost"]
    K --> L["Telco DAA"]
    L --> M["Telco Line"]
    N["RX Post Gain"] --> O["Gain"]
    P["Mute"] --> Q["ALC"]
    R["NG"] --> S["TEC"]
    T["TERLE"] --> U["TERL + TERLE = Total Telcs Echo Reduction"]

NOTE: When you click the Close button (bottom right corner of screen), or close the window manually, any changes you make in the tabs of the Channel Property Configuration: Telco RX screen are automatically saved.

The Telco meters include:

• Telephone Echo Return Loss (TERL): This meter shows the amount of echo loss from the telephone line to the unit.
• Telephone Echo Return Loss Enhancement (TERLE): This meter shows the enhancement added by the telephone hybrid to reduce echo below the audible level.
  • Total Telephone Echo Reduction (TTER): This meter shows the sum of TERL and TERLE.
  • Transmit Input: This meter shows the audio level input from the matrix to the telephone line.
• Transmit Output: This meter shows the transmit audio level output to the telephone line.
• Receive Input: This meter shows the audio level input received from the telephone line.
• Receive Output: This meter shows the receive audio level output to the matrix.

Dialer Button

Dialer

The Dialer button opens the telephone dialer, allowing you to place conference calls.

C Cluster MUTE MUTE RE_NULL 2/12/2007 1:47:17 PM [1:45*] Phenolase ClearOne OK/OFF REDIAL FLASH PHOLOCK PHONE BOOK Close

See the Dialer topic for more information on using the dialer and its features.

Dial Tone Level Slider

The Dial Tone Level slider allows you to set dial tone gain using the slider or selector box. The default is zero. Range is -12dB to 12dB in 1dB increments.

Recv Boost Slider

The Receive Boost slider allows you to set the gain for the incoming telco/VolP rx signal. This is typically used for low-level telephone lines, allowing the signal to be boosted to an acceptable level of performance. To use Receive Boost, check the Recv Boost check box, then move the slider to the desired gain settings.

Recv Boost adds up to 12dB of gain to the signal (adjustable in 3dB increments from 0dB to 12dB). The default is Off.

Recv Input Meter

The Receive Input meter displays the dB level of the incoming telco signal prior to any signal processing.

NOTE: All meters in Console are peak-level meters.

NC Button

Clicking the Noise Cancellation button opens the Channel Property Configuration: Telco/VoIP RX window with the NC tab selected, allowing you to configure noise cancellation settings.

To use noise cancellation, click Enable Noise Canceller, then adjust the Cancellation Depth to the setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity for your installation. The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from 6dB to 15dB. The default is 6dB. The noise canceller default is Off.

ClearEffect™ Button

To reduce bandwidth requirements, telephone lines limit audio bandwidth to a range of 300Hz–3.3kHz. ClearEffect ^™ enhances the incoming signal from a telephone line to emulate wideband audio by adding high and low frequencies to the audio signal.

Click the ClearEffect™ button to toggle this feature on and off. The default is On.

ALC Button

Clicking the Automatic Level Control button toggles ALC on and off. ALC provides auto-leveling for all conference call participants on the telco/VoIP rx line, keeping soft and loud participants at a consistent level. The default is Off. See AGC/ALC for additional information.

NOM Button

Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel. NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics. When using NOM over the expansion bus, only I – R Buses support passing NOM information. The default is On.

Mute Button

Clicking the Mute button toggles muting for the telco receive channel. The default is Off.

Gain Slider

The Gain slider changes the gain for the telco receive channel from nominal 0. To change the value, use the slider or the selector box. Range is from -65 to +20dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

Min/Max Limits

Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits. These limits only apply when using relative gain commands; absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits. Min/Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels.

Post-Gain Meter

The Post Gain level meter displays the post-gain signal level in dB.

Channel Routing Matrix

The channel routing matrix section of the Channel screen shows the associated matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel (telco/VolP rx in this case). Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a green box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box.

Telco RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 0 0 0 0 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power/imp 1 Power/imp 2 Power/imp 3 Power/imp 4 Power/imp 5 To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N Process A Process B Process A

For telco/VoIP rx channels, Outputs 5-8, Speaker, and To Exp. Bus S are selected as cross points by default. You can click directly on any cross point box in the top row to a cross point (routing path), or leave it blank, as required for your installation.

To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

In the channel routing matrix, pressing the button underneath an Output, Process, or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that output channel as shown below.

graph LR
    A["Output 1"] --> B["NOM"]
    B --> C["Mute"]
    C --> D["Gain"]
    D --> E["Output Level: -30 dB"]

This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane. See Output Settings for more information.

You can change the label (name) of the output channel in the Output entry box, toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off, toggle the Mute button to mute or un-mute the channel, and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel. The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time.

NOTE: Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to the output, processing, or fader channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Output 1" to "Ceiling Speakers" changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the Database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save a telco/VolP rx channel configuration, right click in the Channel screen (anywhere above the channel routing matrix). From the shortcut menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Telco Rx 1 as Telco Line In Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below.

Objects Mic Podium Mic PTT Microphone Line Telco Rx Telco Line In Output Telco Tx Processing Fader

For more information on using audio devices and channel objects, refer to the Table of Contents for these topics:

AV Devices•

Creating AV Devices

Channel Objects•

Database Tab•

Drag & Drop Configuration

Optimizing Input Gain Structure

Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal-to-noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance. When configuring the telco/VolP rx channel, ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic.

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview•

NC (Noise Cancellation)

Mic Gating•

Gating Tab·

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

Label Editor•

Output Settings

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

OUTPUT SETTINGS

Output Settings enable you to customize output channel settings. All settings for a given output are available on the Channel screen.

Accessing Output Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired output channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

graph TD
    A["Input 1"] --> B["Output 1"]
    C["Input 2"] --> D["Output 2"]
    E["Input 3"] --> F["Output 3"]
    G["Input 4"] --> H["Output 4"]
    I["Input 5"] --> J["Output 5"]
    K["Input 6"] --> L["Output 6"]
    M["Input 7"] --> N["Output 7"]
    O["Input 8"] --> P["Output 8"]
    Q["Input 9"] --> R["Output 9"]
    S["Input 10"] --> T["Output 10"]
    U["Input 11"] --> V["Output 11"]
    W["Input 12"] --> X["Output 12"]
    Y["Line"] --> Z["Line Rx"]
    AA["Line"] --> AB["Line Tx"]
    AC["Line"] --> AD["Line Rx"]
    AE["Line"] --> AF["Line Tx"]
    AG["Line"] --> AH["Line Rx"]
    AI["Line"] --> AJ["Line Tx"]
    AK["Line"] --> AL["Line Rx"]
    AM["Line"] --> AN["Line Tx"]
    AO["Line"] --> AP["Line Rx"]
    AQ["Line"] --> AR["Line Tx"]
    AS["Line"] --> AT["Line Rx"]
    AU["Line"] --> AV["Line Tx"]
    AW["Line"] --> AX["Line Rx"]
    AY["Output 1"] --> AZ["NOM"]
    BA["Output 2"] --> BB["Mix"]
    BC["Output 3"] --> BD["NOM"]
    BE["Output 4"] --> BF["Mix"]
    BG["Output 5"] --> BH["NOM"]
    BI["Output 6"] --> BJ["Mix"]
    BK["Output 7"] --> BL["NOM"]
    BM["Output 8"] --> BN["Mix"]
    BO["Output 9"] --> BP["NOM"]
    BZ["Output 10"] --> CA["NOM"]
    CB["Output 11"] --> CC["NOM"]
    DD["Output 12"] --> EE["NOM"]
    BF --> F
    BG --> AG
    BH --> AH
    BI --> AI
    BJ --> AJ
    BB --> AK
    CC --> AL
    CE["Gain"] --> FL
    GA["Output Level"] --> GH
    AI --> GF
    AJ --> GF
    AK --> GF
    AL --> GF
    AM --> GF
    AN --> GF
    AO --> GF
    AP --> GF
    AQ --> GF
    BR --> GF
    CA --> GF
    BL --> GF
    BG --> GF
    BH --> GF
    BI --> GF
    BJ --> GF
    AK --> GF
    AL --> GF
    AM --> GF
    AN --> GF
    AO --> GF
    BR --> GF
    CA --> GF
    AD --> GF
    AE --> GF
    AF --> GF
    BG --> GF
    BH --> GF
    BI --> GF
    BJ --> GF
    AK --> GF
    AL --> GF
    AM --> GF
    AN --> GF
    AO --> GF
    BR --> GF
    CA --> GF
    AD --> GF
    AE --> GF
    AF --> GF

The center pane of the screen displays a signal flow diagram, a real-time Output Level Gain meter, as well as the channel routing matrix, which shows the audio routing configuration for the selected output channel.

The following sections describe how to use output channel configuration controls.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

NOM (Number of Open Mics/Constant Level)

Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel. NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics. When using NOM over the expansion bus, only I – R Buses support passing NOM information. The default is On.

Mute Button

Clicking the Mute button toggles muting. The default is Off.

Gain Slider

Gain 20 -65 0.0 dB

The Gain slider adjusts the output gain level. To change the value, use the slider or selector box. Range is from -65 to +20dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

Min/Max Limits

Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits. These limits only apply when using relative gain commands; absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits. Min/Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels.

Output Level Meter

Shows the signal level in dB when a signal is present.

Channel Routing Matrix: Outputs

The channel routing matrix shows the matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel (Output 1 in this case). Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a green box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box.

Gated Non Gated Pre AEC Crosspoint Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco RX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Process A Process B Output 1 0

You can click directly on any cross point box in the top row to set a parameter as cross point, or leave it blank, as required for your installation. To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

Channel Routing Matrix: Inputs, Processing, Faders

In the channel routing matrix, pressing the button above an Input, Process, or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel.

graph TD
    A["Pre Gain"] --> B["Gain Coarse"]
    B --> C["Post Gain"]
    C --> D["Post Process"]
    D --> E["Post Gate"]

    subgraph PA Adapt and AEC Reference
        F1["Input 1: PPWR"] --> G1["-86 dBu"]
        G1 --> H1["-30 dB"]
        H1 --> I1["-30 dB"]
        I1 --> J1["-30 dB"]
        J1 --> K1["-30 dB"]
        K1 --> L1["-30 dB"]
        L1 --> M1["-30 dB"]
        M1 --> N1["-30 dB"]
        N1 --> O1["-30 dB"]
        O1 --> P1["-30 dB"]
        P1 --> Q1["-30 dB"]
        Q1 --> R1["-30 dB"]
        R1 --> S1["-30 dB"]
        S1 --> T1["-30 dB"]
        T1 --> U1["-30 dB"]
        U1 --> V1["-30 dB"]
        V1 --> W1["-30 dB"]
        W1 --> X1["-30 dB"]
        X1 --> Y1["-30 dB"]
        Y1 --> Z1["-30 dB"]
        Z1 --> AA1["-30 dB"]
        AA1 --> AB1["-30 dB"]
        AB1 --> AC1["-30 dB"]
    end

    subgraph Output 1
        AD["Input 1: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99<br>    end<br>    <br>    subgraph Output Level<br>        AG[Output Level: -20, -5, -30"] --> AH["Output Level: -20, -5, -30"]
    end

This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane. See Mic Input Settings, Line Input Settings, Processing Settings, and Fader Settings for more information.

You can change the label (name) of the channel in the Output entry box, toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off, toggle the Mute button to mute or un-mute the channel, and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel. The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time.

NOTE: Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Input 1" to "Ceiling Mic" changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the Database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save an input channel configuration, right click in the Channel screen (anywhere above the channel routing matrix). From the shortcut menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

NOTE: You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option. Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Mic 1 as Podium Mic Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen.

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below.

Objects Mic Podium Mic Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Fader

For more information on using audio devices and channel objects, see the Table of Contents for the following topics:

AV Devices•

Creating AV Devices•

Channel Objects

Database Tab•

Drag & Drop Configuration

TELCO/VOIP TX SETTINGS

Telco/VoIP Tx Settings enable you to customize telephone transmit channel settings using the Channel screen.

Accessing Telco/VoIP Tx Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the Telco/VoIP Tx channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

Converge Console - 880ia1.cwg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Current Unit (H) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (HD) Converge880TA00 Mcc Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Gated Non Gated pre AEC Outspot Telco TX Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco Tx 1 Telco Tx Gain 30 0.0 dB NOM Max Post Gain -4 30 dBu -5 30 dBu Output Level 30 dBu Objects Mcc Line Telco Rx Output Power Amp Telco Tx Processing Fader Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Site: Unit: Converge880TA00 (Device ID 0)

Converge Console 3.0.1 - Untitled: 1.xx e-Flow File View AND Connect Modulator Services Help Site Selection Site1 Current Unit (EB) CONVERGEVH20-0 Site View Tree View (EB) CONVERGEVH20-0 Line VoIP Rx Voip Rx Output VoIP Tx Voip Tx Input 1 Input 2 Voip Rx From Op O From Op P From Op Q From Op R From Op S From Op T From Op U From Op V From Op W From Op X From Op Y From Op Z From Op L From Op M From Op N Voip Tx Voip Tx 1 Voip Tx NCAM Mnra Gain: -20 -40 Output Level: -20 -60 -80 -100 dBu Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Skin: Steel Unit: CONVERGEVH20-0 (Device ID: 0) ClearOne

As shown above, the Center Pane displays a signal flow diagram for the telco/VoIP tx channel, real-time peak-level meters, as well as the channel routing matrix, which shows the audio routing configuration for the channel. Configuration settings for the telco/VoIP tx channel are displayed as controls (buttons, sliders, etc.) which are located at the appropriate stage in the signal flow.

The following sections describe how to use these controls to configure telco transmit settings for your installation.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

Dialer Button

The Dialer button opens the telephone dialer (shown below), allowing you to place calls to establish a conference call with a remote location.

C Slater MUTE MUTE RE_NULL 2/12/2007 1:07:17 PM [143x] PhoneBook ClearOne GHI JKL MNO ON/OFF REDIAL FLASH 7 PUN5 TUV WOYZ * 0 # PHONEBOOK. Close

See Dialer for more information on using the dialer and its features.

NOM (Number of Open Mics/Constant Level)

Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel. NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics. When using NOM over the expansion bus, only I – R Buses support passing NOM information. The default is On.

Mute Button

Clicking the Mute button toggles muting. The default is Off.

Gain Slider

The Gain slider adjusts the output gain level. To change the value, use the slider or selector box. Range is from -65 to +20dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

Min/Max Limits

Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits. These limits only apply when using relative gain commands; absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits. Min/Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min/max levels.

Post-Gain Meter

The Post Gain level meter displays the post-gain signal level in dB.

Limiter

The Limiter limits the output level to the telco side to comply with telco system requirements. Note that the meter is only a graphic; it does not show limiter activity. (Not used in VoIP settings)

Output Level Meter

Shows the signal level in dB when a signal is present.

Channel Routing Matrix: Telco/VoIP TX

The graphic below shows the Telco/VoIP tx channel routing matrix.

Caled New Galled Pre ABC Disgraded Telus TX

All inputs from Exp. O, and from Exp. S are selected as cross points and the first four inputs are gated by default. Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a colored box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box.

To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 -6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

Channel Routing Matrix: Inputs, Processing, Faders

In the channel routing matrix, pressing the button above an Input, Process, or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for the channel as shown below.

graph TD
    A["Pre Gain"] --> B["Gain Coarse"]
    B --> C["Post Gain"]
    C --> D["Post Process"]
    D --> E["Post Gate"]

    subgraph PA Adapt and AEC Reference
        F["Input 1: Mio 1 Input 1"] --> G["PPWR"]
        H["PA Adapt and AEC Reference Output 8"] --> I["AEC"]
        J["Output 8: AEC"] --> K["NC"]
        L["Output 8: Mate"] --> M["Filter"]
        N["Output 8: AGC"] --> O["ALC"]
        P["Output 8: Gate"] --> Q["Gate"]
    end

    subgraph Telco TX
        R["Input 1: Gated"]
        S["Input 2: Non Gated"]
        T["Input 3: Pre AEC"]
        U["Input 4: Crosspoint"]
        V["Input 5: Gated"]
        W["Input 6: Non Gated"]
        X["Input 7: Pre AEC"]
        Y["Input 8: Crosspoint"]
        Z["Input 9: Gated"]
        AA["Input 10: Non Gated"]
        AB["Input 11: Pre AEC"]
        AC["Input 12: Crosspoint"]
        AD["Input 13: Gated"]
        AE["Input 14: Non Gated"]
        AF["Input 15: Pre AEC"]
        AG["Input 16: Crosspoint"]
        AH["Input 17: Gated"]
        AI["Input 18: Non Gated"]
        AJ["Input 19: Pre AEC"]
        AK["Input 20: Crosspoint"]
    end

    subgraph Output Level
        AL["Output Level -30 dBu"] --> AM["Limiter"]
    end

    %% Legend
    %% Legend
    %% Legend

This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane. See Mic Input Settings, Line Input Settings, Processing Settings, and Fader Settings for more information.

You can change the label (name) of the channel in the Telco/VolP tx entry box, toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off, toggle the Mute button to mute or un-mute the channel, and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel. The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time.

NOTE: Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Input 1" to "Podium Mic" in the Mic 1 entry box changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the Database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save an input channel configuration, right click in the Channel screen (anywhere above the channel routing matrix). From the menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

NOTE: You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option. Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Telco Tr 1 as Telco Line Out Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen.

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below.

Objects Mic Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Telco Line Out Processing Fader

For more information on using audio devices and channel objects, see the following topics:

AV Devices•

Creating AV Devices•

Channel Objects

Database Tab•

Drag & Drop Configuration

Optimizing Output Gain Structure

Optimizing gain structure for output channels ensures optimal audio performance. When initially configuring output channels, ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic.

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview•

Mic Gating•

Gating Tab•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings•

Processing Settings

Fader Settings•

Telco/VolP rx Settings •

Optimizing Gain Structure•

PROCESSING SETTINGS

Processing Settings enable you to configure filters, delay, compression, and gain to create precise audio configurations for any venue. There are four processing blocks available for the 840T (A-D), and eight for the 880, 880T, 880TA, 8i, SR 1212 (A-H) and SR 1212A (A-H).

Accessing Processing Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired processing block on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

Converge Console - 880ta1.cwg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Current Unit (H) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (HD) Converge880TA00 Mx Line Telco Rx Output Power Amp Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Gated Non Gated pre AEC Outpoint Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx From Exp P Q R X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z Y Process A Filter Delay Process Max Process A 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.0 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 0.1 dBm 1.2334567891233456789123345678912334567891233456789123345678912334567891233456789123345678912334567891233456789

The center pane displays a signal processing diagram, meters, and configuration controls for selected processing block as shown above.

The meters and configuration controls for processing blocks are explained in the following sections.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

Filter Button

Pressing the Filter button brings up the Channel Property Configuration window with the Filter Tab selected as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration: Process A Filter Delay Compressor Active Filter Type: PEQ 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 dB 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10 -12 -14 -16 -18 20 50 200 500 2K 5K 20K Hz Phase Add Filter Filters Bypass All Remove Filter Remaining 15(Table View Processing Channels Show A B C D E F G H Active ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Close

For more information on Filters and their configuration, use the Table of Contents to locate the Filters topic.

Delay Button

Press the Delay button to bring up the Channel Property Configuration window with the Delay Tab selected as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration: Process A Filter Delay Compressor Enable Delay Length 0.000 ft Calculated Delay 0.00 ms Units ● Feet ○ Inches ○ Metres ○ Milliseconds Temperature ● Fahrenheit ○ Celsius Temperature 70.00 F Close

Introducing an appropriate amount of delay to the forward-mounted driver(s) re-establishes the acoustical alignment necessary for proper sound imaging in a room. The same principle of introducing delay applies to separate speaker enclosures located various distances from the listening area.

Other types of delay to consider when establishing delay parameters are delays which occur naturally as a result of processing within the unit. Propagation delay is an example. This delay is caused by operations such as the conversion of the signal between analog and digital formats.

Select the Enable Delay checkbox to enable it. Calibrate the amount of delay using the Length and Temperature configuration controls. Length is defined as the distance between the source and audience. The Calculated Delay reading reflects any changes you make in the Distance and Temperature fields.

Click Close to save changes and return to the Process/Channel window.

Cmprs (Compression) Button

Pressing the Cmprs button opens the Channel Property Configuration window with the Compressor tab selected as shown below.

Channel Property Configuration: Process A Filter Delay Compressor Enable Compressor Group Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 None Post Cmprs Gain 0.0 dB Input -20 -5 -30 -20 -10 -5 0 80 dB Compression 0 -40 -30 -20 -10 -5 0 40 0 dB Threshold -60 -44 -20 -12 4 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Attack 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 10.0 ms Ratio 1 3 5 7 9 11 12 14 16 18 20 1.1 Release 100 480 860 1240 1620 2000 500 ms Close

Select the Enable Compressor checkbox to activate the compressor. Using the compressor, you can change the gain transfer characteristics of the signal path and control the dynamics of a signal. Compressor settings are described below.

Group

Use the Group radio buttons to assign this compressor to a compressor group. The default is None. When you assign a compressor to a compressor group—such as a group of two compressors configured for left and right stereo channels—the compressors will monitor each other. When one channel compresses, all compressors in the group compress together.

A compressor group must be configured for a single unit; a group cannot control compressors from multiple units.

Post Compressor Gain

Adjust the compressor gain with the slider or by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. The graph reflects the input/output decibel levels with the gain, ratio, and threshold settings you select.

Threshold

Determines the RMS level at which the compressor begins to operate. The range is from -30 to +20dBu. The default is 0dBu.

Ratio

Changes the rate of compression applied to the input signal as the signal exceeds the threshold level. The range is 1:1 to 1:20dB. The default is 1:1.

Attack

Sets the time increment used to reduce the signal from input level to the prescribed output level when the threshold is exceeded. The range is 0 to 100ms in .5ms steps. The default is 10ms.

Release

Sets the time increment used to restore the signal to the input level when the signal drops below the threshold. The range is 100ms to 2 seconds, in 5ms increments. The default is 500ms.

Input Meter

Shows the level of the signal as it enters the compressor.

Compression Meter

Shows the instantaneous compression value at a given time.

Gain Slider & Process Meter

Process -30 Meter -65 Gain -5 20 20 46 dBu 0.0 dB

Use the Gain Slider to establish the gain level for this processing channel. Range is -65 to 20dB. The Process Meter shows the signal level when a signal is present.

Min/Max Limits

Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale to set minimum and maximum gain level limits. These limits only apply when using relative gain commands; absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits. Min/Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min/max levels, provided relative gain commands are used.

Channel Routing Matrix

The channel routing matrix shows the Matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel (Process A in this case). Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a colored box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box.

Gated Non-Gated Pre AEC Ocscsped Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco RX From Exp O From Exp P From Exp Q From Exp R From Exp S From Exp T From Exp U From Exp V From Exp W From Exp X From Exp Y From Exp Z From Exp I From Exp J From Exp K From Exp L From Exp M From Exp N Process A Process B Processing A Process A Filter Drain Conpr Mata Process Meter 80 dBps Gain 0.0 dBp Process A Y scanout B scanout

You can click directly on any cross point box to set a cross point, or leave it blank, as required for your installation. To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears as shown below. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 -6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

Expanded Channel Routing Matrix

In the channel routing matrix, pressing the button above or below the cross point box for a channel displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel as shown below.

Medical procedure flowchart for patient management and REC reference, covering pre-Gain, Post-Gain, Post-Process, and Post-Date stages with associated diagnostic indicators.

This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane.

You can change the label (name) of the channel in the label entry box. You can also change channel configuration settings. For example, for an output channel you can toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off, toggle the Mute button, and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel.

NOTE: Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Input 1" to "Podium Mic" changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring a processing channel using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the Database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save a processing channel configuration, right click in the processing section of the screen (surrounded by an orange rectangle). From the menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

NOTE: You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option. Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Processing A as Process Channel Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen.

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below.

Objects Mic Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Process Channel Fader

For more information on using AV devices and channel objects, see the following topics:

AV Devices•

Creating AV Devices•

Channel Objects

Database Tab•

Drag & Drop Configuration

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview

Filters•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings•

Output Settings•

Processing Settings•

Fader Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Drag & Drop Configuration

FADER SETTINGS

NOTE: The Converge Pro 880TA and Converge SR 1212A do not have fader settings.

Fader Settings allow you to set configuration parameters for fader channels using the Channel tab. Fader channels are internal sub-bus channels similar to Processing channels that provide additional sub-bus mixes to control volume settings within a site.

Accessing Fader Settings

With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar, select the desired fader channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane.

Converge Console - Board Room.cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Board Room Current Unit (30) Converge840T-03 Site View Tree View Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco Rx Telco RX Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco Tx Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Fader Fader 1 Fader 2 Fader 3 Fader 4 Units Channel Metrics ABC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Gated Non Gated Pre ABC Onsetpoint Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 1 Fader 2 Fader 3 Fader 4 Mode: Configuration Site Data: Good Unit Data: Good Connected Site: Board Room Unit: Converge840T-03 (Device ID:0) Objecta Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Fader

As shown above, the Center Pane displays the configuration controls and gating for the selected Fader channel. Fader configuration controls are described in the following sections.

Channel Label

Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field (optional). Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

Mute Button

Clicking the Mute button toggles muting. The default is Off.

Gain Slider & Post Gain Meter

Post Gain -30 -5 20 -46 dBu -85 20 Gain 0.0 dB

Adjusts output gain level. Use the Gain slider to adjust output volume level. You can also enter the level directly in the selector box. The Post Gain meter reflects the post-gain level of the signal in dB.

Min/Max Limits

Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain scale to create minimum and maximum gain level limits. These limits only apply when using relative gain commands; absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits. Min/Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min/max levels.

Channel Routing Matrix: Faders

The channel routing matrix shows the Matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel (Fader 1 in this case). Clicking a cross point box selects it, clicking it a second time sets the cross point, as indicated by a green box. The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box

Fader 1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 T O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A B C D I 2 3 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco TX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. X From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. y from exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp exp ex Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F From Exp. S From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex p From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex x From Ex i

You can click directly on any cross point box to set a cross point, or leave it blank, as required for your installation.

To adjust cross point gain/attenuation, right-click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu.

-12 6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider. Expanded Channel Routing Matrix

graph TD
    A["Input 1: Pre Gain"] --> B["Gain Coarse"]
    B --> C["Fire"]
    C --> D["Post Gain"]
    D --> E["Post Process"]
    E --> F["Post Gate"]

    subgraph Input_1
        G["PPM1"]
        H["PA Adapt and AEC Reference"]
        I["Error Ref. 1"]
    end

    subgraph Output_1
        J["Faster 1: Input 2, Input 3, Input 4, Input 5, Input 6, Input 7, Input 8"]
        K["Faster 1: Faster 2, Faster 3, Faster 4"]
    end

    L["Pre Gain"] --> M["Gain Coarse"]
    M --> N["Fire"]
    N --> O["Post Gain"]
    O --> P["Post Process"]
    P --> Q["Post Gate"]

    R["PCDC"] --> S["NOM"]
    T["Non Gated"] --> U["Mate"]
    V["Pre AEC"] --> W["Filter"]
    X["Crosspiled"] --> Y["ADC"]
    Z["Data"] --> AA["0.0 dB"]

    AB["Input 1: ABC"] --> AC["NC"]
    AD["Input 2: Non Gated"] --> AE["FC"]
    AF["Input 3: Pre AEC"] --> AG["FC"]
    AH["Input 4: Crosspiled"] --> AI["FC"]
    AJ["Input 5: Pre AEC"] --> AK["FC"]
    AL["Input 6: Pre AEC"] --> AM["FC"]
    AN["Input 7: Pre AEC"] --> AO["FC"]
    AP["Input 8: Pre AEC"] --> AQ["FC"]
    AR["Input 9: Pre AEC"] --> AS["FC"]
    AT["Input 10: Pre AEC"] --> AU["FC"]
    AV["Input 11: Pre AEC"] --> AW["FC"]
    AX["Input 12: Pre AEC"] --> AY["FC"]
    AZ["Input 13: Pre AEC"] --> BA["FC"]
    BB["Input 14: Pre AEC"] --> BC["FC"]
    BD["Input 15: Pre AEC"] --> BE["FC"]
    BF["Input 16: Pre AEC"] --> BG["FC"]
    BH["Input 17: Pre AEC"] --> BI["FC"]
    BJ["Input 18: Pre AEC"] --> BK["FC"]
    BL["Input 19: Pre AEC"] --> BLA["FC"]
    BM["Faster 1: Input 2, Input 3, Input 4, Input 5, Input 6, Input 7, Input 8"] --> BN["Tone RX"]
        BO["Faster 2: Non Gated"] --> BP["Faster 3: Pre AEC"]
        BQ["Faster 4: Crosspiled"] --> BR["Faster 5: Pre AEC"]
        BS["Faster 6: Pre AEC"] --> BT["Faster 7: Pre AEC"]
        BU["Faster 7: Pre AEC"] --> BV["Faster 8: Pre AEC"]
        BW["Faster 8: Pre AEC"] --> BX["Faster 9: Pre AEC"]
        BY["Faster 9: Pre AEC"] --> BZ["Faster 10: Pre AEC"]
        CA["Faster 10: Pre AEC"] --> CB["Faster 11: Pre AEC"]
        CC["Faster 11: Pre AEC"] --> CD["Faster 12: Pre AEC"]
        DE["Faster 12: Pre AEC"] --> DF["Faster 13: Pre AEC"]
        DG["Faster 13: Pre AEC"] --> DH["Faster 14: Pre AEC"]
        DI["Faster 14: Pre AEC"] --> DJ["Faster 15: Pre AEC"]
        DK["Faster 15: Pre AEC"] --> DL["Faster 16: Pre AEC"]
        DN["Faster 16: Pre AEC"] --> DE
        DO["Faster 16: Pre AEC"] --> DP["Faster 17: Pre AEC"]
        DPF["Faster 17: Pre AEC"] --> DR["Faster 18: Pre AEC"]
        DS["Faster 18: Pre AEC"] --> DT["Faster 19: Pre AEC"]
        DU["Faster 19: Pre AEC"] --> DV["Faster 20: Pre AEC"]
        DW["Faster 20: Pre AEC"] --> DX["Faster 21: Pre AEC"]
        DXF["Faster 21: Pre AEC"] --> DBF["Faster 22: Pre AEC"]
        DBF --> DCF["Faster 23: Pre AEC"]
        DD["Faster 23: Pre AEC"] --> DE
        DEF["Faster 24: Pre AEC"] --> DEF["Faster 25: Pre AEC"]
        DEG["Faster 25: Pre AEC"] --> DEH["Faster 26: Pre AEC"]
        DEI["Faster 26: Pre AEC"] --> DEJ["Faster 27: Pre AEC"]
        DEK["Faster 27: Pre AEC"] --> DEL["Faster 28: Pre AEC"]
        DEM["Faster 28: Pre AEC"] --> DEN["Faster 29: Pre AEC"]
        DEO["Faster 29: Pre AEC"] --> DEP["Faster 30: Pre AEC"]
        DEQ["Faster 30: Pre AEC"] --> DER["Faster 31: Pre AEC"]
        DES["Faster 31: Pre AEC"] --> DET["Faster 32: Pre AEC"]
        DEU["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEU
        DEV["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEV
        DEW["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEW
        DEX["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEX
        DEY["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEY
        DEZ["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEZ
        DEYF["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEYF
        DEYG["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEYG
        DEYZ["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEYZ
        DEYZF["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEYZF
        DEYZG["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEYZG
        DEYZH["Faster 32: Pre AEC"] --> DEYZH
        DEYZI["GAIN -30/66 dB"] --> DZE["GAIN -66 dB"]
    end

    style Input_1 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Output_1 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

This display is identical to that shown on the Channel tab when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane.

You can change the label (name) of the channel in the label entry box. You can also change channel configuration settings. For example, for an output channel you can toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off, toggle the Mute button, and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel.

NOTE: Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel. For example, changing the label (name) from "Output 1" to "Ceiling Speakers" changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane, and everywhere else the label appears in Console.

Creating Channel Objects

One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created. After configuring a fader channel using the Channel tab as described in this topic, you can save it into the Database, and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks.

To save a fader channel configuration, right click in the fader section of the screen (surrounded by an orange rectangle). From the menu that appears, select Export Object as shown below.

NOTE: You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option. Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes.

Enter an appropriate Label (name) in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below.

Export Object Export Fader 1 as Fader Channel Export Cancel

Click Export to save the configuration to the database, or Cancel to return to the Channel screen.

Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below.

Objects Mic Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Fader Fader Channel

For more information on using AV devices and channel objects, see the following topics:

AV Devices•

Creating AV Devices•

Channel Objects•

Database Tab·

Drag & Drop Configuration

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Channel Tab Overview

Filters•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings•

Output Settings•

Processing Settings•

Fader Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Drag & Drop Configuration

MATRIX TAB

The Matrix Tab is used to route audio to one or more destinations (outputs, expansion bus, processing, or fader channels) and to create cross points between channels.

Accessing the Matrix

To access the matrix, select the Matrix Tab from the Tab Bar in Console.

Converg Console 880ta1.cwg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Current Unit (R) Converge880TA80 Site View: Tree View (HK) Converge880TA80 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco RX Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power Amp 1 Power Amp 2 Power Amp 3 Power Amp 4 Teles TX To Exp O To Exp P To Exp Q To Exp R To Exp S To Exp T To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Sites: Unit: Converge880TA80 (Device ID 0) Clear Matrix Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power Amp 1 Power Amp 2 Power Amp 3 Power Amp 4 Teles TX To Exp O To Exp P To Exp Q To Exp R To Exp S To Exp T To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W TOexp A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Objects Matrix

The matrix appears with the current routing configuration displayed for all channels. The functionality of the matrix screen is described in the following sections.

Routing Legend

The routing legend shows the status of cross points using colored cells that mark the intersection or cross point of the routing from input to output. The color of the cross point cell identifies the input type:

• Yellow = gated mic input
• Blue = non-gated mic input
- Brown = pre-AEC
- Green = cross point

NOTE: The current audio level to the nearest dB is shown in cross point cells.

Black cell are restricted routing paths which prevent Telco, E-Bus, Processing, and Fader channels from being routed back to themselves.

Clear Matrix Button

Clear Matrix

Press the Clear Matrix button to clear ALL current matrix settings. A Confirm dialog appears asking you to confirm the clear matrix operation. Use caution when using this feature because the operation cannot be undone.

Audio Routing Matrix

The numbers and letters along the top and left side of the matrix show the cross point coordinates. The Labels for each channel are also shown to make them easy to identify. As you move the cursor over the matrix, the labels for the channels are highlighted in white for each cross point.

NOTE: Clicking on a channel label opens the Channel screen for that channel, allowing you to modify the channel label and change channel configuration settings as needed.

Input Routing

To route an input to an output, click in the routing matrix at the intersection between the input and the output. A mic input can be designated as gated (yellow), non-gated (blue), or pre-AEC (brown) by clicking repeatedly in the cross point. All other input cross points will be colored green.

Expansion Bus I-Z Routing

Audio from any unit on the E-bus network can be placed on the bus or taken off the bus and routed to any destination within the unit.

All models have 18 digital mix-minus buses:

- S-Z Buses: These eight audio buses are line input mixer buses. They are used to route auxiliary audio, such as from a CD player or VCR, to and from other units on the network. These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required.

- I-R Buses: These ten audio buses are generally used for routing microphone audio between Converge/Converge Pro devices. Information about the number of gated microphones (NOM count) and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses. By default, all microphones are routed to the O bus.

Process A-D (840T) and Process A-H (880, 880T, 880TA, 8i, SR 1212, SR 1212A) Routing

There are four processing channels on the Converge Pro 840T, eight on the 880, 880T, 880TA, 8i, and eight on

the Converge SR 1212 and SR 1212A. Processing channels enable you to apply filters, compression, delay, and other processing settings to an input or a group of inputs, which can then be routed to a single output or group of outputs.

Cross Point Shortcut Menu

In addition to setting levels, the Cross Point Shortcut Menu (shown below) enables you to copy and paste the configuration of the current cross point to other cross points. To access the shortcut menu, right-click anywhere in the Center Pane of the Matrix screen.

Cross Point Enter Copy Cell Ctrl+C Paste Cell Ctrl+V Copy Matrix Ctrl+G Paste Matrix Ctrl+P Clear Matrix Export as object

Cross Point Level Control

To adjust the level for a cross point, right-click on the cross point and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu. The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears. Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain/attenuation level in dB. The range is from -60 to 12dB in .5dB increments. The default is 0dB.

-12 6 0 -6 -12 -18 -24 -30 -36 -42 -48 -54 -60

NOTE: Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider.

The level you select now appears numerically in the cross point box within the matrix.

Copy and Paste Cells

You can copy a single cell or the entire matrix using the shortcut menu options.

To copy a cross point to multiple cross points, press to copy, then press while holding down the left-mouse button and clicking on the cross points to which you want to copy the settings.

Copy and Paste Matrix

To copy the entire matrix, use the shortcut menu commands; or press to copy the matrix, select the unit you want to copy the matrix to in the Site View Tab, and press to paste the matrix into the matrix screen for the selected unit.

Clear Matrix

Press the Clear Matrix button to clear all current matrix settings. A Confirm dialog appears asking you to confirm the operation. Use this option with caution because the operation cannot be undone.

Exporting Matrix Objects

Matrix objects allow you to save customized matrix configurations into the Database and reuse them. This enables you to instantly re-configure the entire matrix to accommodate changes in conferencing or venue configuration requirements, and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration.

To capture the current matrix configuration and save it as a matrix object, right click anywhere in the center pane of the matrix screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu.

To apply a matrix object, drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the matrix in the Matrix Tab screen.

For more information on using AV devices and objects, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Controls and Connections•

Channel Tab Overview•

Expansion Bus Overview

NOM•

Mic Gating•

Filters•

Processing•

Database Tab•

Drag & Drop Configuration•

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings

Telco/VoIP Rx Settings •

Output Settings•

Telco/VoIP Tx Settings •

- Fader Settings

AEC REFERENCE/PA ADAPT REFERENCE TAB

The AEC Reference (880, 880T, 880TA, 840T, 8i, TH20, VH20)/PA Adapt Reference (SR 1212, SR 1212A) Tab allows you to establish reference sources for Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) and PA Adaptation. AEC uses reference signals as the basis for acoustic echo cancellation. An AEC reference is a digital sample of the receive audio signal that is used by the AEC filter model for adaptation and convergence. A PA Adapt Reference allows you to specify an output as the ambient reference to prevent an audio signal from gating on microphones (without interfering with speech from conference participants).

You can use both unit and expansion bus audio sources as AEC and PA Adapt references for the Mic Inputs connected to a unit. In addition, you can define virtual reference sources that combine multiple audio signals into a single AEC/PA Adapt reference source. Virtual references improve AEC performance in stereo speaker and combined audio/video conferencing applications.

Accessing AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference

To access AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference, select the unit that you want to define references for in the Tree View Tab of the Site Pane, then select the AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference Tab from the Tab Bar in Console.

Converge Console - Untitled-1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Site1 Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View | Tree View | (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 2023 Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database AEC References Input 1 PowerAmp 4 Input 2 PowerAmp 4 Input 3 PowerAmp 4 Input 4 PowerAmp 4 Input 5 PowerAmp 4 Input 6 PowerAmp 4 Input 7 PowerAmp 4 Input 8 PowerAmp 4 Output Gain Tracking Virtual Ref. 1 None Virtual Ref. 2 None Virtual Ref. 3 None Virtual Ref. 4 None Gated Non Gated Pre AEC Crosspoint PA Vt Ref 1 PA Vt Ref 2 PA Vt Ref 3 PA Vt Ref 4 Virtual Ref. 1 Virtual Ref. 2 Virtual Ref. 3 Virtual Ref. 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco TX Telco Exp O Telco Exp P Telco Exp Q Telco Exp R Telco Exp S Telco Exp T Telco RX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M Expansion Ref 1 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 2 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 3 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 4 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 5 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 6 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 7 Clear Unit Output Expansion Ref 8 Clear Unit Output

The AEC/PA Adapt Reference screen appears in the center pane of Console. AEC/PA Adapt reference configuration is explained in the following sections.

AEC/PA Adapt References Sources

AEC References Input 1 Ebus Ref. 1 Input 2 Output 1 Input 3 Virtual Ref. 1 Input 4 Speaker

PA Adapt Reference Input 1 Output 12 Input 2 Output 12 Input 3 Output 12 Input 4 Output 12

Use the drop-down lists to select an AEC/PA Adapt reference for each input channel as required for your application. As shown above, you can select any of the following as a reference source in the AEC/PA Adapt References section of the screen:

Output channels (880, 880T, 880TA, 840T, TH20, SR 1212, SR 1212A)

Expansion bus channels•

Speaker outputs (880T, 880TA, 840T only)

Virtual references (880, 880T, 840T, TH20, VH20, SR 1212, SR 1212A)

Virtual AEC/PA Adapt References

Virtual AEC/PA Adapt References allow you to combine multiple audio sources for applications where there are two speakers (left and right) providing audio, combined audio/video conferencing, and audio/video teleconferencing. In these and other multiple output applications, using virtual AEC/PA Adapt references improves AEC performance.

Output Gain Tracking Virtual Ref. 1 Output 7 Virtual Ref. 2 Output 8 Virtual Ref. 3 None Virtual Ref. 4 None

AEC requires a physical output reference to track output gain changes. Therefore when using virtual AEC/PA Adapt references, you must use output gain tracking to provide level information to the AEC process. Use the Output Gain Tracking section of the screen (shown above) to specify the level source for each virtual reference that you define.

Virtual AEC/PA Adapt reference sources are defined in a special section of the Matrix (shown below, highlighted in white):

Use the white cross point area to select the outputs for each virtual reference source you want to define. In the example above, Output 7 is connected to the room amplifier. This audio includes microphones that cannot be included in the AEC reference, so Output 7 should not be used directly as the AEC reference source. Instead, use a

Virtual Reference and route any inputs that you want cancelled to that reference. This typically would include Telco/VoIP rx audio and audio from a video codec (Input 5 above), which in this example are combined to create Virtual Reference 1.

NOTE: If the channels selected for a virtual reference use Processing or Faders, you should select the processing or fader channel as the virtual reference source. This provides the AEC process with the most accurate reference for the signal, thereby providing faster convergence and more accurate AEC performance.

Expansion Bus Reference Sources

Expansion Ref 1 Unit (30) Converge840T-03 Output Output 1 Clear

Use the Expansion References (1-8) section of the screen to use audio from an expansion bus channel as the AEC/PA Adapt reference source. For each expansion reference, select the Unit and the Output you want to use as a reference using the drop-down lists.

The following types of sources are available for use as expansion AEC/PA Adapt reference sources:

Output channels• Speakers• Virtual references•

PA Virtual References

A PA Virtual Reference assigns audio from a given amp output and applies the same processing to a corresponding Amp Channel. All processing and audio information is applied to the Amp Channel. (For example, if the feedback eliminator is enabled on PA channel 2 the feedback eliminator adds a new node. That same feedback node will be added to the audio contained on PA Virtual Channel 2.)

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation)

Mic Input Settings*

Processing Settings

Fader Settings•

MACRO TAB

Macros define a series of commands which can be run using the Front Panel LCD, Serial Commands, Control Ports, Presets, the Web Portal, SNMP, and other macros.

Macros allow you to make quick configuration changes and to execute multiple Presets simultaneously. Macros can also contain commands that are executed on other units on the E-bus.

All models support up to 255 macros (with an average of 150 command lines each). In the unlikely event that you exceed Console's memory capacity, a warning appears indicating the command line at which memory is exceeded.

Accessing Macros

To access macros, press the Macro Tab on the Tab Bar in Console.

Converge Console - Board Room.cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Board Room Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Setting Control String Event Scheduler Database Current Unit (D) Converge840T-03 Site View Tree View DCI Converge840T-04 Mio Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Teico Rx Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Teico Tx Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Fader Fader 1 Fader 2 Macro Selection Macro Description 1 Clear Change Name Command Editor Command Description Argument Description No command specified Not valid. Type DID Command Macro Command List Line Number: Line Type ID Command Arg 1 Arg 2 Arg 3 Arg 4 Arg 5 Arg 6 Arg 7 Record Macros Objects 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Node: Configuration Site Data: Good Unit Data: Good Connected Skin Board Room Unit: Converge840T-03 (Device ID:0)

There are two ways to create macros in Console: the Macro Recorder, which records screen selections, and the Macro Editor, which allows you to create command lines. The Macro Editor is also used to modify macros created using the Macro Recorder.

Macro Recorder

Use the following procedure to record a macro using Macro Recorder:

1. Click the Record button at the bottom of the Macro screen. The Macro dialog appears.

1. Select the macro number from the Macro to Record drop-down list, then click Start. The Macro Record dialog appears (shown below).3.

2. In the Console, make the routing and input/output configuration changes (such as gain adjustments, mute, etc.) that you want to include in the macro.

3. Click Stop in the Macro Record dialog to end macro recording. The macro Command Editor appears with a list of the commands captured.6.

Command Editor Command Description This command selects which output or expansion bus reference is used for a Mic input as a reference for power amp Argument Description Channel 1-B for an Converge 880, Bi and 1-4 for an 840T. Ref Group: E, O, B Ref Channel: based on Ref Group and device type: E: O-Z*, O: Type DID Command Channel Ref Group Ref Chnl 1 0 REFSEL 1 B 1 #10 REFSEL 1 B.1 Add Insert Delete Replace Macro Command List Line Number: 1 Line Type ID Command Arg 1 Arg 2 Arg 3 Arg 4 Arg 5 Arg 6 Arg 7 1 3 0 NOM 1 O 0 2 3 0 MUTE 2 M 0 Record Save

Click 7. Save to save the macro.

You can use the Macro Editor to modify recorded macros as described in the next section.

Macro Editor

Creating Macros

Use the following procedure to create a macro using the Macro Editor:

1. Select the Macro number to create from the Macro drop-down list.

Macro Selection Macro 2 Clear Change Name Macro Description

NOTE: Used macros are indicated by an asterisk in the macro drop-down list.

1. Press Change Name to assign a name to the macro (optional). Enter the name into the Change Name dialog that appears.

NOTE: Macro names appear in Console macro lists and on the LCD Macro menu. Using brief descriptive names makes it easier to identify a macro's functionality.

1. Enter a description of the macro's functionality in the Macro Description entry field (optional).
2. Select the device Type, DID (Device ID number), and Command from the drop-down lists.
3. When you select a command, a description of it appears in the Command Description box. The parameters associated with the command also appear, along with the valid values or range for each parameter, in the Argument Description box (shown below).

Set the parameter values for the command as required (optional). 6.

Command Editor Command Description Set the gain for an Input, Output, Processor, Telco Rx, or Telco Tx. Argument Description ChannelGroup: F - Faders; I - Inputs; L - Line Inputs; M - Microphone Inputs; O - Outputs; P - Processing; R - Telco Rx; T - Telco Tx Type DID Command Channel Group Rate Target 1 0 RAMP 1 F -50 501 #10 RAMP 1 F -50 -20.0

1. Click Add to add the command to the end of the macro, or Insert to insert the command before the currently selected row of the macro. The command appears in the Macro Command List.

Macro Command List Line Number: 1 Line Type ID Command Arg 1 Arg 2 Arg 3 Arg 4 Arg 5 Arg 6 Arg 7 1 1 0 RAMP 1 F -3 -20 Record Save As Save

NOTE: When there are multiple commands in the Macro Command List, you can drag and drop them to change their execution order.

You can now add another command (repeat steps 4 through 6), or click Save or Save As to save the completed macro.

Modifying Macros

Use the following procedure to edit a macro:

1. Select the Macro number to modify from the Macro drop-down list.
2. Click Change Name to change the macro name (optional).
3. Double-click the command line in the Macro Command List you want to edit. Modify the command or its arguments by selecting options from the drop-down lists.4.
4. Click Replace to overwrite the old command line with the new changes.
5. Click Insert to insert a new command, or Delete to delete the currently highlighted command.
6. When you are finished making changes, click Save or Save As to save the macro.

Deleting Macros

Use the following procedure to delete a macro:

1. Click Clear Macro to delete the entire macro.
2. Click Delete to delete the selected command line.

Adding and Inserting Command Lines

Use the following procedure to add or insert command lines into the currently selected macro:

1. Click Add to place the current command line into the next available row in the command line table.
2. Click Insert to insert the current command line into the row directly above the currently selected command line in the table.
3. When you are finished making changes, click Save or Save As to save the macro.

Running Macros

Running Macros Using Console

Use the following procedure to run a Macro from Console:

1. Select the Macro tab from the Console main screen or press the Run Macro button on the button bar (only available when Console is in Configuration mode).
2. Select the macro from the Select Macro list.
3. Click Run to run the macro and close the window.

Running Macros Using the Front Panel

Use the following procedure to run a macro from the front panel:

1. Using the Menu Dial, select the Macros Menu.
2. Select the macro you want to run from list and press the Select button.
3. Answer Yes when prompted to run the macro, or No to cancel.

Running Macros Using Control Devices

Refer to the Control Tab topic for information on running macros using control devices.

Exporting Macro Objects

Macro Objects allow you to save macros into the Database and reuse them. To capture a macro and save it as an object, right click anywhere in the center pane of the macro screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu.

For more information about objects, see Creating Channel Objects, Matrix Objects, Control Objects, and Drag & Drop Configuration.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

• Controls and Connections
- Expansion Bus Overview
- Device IDs
• LCD Programming Overview
- LCD Macros Menu
- Presets
- Configuration Mode
- Control Tab
- Database
- Channel Objects
- Matrix Objects
- Control Objects
- Drag & Drop Configuration

GATING TAB

The Gating tab allows you to create gating groups and assign mic inputs to gating groups.

Gating group assignments combine individual channel gating configurations created using the Channel Properties Configuration screen. When inputs are assigned to a gating group, the gating information from the assigned inputs is used to control how the entire mixer behaves.

The Converge/Converge Pro product family (excluding the TH20/VH20) features four internal gating groups (Internal 1–4), and six global gating groups across the expansion bus (Global A–F). Mic inputs are assigned to Global Group A by default. If an input is not assigned to a gating group, that mic's gating properties are independent, and they have no effect on any gating group. When gating groups span two or more units (global gating groups), the settings must be the same for each unit attached to the global gating group.

NOTE: Mic inputs can be assigned to one and only one Gating Group at a time.

Accessing Gating Groups

To access gating groups, click the Gating Tab on the Tab Bar in Console.

Converge Console - 8801a1.cwg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix ABC Reference Macro Oating Control String Event Scheduler Database Current Unit (RH) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (RH) Converge880TA00 Focal 5 Gating Controllers None Internal Global 1 2 3 4 A B C D E F Input 1 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 2 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 3 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 4 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 5 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 6 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 7 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Input 8 Configure ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Internal Gating Groups Group Name Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 First Mic Priority ✓ ✓ Max # Mics 4 4 4 Last Mic Mode Off Off Off Global Gating Groups Group Name Group A Group B Group C Group D Group E Group F First Mic Priority ✓ ✓ Max # Mics 4 4 4 4 4 Last Mic Mode Off Off Off Off Off Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Sites Unit: Converge880TA00 (Device ID 0)

Gating configurations are shown in the Center Pane. The following sections describe how to configure gating groups.

Gating Controllers

Gating Controllers Input 1 Configure Input 2 Configure Input 3 Configure Input 4 Configure Input 5 Configure None Interval Global 1 2 3 4 A B C D E F

Use the Gating Controllers section of the screen to assign Mic Inputs to a gating group. Use Internal gating

groups (radio buttons 1-4) to control mic inputs connected to the unit currently selected in the Site Pane. Use Global gating groups (radio buttons A-F) to control mic inputs connected to the current unit, as well as all units connected to the E-Bus.

Press the Configure button to display and modify individual channel Gating configurations using the Channel Properties Configuration screen.

Internal Gating Groups

Internal Gating Groups Group Name Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 First Mic Priority ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max # Mics 4 4 4 4 Last Mic Mode Off Off Off Off

Internal gating groups control mic inputs connected to a specific unit. Configure Internal Gating Group settings as follows:

- Enter a name in the Group Name field (optional).

- Select the First Mic Priority checkbox to enable this feature (default), or deselect it to turn First Mic Priority off.

NOTE: ClearOne recommends using First Mic Priority to maintain maximum audio intelligibility by allowing only one mic to gate on to a participant's voice. First Mic Priority allows more than one microphone to gate on at same time, but it restricts more than one mic from gating on to the same audio source. It does this by determining the audio level received by all mics when the first mic is gated on, and then using this audio level as the ambient level for the gating group. If First Mic Priority is disabled, two or more microphones will usually gate on when only one person speaks.

- Select the Max # of Mics from the drop-down list (the default is 4). This sets the maximum number of microphones that can be gated on at any one time within a gating group. The maximum number of mics is limited to the number of mics included in the gating group. For internal gating groups, the maximum number of mics is 8 for Converge Pro 880, 880T, 880TA 8i, Converge SR 1212 and SR 1212A units, and 4 for Converge Pro 840T units.

- Select the Last Mic Mode from the drop-down list (the default is off). Last On leaves the last mic activated gated on until another mic gates on. The Input options allow you to select which mic remains on when all other mics gate off. Off gates all mics off when no audio is present. All allows all mics to gate on at the same time.

Global Gating Groups

Global Trading Groups Group Name Group A Group B Group C Group D Group E Group F First Mc Priority ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max # Mcs 4 4 4 4 4 4 Last Mc Mode Off Off Off Off Off Off Off

Global gating groups control mic inputs connected to all units linked together through the Expansion Bus. Configure Global Gating Group settings as follows:

- Enter a name in the Group Name field (optional).

- Select the First Mic Priority checkbox to enable this feature (default), or deselect it to turn First Mic Priority off.

NOTE: ClearOne recommends using First Mic Priority to maintain maximum audio intelligibility by allowing only one mic to gate on to a participant's voice. First Mic Priority allows more

than one microphone to gate on at same time, but it restricts more than one mic from gating on to the same audio source. It does this by determining the audio level received by all mics when the first mic is gated on, and then using this audio level as the ambient level for the gating group. If First Mic Priority is disabled, two or more microphones will usually gate on when only one person speaks.

• Select the Max # of Mics from the drop-down list (the default is 4). This sets the maximum number of microphones that can be gated on at any one time within a gating group. Again, the maximum number of mics is limited to the number of mics included in the gating group. For global gating groups, the maximum number of mics is eight, up to a maximum of 96 microphones in E-bus linked systems.
• Select the Last Mic Mode from the drop-down list (the default is off). Last On leaves the last mic activated gated on until another mic gates on. The Input options allow you to select which mic remains on when all other mics gate off. Off gates all mics off when no audio is present.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Mic Input Settings•

Channel Tab Overview•

Mic Gating•

Expansion Bus Overview•

CONTROL TAB

The Control Tab allows you to configure pin assignments for the user-definable pins on Control/Status Port A and Control/Status Port B.

All models implement control/status using DB-25 pin ports on the back panel, and GPIO (General Purpose Input Output) with active low/pull to ground inputs and open collector outputs. For details, refer to Appendix B and the Control/Status Ports section of Appendix D: Specifications.

The control ports enable external devices to access the Converge/Converge Pro serial command set, including common functions such as volume control, muting, room combining, and preset changes. All devices connected via the E-bus can be controlled from a single control/status port on any of the devices.

Accessing the Control Tab

To access command control, press the Control Tab on the Tab Bar in Console.

Convergo Console - Board Room.cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Board Room Unit Channel Metric AEC Reference Macros Coding Control String Event Schedule Database Current Inlet (30) Convergo401-01 Site View Tree View Control / Status Pin Select Control / Status A 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Control Port: A Selected Pin: 1 Control Pin Control Pin State Active (Low) Command: Inactive (High) Command: Command Editor Command Description Argument Description No command specified Not valid. Type ID Command: 3 0 Apply Clear Mode: Configuration Site Data: Good Unit Data: Good Connected Site Board Room Unit: Convergo401-03 (Device ID: C)

The Control tab of the Console main screen shows a graphical representation of Control/Status Port A. The pins numbered in blue are user-definable command pins; the pins numbered in green are status pins. Control interface functionality and pin programming are explained in the following sections.

User-Definable Pins

The user-definable pins provide control via contact closure, and status via open collector functions in the unit. There are two user-definable pins on the B port of every unit. The number of user-definable pins on the A port varies by model, as summarized in the following table:

Model User-Definable PinsControl/Status Port A	User-Definable PinsControl/Status Port B
880 16 2
880T 16 2
880TA 16 2
840T 20 2
8i 16 2
TH20 24 2
VH20 24 2
SR 1212 16 2
SR 1212A 16 2

Default Pin Assignments

For default pin assignments for Control/Status ports by model, refer to Appendix B.

Control/Status Ports

Control/Status A and B ports are female DB25 connectors used for General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) interactions between Converge/Converge Pro devices and external control devices such as wall switches and push-to-talk microphones. Control programming enables external control devices and controller software to access the Converge/Converge Pro serial command set, including common functions such as volume control, muting, room combining, and running presets.

For more information on Control/Status Port A and B and other physical connections, see Controls and Connections.

Control/Status Pin Programming

Use the following procedure to program user-definable pins:

1. In the Control/Status Pin Select section of the screen, select port A or B from the Control Port drop-down list.

Control / Status Pin Select Control / Status A 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 Control Port: A Selected Pin: 1 Control Pin

1. Select the pin you want to configure from the Selected Pin drop-down list. (Pin 1 is selected by default for Control Port A and Pin 21 is selected by default for Control Port B.)

Control Pin State Active (Low) Command Inactive (High) Command

1. In the Control Pin State section of the screen, press the Active (Low) Command or Inactive (High) Command button to select the pin state that you want to associate a command with.

Command Editor Command Description Set the Mute for an Input, Output, Processor, Telco Rx, or Telco Tx. Argument Description ChannelGroup: F - Faders; I - Inputs; L - Line Inputs; M - Microphone Inputs; O - Outputs; P - Processing; R - Telco Rx; T - Telco Tx Mute mode: 0 - Off; 1 - On; 2 - Toggle Type DID Command Channel Group Mode MUTE 1 R 0 Apply Clear

1. In the Command Editor section of the screen, select the device Type, DID, and Command from the drop-down lists. When you select a command, its description appears in the Command Description box. The parameters associated with the command appear next to the Command drop-down list, and the valid values or range for each parameter appear in the Argument Description box.

Control Pin State Active (Low) Command #..MUTE 1 R 1 Inactive (High) Command #..MUTE 1 R 0

1. Set parameter values for the command as required, then press the Apply button. The command appears in the selected Active/Inactive Command text box.
2. To complete programming for the selected pin, repeat steps 3 through 6 to set the Active Command for the opposite pin state.

Repeal steps 1 through 6 to program additional pins.7.

Clearing Pin Programming

To clear programming for a pin, select the Control Port and Selected Pin using the drop-down lists, select the pin state using the Active Command buttons, then press the Clear button. To clear all pins, right-click and select Clear All from the shortcut menu.

Exporting Control Objects

You can save control port objects into the Converge/Converge Pro database. To capture the currently displayed control pin programming, right click in the Control/Status Pin Select portion of the of the Control Tab screen, and select Export as object from the shortcut menu. After saving the control port object, it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console.

For more information about objects, see Creating Channel Objects, Matrix Objects, Macro Objects, and Drag & Drop Configuration.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Expansion Bus•

Controls and Connections•

Device IDs (DIDs)

String Tab·

STRING TAB

The String Tab enables you to create up to eight command strings that allow Converge/Converge Pro units to control external devices such as lighting, projectors, and room dividers. Command strings are written using the syntax of the external device being controlled. Converge/Converge Pro devices pass command strings to external devices through the RS-232 port.

Accessing the String Tab

To create command strings, press the String tab on the Tab Bar in Console.

Converge Console - Board Room.cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Board Room Current Unit (36) Converge4017-03 Site View Tree View (36) Converge4017-04 Mio: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco Rx Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco Tx Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Fader Fader 1 Fader 2 Command 0 Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4 Command 5 Command 6 Command 7 Model: Configuration Sites Data: Good Unit Data: Good Connected Sites Board Room Units: Converge4017-03 (Device ID: 0)

You can create up to eight serial command strings (limit 80 characters each) on the String screen. The following sections explain how to create and run command strings.

Command String Special Characters

The following character combinations provide basic functionality in Command String syntax:

\a• = alert
\b• = backspace
\f• = form feed
\n• = new line
\r• = carriage return
\t• = horizontal tab
\v• = vertical tab
\|\• = backslash 

Creating Command Strings

Type a command string in the Command 0 through Command 7 text boxes in the center pane of the Control Tab. Alternatively, you can copy an existing string from any source, then right-click in a Command entry box and select Paste from the shortcut menu that appears.

Running Command Strings

Console stores the commands strings created in the Control tab for subsequent execution via the STRING serial command. You can execute the STRING command in macros, using control pin programming, in the Event Scheduler, and from the Control Console page of the Web Builder tab. Using macros also enables you to execute command strings from external control devices. See the Control Tab topic for more information.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Controls and Connections•

Front Panel•

Control/Status Port•

Gating Tab·

Macro Tab•

Event Scheduler•

Control Tab•

EVENT SCHEDULER TAB

The Event Scheduler allows you to schedule commands for execution at a specific time (events). Using the event scheduler, you can schedule single events or recurring events that are executed at pre-defined time intervals.

Accessing the Event Scheduler

To schedule events, press the Event Scheduler Tab on the Tab Bar in Console.

Converge Console - Site1.csv File View And Connect Models Services Help Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database ClearOne Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE$20TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE880TA-0 Mio Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx Telco RX Output Power Amp Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Command Editor Command Description Argument Description No command specified. Not valid. Type DID Command Time Scheduler Start Date / Time: 12/19/2008 Single Event Frequency: 0 Times 2:08:05 PM Event Recurrence Frequency: 0 Minutes End Date Type: 12/19/2008 2:08:05 PM Run Event Scheduled Events Event ID: 1 ID Command StartTime End Occ End Time Minutes Hours Days Weeks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: Skew Unit: CONVERGE880TA-0 (Device ID)

Scheduling Events

Events must be scheduled and run on the local device. However, commands can be sent from events to other devices in the site using Macros.

Use the following procedure to schedule events:

1. In the Command Editor section of the screen, select command from the Command drop-down list. The command description appears in the Command Description box, parameters appear next to the Command drop-down list, and the valid values for each parameter appear in the Argument Description box.

Command Editor Command Description This command selects reports the state of the safety mate Argument Description Value: 0 to set the state to off, 1 to set the state to on and 2 to toggle the state Type DID Command Value OPTVMUTE 1

The commands available for event scheduling include:

MACRO• –Executes a macro

PRESET• -Executes a preset

RESET• –Resets the specified device

SFTYMUTE• -Mutes all channels on the specified unit

STRING• –Runs a command string

SYSCHECKS• –Runs system diagnostics

1. To schedule a single event, select Single Event and set the desired Start Date/Time in the Time Scheduler section of the screen.

Time Scheduler Start Date / Time 12/19/2008 2:08:05 PM Single Event Event Recurrence Report Events Minutes Duration 3 Time End Date / Time 12/19/2008 2:08:05 PM Start Date Apply Copy

1. To schedule a recurring event, select Event Recurrence; set the recurrence interval using the Recur Every fields; and select either Maximum of Times or End Date/Time to specify the number of repetitions or time period for event execution respectively.

NOTE: Clicking on the arrow button next to a date entry field in the Time Scheduler section of the screen displays a calendar for date selection.

1. Click the Apply button to schedule the event. The event appears in the Scheduled Events List.

Scheduled Events Event ID: 2 ID Command StartTime End Oc End Time Minutes Hours Days Weeks

.SFTYMUTE 0 05/01/2007 07:58:00 PM

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Clear All Events

1. Add additional events as required by repeating steps 1 through 4.

2. To clear a single event, highlight the event and press Clear. To clear all scheduled events, press the Clear All Events button. Answer Yes in the Warning dialog that appears.

NOTE: Events can also be viewed and scheduled via the Management page of the Web Portal.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Macro Tab·

Preset Mode Overview

Safety Mute•

String Tab·

System Checks•

- Web Builder

DATABASE TAB

NOTE: Objects and Devices created in Console 1.0.4 and 1.1.5 are NOT compatible with Console 2.0+ Objects and devices created with these earlier versions will need to be re-created. Databases created with the 2.0.x release are compatible with the 3.0.x release.

The Database Tab enables you to create, modify, and save AV devices, channel objects, and advanced objects. AV devices allow you to save pre-defined configurations for a particular type of device, such as a ceiling microphone. Channel objects allow you to save pre-defined configurations for a channel. Advanced objects allow you to save matrix, macro, control, and preset objects for advanced configuration and automation tasks.

Using AV devices and channel objects, you can create standardized configurations for particular room types and equipment, and quickly configure a venue. See Drag & Drop Configuration for more information.

Accessing the Database

To access the Database, select the Database Tab from the Tab Bar in Console.

Converge Console - Hoard Room.cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Board Room Current Unit (30) Converge840T-03 Site View Tree View (30) Converge840T-0 Mio Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco Rx Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco Tx Telco Tx Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Faster Faster 1 Faster 2 AV Devices Objects ReadOnly Audio T AT003CR Audio Textine Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio T AT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CR Audio TAT003CA9999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999999 AV Devices Microphone Ceiling Audio T AT003CR Crown OM-30 Crown OM-31 Tabletop Push to Talk Lectens DVD/CD Video Codec VOR Sound Card Amplifier

As shown above, there are two tabs available in the center pane: AV Devices and Objects. A corresponding tab is displayed in the Object Pane on the right side of the screen. The Database Button Bar is located at the bottom of the Center Panel. These components are described in the following sections.

NOTE: Advanced object types are not viewable in the Database Tab

Database Button Bar

The Database Button Bar (shown below) allows you to create, save, delete, export, import, upload, and download AV Devices and Objects. Buttons available change based on the device/object selected and the status of the configuration screen displayed in the center pane.

New

Save

Cancel

Delete

Report

Export

Import

Upload All Devices

Download All Devices

Click the Report button to view and print a report of all AV devices.

AV Devices

AV devices allow you to save pre-defined configurations for a particular type of device, such as a ceiling microphone. To access AV devices, expand the AV Device Tree in the AV Devices Tab in the Object Pane on the right side of Console. Click on a device in the tree to display its configuration in the center pane. For example, the default settings for a ClearOne tabletop microphone are shown below.

AV Devices Objects ReadOnly Name: ClearOne Mo. Device Type: Microphone Delivery: Tablstop Manufacturer: ClearOne Audio: 210-103-181 Price: $19.00 Enable Phantom Power Gain Distance Use Course Fine 1° 3' 56 12 6' 56 15 9' 56 16 Course Gain Fine Gain -58 -20 -50 -41 -35 -28 -21 -14 -7 -65 Active Filter Type Frequency Gain Q Bandwidth 1 PEQ PEQ 300.00 4.00 0.20 5.00 18 180 16 160 14 140 12 120 10 100 8 80 6 60 4 40 2 20 0 deg -2 -30 -4 -40 -6 -60 -8 -80 -10 -100 -12 -120 -14 -140 -16 -160 -18 -180 20 50 100 300 700 2K 4K 5K 20K Hz Phase Add Filter Remove Filter Filters VCR Sound Card Anplitter AV Devices Tabletop Audio T AT847R Audio T AT851A Audio T EP961P Audio T ES947 BeyerD MPC22 BeyerD MPC8SV SW BeyerD MPC86V SW ClearOne Mo Clock Audio CS1 Clock Audio CS2 Clock Audio CS3 Crown PCC130 Share MX392C Push to Talk Audio T AT891R BeyerD MPC 67 SW Crown 48.4E Crown PCC 170 SW Share MX393C Lectern Audio T AT859GML BeyerD SHM22PFSW BeyerD SHM424-11 Clock Audio C32E Crown LM 30BA DV/DCD JVC XL-FZ588K Kenwood CD-40S Pioneer-M426 Video Codec VCR Sound Card Anplitter

NOTE: Pre-defined AV devices created by ClearOne are ReadOnly as indicated in the center pane. They cannot be modified or deleted.

Creating A New AV Device

To create a new AV device, select the type of device you want to create in the AV Devices Tree, then click the New button on the Database Button Bar. The configuration options for that type of device appear on the AV Devices Tab in the Center Pane. For example, the configuration options for a new Video Codec device are shown below.

AV Devices Objects New Name Ultra VC Device Type VCR Category Manufacturer Codec Industries Model VC-1000 Price 1000.00 Stereo Input Stereo Output Input Gain -20 Output Gain -20 -65 -65 -7.0 2.0 AV Devices Microphone Ceiling Tabletop Push to Talk Lectern DVDICO AVC XL-FZ2588K Kenwood CD-406 Pioneer.MX26 Video Codoc Aethra VegaStar Polycon VS 128 Polycon VS 4000 Polycon VS 512 Polycon VSX 7000 Polycon VSX 8000 Tandberg 3000MXP Tandberg 6000MXP Aethra AVC 8400 VCR Sony SLV-D356P Sound Card Audigy-LS Ensinoq PCI 120 Sony SLV-AF50 Amplifier

Name the new device using the Name field. Enter other information as needed, adjust the configuration controls to optimize device performance, and click the Save button to save the changes.

The new device now appears in the AV Device Tree as shown below.

AV Devices Microphone DVDICD Video Codec Aestha VegaStar Polycom VS 128 Polycom VS 4000 Polycom VS 512 Polycom VSX 7000 Polycom VSX 8000 Tandberg 3000MXP Tandberg 6000MXP Aestha AVC 8400 UltraVC VCR Sound Card Amplifier

NOTE: The AV Device Tree is also available when the Unit Tab is selected, making all pre-defined and custom AV Devices available for Drag and Drop Configuration of a venue.

Channel Objects

Channel objects allow you to save pre-defined configurations for a channel, such as an Output channel. To access objects, select the Objects tab in the center pane. The Object Tree appears in the Object Pane on the right side of the screen as shown below.

AV Devices Objects Name Category Name Objects Line Telco Rx Output Telco Tx Processing Fader New Save Cancel Delete Export Import Upload All Objects Download All Objects

Available channel object types include:

Mic Input•

Line Input•

Telco/VoIP rx•

Output·

Telco/VoIP tx•

Processing•

Fader Channels•

To create a new channel object, select an object type in the Object Tree and click the New button. Enter a name for the object in the Name field, adjust the channel configuration controls to optimize channel performance for your application, and press the Save button. The new channel object appears in the Object Tree, along with all other custom channel objects you have created, as shown below.

AV Devices Objects Name PTT Microphone Grand Line Mio FPMR Pre Gain -36 -01 -08 -09 48 dBu Gain Course -56 -50 -40 -35 -25 -21 -14 -7 -0 0.0 dB Fine 20 Post Gain -30 -30 dB -5 Post Process -20 -30 dB Post Gains -20 -30 dB PA Alast and AEC Reference Output 9 AEC NC Mina Filter AEC AFC Data New Save Cancel Delete Export Import Upload All Objects Download All Objects Mic PTT Microphone Line Podium DVD Feed Telco Rx Telco Line In Output Ceiling Speakers Telco Tx Telco Line Out Processing PEG Filter Fader +3.5 dB Fader

NOTE: The Object Tree is also available when either the Unit Tab or the Channel Tab is selected, making all custom channel objects you have defined available for Drag and Drop Configuration of a venue.

Import/Export AV Devices and Objects

All AV Devices and channel Objects are stored as .XPT files and .XMO files respectively on the host computer or network. To import or export these files, use the Import and Export buttons on the Database Button Bar. These features enable you to share device and object file definitions across sites, applications, and venues.

Upload/Download AV Devices and Objects

To upload or download ALL AV Devices or channel Objects in the database, use the Upload and Download buttons on the Database Button Bar. These features enable you to share databases among sites, applications, and venues.

Modifying AV Devices and Objects

To modify AV Devices and channel Objects, select the device or object in the Object Pane, modify the configuration settings for the device or object in the Center Pane, and click the Save button on the Database Button Bar. When you make changes to the device or object, Edit appears at the top of the Center Pane.

NOTE: Pre-defined AV devices created by ClearOne are ReadOnly as indicated in the center pane. They cannot be modified or deleted.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site Properties•

Unit Properties•

Unit Tab·

Channel Tab Overview

Line Input Settings•

Mic Input Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Output Settings

OPTIMIZING GAIN STRUCTURE

Optimizing Gain Structure maximizes the signal-to-noise ratio for each channel, optimizes the performance of processing functions, and ensures optimal audio quality.

Use these guidelines when optimizing initial gain structure for a venue:

Connect all input sources and output devices to the Converge/Converge Pro unit(s).

- Turn off all processing functions, including AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control), NC (Noise Cancellation), and Filters.

Optimize all mic and line inputs that are routed to an output before optimizing the output.

- When optimizing output channels, the objective is to match the output to the nominal gain of the input of the device that is connected to the output channel.

- In general, turn NOM off when an output channel feeds an amplifier. Turn NOM on when optimizing telco/VoIP tx channels, in sound reinforcement applications, and when optimizing for video codec configurations.

• After optimizing gain using the procedures below, re-enable processing functions and NOM as required.

Optimizing Gain for Mic Input Channels

1. Open the Channel Tab and select the Mic Input on the Tree View Tab that you want to optimize, as shown below.

Converge Cassale - 8801x1.csg File view: Add: Select: Mode Services Help ClearOne Site Selection Current Unit (EN) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (HK) Converge880TA00 Mic Input 1 Pre Gain 36 -61 Phi -58 -50 -41 -35 -28 -21 -14 -7 -0 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64 dB 64dB Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 5 Output 60000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

1. Have somebody repeat a test count at a normal distance from the microphone (generally this would be seated at the conference table or positioned for a video teleconference).
2. Adjust the Coarse Gain Slider until the peaks on the Post Gain Meter are close to +6dB (just hitting yellow), and the average level is close to 0dB.
3. Adjust the Fine Gain Slider until the peaks on the Post Gain Meter are as close to +6dB and the average level is as close to 0dB as possible.
4. Repeat the above steps for each mic input in the venue.

NOTE: The Post Gain Meter is a peak meter. If the meter remains green, the level may be too low. If it peaks into red, clipping occurs.

Optimizing Gain for Line Input Channels

Line inputs are optimized using the same procedure as mic inputs, with the following exceptions. Select the Line Input you want to optimize on the Tree View Tab. With the line source connected, monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level.

NOTE: Line sources, including video codecs, consumer grade CD players, DVD players and VCRs, commonly require 10-12 dB of gain to bring their levels up to 0 dBu.

Optimizing Gain for Telco/VoIP rx Channels

Optimize telco/VoIP rx inputs using the same procedure as mic inputs, with the following exceptions. Select Telco/VoIP rx on the Tree View Tab. With someone talking on the phone, monitor the Post-Gain Meter and adjust the gain level.

Optimizing Gain for Telco/VoIP tx Channels

Optimize telco/VoIP tx outputs using the same procedure as output channels, with the following exceptions. Select Telco/VoIP tx on the Tree View Tab. With someone speaking into the microphones routed to the telco/VoIP tx, monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level.

NOTE: Use a standard handset on the far end because levels can be unpredictable from speaker phones and amplified headsets.

Optimizing Gain for Output Channels

1. Open the Channel Tab and select the Output Channel on the Tree View Tab that you want to optimize, as shown below.

Converge Console - 880ta1.cng File View Edit Connect Window Services Help Site Selection Currest Unit (HR) Converge880TA00 Site View Tree View (HD) Converge880TA00 Mio Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Line Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Power Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco Tx Telco TX Processing Process A Process B Process C Process D Unit Channel Mabri AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Global Non Global Pre AEC Corporal Output 1 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco Rx Front Exp P Q K L S T F G H I J K L M N O U V V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O U V V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O U V V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O U V V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O U V V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L M N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W X Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XY Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XY Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XY Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XY Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XYZ Y Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XYZ Y Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XYZ Y Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N O UV V W XYZ Y Z Y Z V D V E V F F G H I J K L m N o UV v w x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y z y szn n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa acaa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa caa cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cca cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cga cgg tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tCC tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tcc tss s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s.s e: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: u: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: i: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: ii: Output 1 Output 1 HOMA Mpa Gee 0.2 d9 Output Level: 30 30 30

1. Optimize the gain level for all mic, line, and telco/VoIP rx inputs routed to the selected output channel.
2. Adjust the Gain Slider until the average level on the Gain Meter matches the nominal level of the next

device in the chain.

1. Repeat the above steps for each output channel in the system.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Configuration Mode Overview•

Mic Input Settings

Line Input Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Output Settings

AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) •

AGC/ALC (Automatic Gain Control/Automatic Level Control)

NC (Noise Cancellation)

Filters•

DRAG AND DROP CONFIGURATION

NOTE: Objects and Devices created in Console 1.0.4 and 1.1.5 are NOT compatible with Console 2.0+ Objects and devices created with these earlier versions will need to be re-created.

Console provides powerful Drag and Drop Configuration capabilities that allow you to quickly configure Converge/Converge Pro devices and perform advanced system configuration tasks.

The types of objects available in Console for drag and drop configuration include:

AV Devices
Channel Objects
Matrix Objects
Control Objects
Macro Objects
Preset Objects 

Accessing Drag and Drop Configuration

To select objects for drag and drop configuration, use the Objects Pane on the right side of Console. The objects available in the objects pane vary depending on the tab selected on the Console Tab Bar. For example, when the Unit Tab is selected, both AV devices and channel objects are available as shown below.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ClearOne Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View | Tree View | (60) CONVERGE80TA-0 8801 Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MTC/Live Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AOC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Gain Mate NC Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 To Exp O To Exp P To Exp Q To Exp R To Exp S To Exp T To Exp U To Exp V To Exp W To Exp X To Exp Y To Exp Z To Exp I To Exp J To Exp K To Exp L To Exp M To Exp N To Exp N Explain Audio RX From Exp O A From Exp P B From Exp Q C From Exp R D From Exp S E From Exp T F From Exp U G From Exp V H From Exp W I From Exp X J From Exp Y K From Exp Z L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K L K LK Process RX A B C D E F G H I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J I J IJ1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

Using Drag and Drop Configuration

Drag and drop configuration is a three step process for all object types:

Create an object1.

Store it in the Database2.

1. Drag the object from the Objects pane onto a channel or screen area (as appropriate for the object type)

The following sections describe creating and applying objects in Console.

Creating Objects

With the exception of custom AV devices, which can only be created using the Database Tab, all objects can be created by right clicking on a screen and using the shortcut menu that appears.

For example, to capture the currently displayed control pin programming as a control port object, right click in the Control/Status Pin Select portion of the of the Control Tab screen, and select Export as object from the shortcut menu (see below).

Control / Status Pin Select Control / Status A 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Export as Object Clear All Control Port: A Selected Pin: 1 Control Pin Control Pin State Active (Low) Command #30 MUTE 1 R 1 Inactive (High) Command #30 MUTE 1 R 0 Command Editor Command Description Sets the Mute for an Input, Output, Processor, Telco Rx, or Telco Tx. Argument Description ChannelGroup: F - Faders; I - Inputs; L - Line Inputs; M - Microphone Inputs; O - Outputs; P - Processing; R - Telco Rx; T - Telco Tx. Mute mode: 0 - Off, 1 - On, 2 - Toggle Type DID Command Channel Group Mode 3 0 MUTE 1 R 0 Apply Clear

The Export Object dialog appears as shown below. Assign the object a name and press Export.

Export Object Export GPIO as Mute Pin 1, Port A Export Cancel

The control object now appears in the objects pane as shown below.

The object is now available for drag and drop configuration.

AV Devices

ClearOne provides numerous pre-configured AV devices, with settings that optimize the performance of the device for a typical (baseline) room. These devices are available in the AV Devices tab of the Objects Pane as shown below. Click a device type in the AV Device Tree to show the available devices of that type.

AV Devices | Objects | Microphone Ceiling Audio T AT853R Crown CM-30 Crown CM-31 Tabletop Audio T AT847R Audio T AT851A Audio T EP961P Audio T ES947 BeyerD MPC22 BeyerD MPC65V 1 BeyerD MPC66V 1 ClearOne Mic Clock Audio CS1 Clock Audio CS2 Clock Audio CS3

To apply an AV device to a channel, drag the object onto the channel in the Unit or Channel tabs. For example, to apply a Crown PCC130 tabletop microphone to Mic/Line Input 1, select the object from the AV Devices tree and drag it onto the channel.

Unit Channel View Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ADC Input 5 -30.0dB Input 6 -30.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Expansion Audio RX From Exp. Q From Exp. P From Exp. Qr From Exp. Rr From Exp. Sr From Exp. Tc NOM Mute Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Talco TX expansion Audio TX To Exp. Q To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T AV Devices Objects Microphone Ceiling Tabletop Audio T AT847R Audio T AT851A Audio T EP961P Audio T ES947 BeyerD MPC22 BeyerD MPC65V S ClearOne Mic Clock Audio CS1 Clock Audio CS2 Clock Audio CS3 Crown PCC130 Share MX392C

A dialog prompts you for the distance of the microphone to the talker. Select a value and press OK to apply the object to the channel.

Microphone Distance Talker to Microphone Distance Distance 3 Feet OK Cancel

A microphone icon appears next to the channel, indicating that the channel is using an AV device object configuration.

Unit Channel View Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Max Gain Input 1 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Max Max AEC Input 5 -35.0dB Input 6 -35.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Max Max NC Telco RX 0.0dB Expansion Audio RX From Exp. Qy From Exp. Pz From Exp. Qy From Exp. Rz From Exp. Sr From Exp. Tz 0.0dB MKTREX NOM Male Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker NOM Male Gain Pres Telco TX Telco TX 0.0dB Expansion Audio TX To Exp. Q To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T AV Devices Objects Microphone Ceiling Tabletop Audio T AT847R Audio T AT851A Audio T EP961P Audio T ESS947 BeyerD MPC22 BeyerD MPC65V S ClearOne Mic Clock Audio CS1 Clock Audio CS2 Clock Audio CS3 Crown FCC130 Share MC392C

Click on the microphone icon to view object properties and enter a serial number in the AV Devices Properties dialog.

AV Device Properties Device Name: Crown PCC130 Device Type Microphone Manufacturer Crown Model PCC 130 Serial Number OK Cancel

To view detailed information about an AV device's configuration settings, or to create a custom AV device, use the AV Devices pane of the Database tab.

Channel Objects

In addition to using AV devices, you can drag and drop Channel Objects in the Unit Tab and the Channel Tab to instantly apply a saved configuration to a channel. You can save channel objects for all Converge channel types, including Mic Input, Line Input, Telco/VolP rx, Telco/VolP tx, Output, Processing, and Fader channels.

For example, you can configure NOM, mute, and gain settings for Output 1 on the Channel tab as shown below.

graph LR
    A["Input 1"] --> B["Input 2"]
    B --> C["Input 3"]
    C --> D["Input 4"]
    D --> E["Input 5"]
    E --> F["Input 6"]
    F --> G["Input 7"]
    G --> H["Input 8"]
    H --> I["Input 9"]
    I --> J["Input 10"]
    J --> K["Input 11"]
    K --> L["Input 12"]
    L --> M["Tribo FO"]
    M --> N["From Exp O"]
    N --> O["From Exp P"]
    O --> P["From Exp Q"]
    P --> Q["From Exp R"]
    Q --> R["From Exp S"]
    R --> S["From Exp T"]
    S --> T["From Exp U"]
    T --> U["From Exp V"]
    U --> V["From Exp W"]
    V --> W["From Exp X"]
    W --> X["From Exp Y"]
    X --> Y["From Exp Z"]
    Y --> Z["From Exp I"]
    Z --> AA["From Exp J"]
    AA --> AB["From Exp K"]
    AB --> AC["From Exp L"]
    AC --> AD["From Exp M"]
    AD --> AE["From Exp N"]
    AE --> AF["Process A"]
    AF --> AG["Process B"]

    subgraph Output 1
        B
        C
        D
        E
        F
        G
        H
        I
        J
        K
        L
        M
        N
        O
        P
        Q
        R
        S
        T
        U
        V
        W
        X
        Y
        Z
        AA
        AB
        AC
        AD
        AE
        AF
    end

    subgraph Output 2
        B
        C
        D
        E
        F
        G
        H
        I
        J
        K
        L
        M
        N
        O
        P
        Q
        R
        S
        T
        U
        V
        W
        X
        Y
        Z
        AA
        AB
        AC
        AD
        AE
        AF
    end

    sub-Panel Gains
    Gain = 20 dB
    Output Level = -30 dB

To save the object, right click anywhere in the signal flow diagram and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu. Enter a descriptive object name in the Export Object dialog, and click Export to save the object to the database.

Export Object Export Output 1 as High Gain Output Export Cancel

The object now appears in the Objects pane.

Objects Mic Line Telco Rx Output Ceiling Speakers High Gain Output Telco Tx Processing Fader

You can now drag and drop the object onto any channel of the same type to instantly apply the object's configuration settings to the channel.

NOTE: To apply the current channel settings to ALL channels of the same type without saving an object in the database, select Apply to all from the shortcut menu when right-clicking on the signal flow diagram. (Menu option not available for Telco/VolP rx or Telco/VolP tx

channels.)

To view detailed information about an AV device's configuration settings, or to create a custom AV device, use the AV Devices pane of the Database tab.

Advanced Configuration Objects

For advanced configuration tasks, Console allows you to create and apply Matrix Objects, Control Objects, Macro Objects, and Preset Objects as described in the following sections.

Matrix Objects

Matrix Objects allow you to save customized matrix configurations into the Database and reuse them. This enables you to instantly re-configure the entire matrix to accommodate changes in conferencing or venue configuration requirements, and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration.

To capture the current matrix configuration and save it as a matrix object, right click anywhere in the center pane of the matrix screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu.

To apply a matrix object, drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the matrix in the Matrix Tab screen.

Control Objects

Control Objects allow you to save control port objects into the Database. To capture the currently displayed control pin programming, right click in the Control/Status Pin Select portion of the Control Tab screen, and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu. After saving the control port object, it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console.

To apply a control object after saving it to the database, drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Control/Status Pin Select portion of the Control Tab screen.

Macro Objects

Macro Objects allow you to save macros into the Database and reuse them. To capture a macro and save it as an object, right click anywhere in the center pane of the macro screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu. After saving a macro as an object, it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console.

To use a macro object, drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Macro Command List portion of the Macro Tab screen.

Preset Objects

Preset Objects allow you to save preset configurations into the Database and reuse them. This enables you to instantly apply preset changes, and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration.

To capture the current preset and save it as an object, right click anywhere in the center pane of the preset screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu.

To apply a preset object, drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Site Pane of Console while in Console is in Preset Mode.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Database Tab•

Mic Input Settings

Line Input Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Output Settings•

Processing Settings•

Fader Settings•

Matrix Tab•

Control Tab•

Macro Tab•

Preset Mode Overview•

PRESET MODE

Preset Mode allows you to create and modify presets. To execute presets, Console must be in Configuration Mode. There are 32 presets available in Console.

Presets provide the configuration flexibility needed to meet the challenges of changing conference room requirements. These changes include audio routing, gating, muting, levels, AEC referencing, and signal processing, as well as room combining and room configuration. Presets allow you to make configuration changes instantaneously—without interrupting or affecting any conferences in progress.

This topic covers:

Preset Configuration Tabs•

Creating Presets•

Executing Presets•

Preset Execution Flags•

Preset Control Masking

Preset Storage Space Considerations•

Exporting Preset Objects•

Accessing Preset Mode

To access Preset Mode, press the Preset button on the Console Button Bar, or select Preset from the Modes menu.

Converg Console - 800x1.cwg File View Help Current Mode Settings Help ClearOne Current Site Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Status Gating Control Tools Print Summary Connection Current Unit (F9) Converge800TA00 Present Selection: 1 Gated Non Gated Pre AEC Crisppoint List to present Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerLamp 1 PowerLamp 2 PowerLamp 3 PowerLamp 4 Telco TX ToEup O ToEup P ToEup Q ToEup R ToEup S ToEup T ToEup U ToEup V ToEup W ToEup X ToEup Y ToEup Z ToEup L ToEup M ToEup N Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Telco RX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. Y From Exp. Z from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. from exp. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Expt. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exect. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exct. to Exc1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1a1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b1b2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2c2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d2d3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3e3f0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000ccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccceccfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecfeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueeaueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueaeueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeaueeauaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaauaaaaccacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacacaccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaacccaaccacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaacaatacaccaaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccaccuccaaccaaagaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaaggaagggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggtaaggttgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtgggtggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggttgggtttagtttgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatgatG

As shown above, Console displays the Matrix tab by default in Preset Mode (rather than the Unit tab that is the default in Configuration Mode). The Site Pane also changes to display the Current Site, Current Unit, Preset Selection list and the Preset Name, Description, and Preset Mask entry fields.

NOTE: Clicking a channel label in the matrix displays the Channel tab for the channel. Right-clicking anywhere in the matrix displays a shortcut menu that allows you to set a cross point, copy a cell, copy the matrix, paste a matrix, and clear the matrix.

Preset Configuration Tabs

In preset mode, the following tabs are available on the Console Tab Bar for defining preset configurations:

Unit Tab·

Channel Tab•

Matrix Tab·

AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference Tab

Gating Tab·

Control Tab•

The channels available for configuration in a preset are determined by the channels selected in the Use in preset row on the matrix tab. Rows that are not selected in the matrix are grayed out, making them unavailable for preset configuration changes. In addition, only output channels that have a cross point set in the matrix tab will be available in the preset.

When you click a check box in the Use in preset row, the row becomes active and you can change its routing, gating, AEC/PA Adapt reference, and other settings. All changes will be saved in the preset and executed when the preset is ran. Channels that are not selected remain unchanged after preset execution.

In the example above, Input 1 and Input 3 are selected for use in the preset, and routed to Output 1 with gating enabled and a cross point level adjustment of zero. Cross points are also set for Output 1 on the Process A and Fader 1 channels.

For AEC/PA Adapt reference changes in a preset, you can also select channels in the Use in preset row as shown below. (Note that only the channels selected and cross pointed in the matrix are available, and that they are selected by default.)

Creating Presets

Use the following procedure to create presets:

1. Press the Preset Mode button on the Button Bar to put Console into preset mode.

1. Select the number of the preset you want to configure in the Preset Selection list.

Current Site Board Room Current Unit (30) Converge840T-01 Preset Selection: 1 H 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1. Enter a Preset Name and Description in the entry fields (optional).

1. Select the channels you want to include in the preset using the Use in preset check boxes in the matrix.

2. Set the output channel cross points that you want to include in the preset using the matrix.

1. Configure the desired setting changes for the preset including:

2. Mic Input, Line Input, Output, Telco/VoIP rx, Telco/VoIP tx, Processing, and Fader channel settings Gating settings
   Control settings
   AEC/PA Adapt Reference settings

3. Click on the Preset Mask Control/Status B boxes to set the pin states (H = High, L = Low) required to trigger preset execution (optional). See Preset Control Masking for more information.

1. Press the Macro Selection button to execute one or more macros when the preset executes (optional).

NOTE: In most cases, macros should not be used in a preset unless you want to run a serial command. Some examples that require a macro include querying device status when a preset executes, and sending a command string to an external control device to indicate preset/room configuration status. Also, macros execute at the end of a preset after all other routing, level, and configuration changes included in the preset are completed.

1. Press the Save button to save the preset
2. Click the Exit button to exit preset mode and return to configuration mode.

The preset is now available for execution as described below.

Executing Presets

There are five ways to execute presets:

Using Console in Configuration Mode1.

Using the LCD Preset Menu on the Front Panel2.

1. Using control programming and external control devices (such as the closure contacts on a room partition) Using macros4.

Using serial commands via a Telnet session or via RS-2325.

NOTE: Presets only run on the current unit shown in the site pane. However, you can execute a preset on a unit connected to the Expansion Bus by using a macro.

Executing Presets Using Console

Select Execute Preset from the Services menu, or press the Execute Preset button on the button bar. Select the preset you want to execute from the Execute Preset dialog that appears, and press the Execute button.

Execute Preset Select Preset 1 Execute Cancel

NOTE: When executing presets in Console, the software assumes a preset execution flag value of 2, meaning that the preset executes and its execution state is set to off.

Executing Presets Using the LCD Preset Menu

Press the Select button on the front panel, use the Menu Dial to select Presets, and press the Select button.

The Preset Menu appears as shown below:

PRESET MENU 1-Combine Room 2-UnProgrammed 3-UnProgrammed 4-UnProgrammed 5-UnProgrammed 6-UnProgrammed 7-UnProgrammed

NOTE: When executing presets from the LCD Preset menu, Console assumes a preset execution flag value of 2, meaning that the preset executes and its execution state is set to off.

Use the following procedure to execute presets from the front panel LCD display:

1. Use the Menu Dial to highlight the preset you want to execute

Press the 2. Select button

1. Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected preset, or No to cancel.

Executing Presets Using Control Programming

Use the PRESET serial command in the Active (Low) Command or Inactive (High) Command fields in the Control Pin State section of the Control Tab. To execute multiple presets when a control condition is met, use the MACRO command to call a macro with multiple PRESET commands embedded, as explained in the next section.

For more information on PRESET and the complete Converge/Converge Pro serial command set, refer to Appendix A: Serial Commands.

Executing Presets Using Macros

Use the PRESET serial command to execute presets in a macro. To run multiple presets at the same time, use multiple PRESET commands in the macro. Macros can be executed from within Console or by using any external control device. Typically, you will create a macro for each room configuration (group of presets) that you want to execute at the same time.

Preset Execution Flags

Console uses user-selectable preset flags to determine the current execution state of a preset. This gives you complete control over preset execution, and allows you to combine multiple presets in a macro (or multiple macros) while ensuring that only the presets required for a given room configuration are executed when needed.

The three user-selectable execution flags are:

• 0 = do not execute the preset and set the execution state to off.
• 1 = check Preset state. If off, execute preset and set Flag to on. If on do nothing.
• 2 = ignore execution state. Execute the preset and set the execution state to off.

When an execution flag is set to on, the associated preset cannot be executed. Conversely, when it is set to off, the preset can be executed. To query the current execution flag state for a preset, use the PRESET command with the preset number and no other arguments.

Preset Control Masking

In traditional room-combining applications, one preset is created and executed for each room configuration. This can cause volume levels, mute states, and other channel configuration settings to reset for all room sections when a preset is executed. In addition, conferences in progress in unaffected room sections lose any custom settings, and the participants hear unnecessary pops and clicks.

Console eliminates these shortcomings through Preset Control Masking, which provides the following advantages:

• Automatic preset masking control when room dividers are wired to Control port B pins

Manual preset masking control via serial commands

Volume levels and mute states are reset only in sections that change

Unaffected room sections do not lose custom settings

Participants in unaffected room sections do not hear pops and clicks•

To use preset control masking, click on the Preset Mask Control/Status B boxes (located in the Site Pane while Console is in preset mode) to set the pin states (H = High, L = Low) required to trigger preset execution. You can use a pin state or combination of pin states to define when a preset will execute.

A typical use for preset masking is a room-combining application that uses automatic partitions with sensors that set the pin to high when a partition is open, and to low when a partition is closed. For example, if Pin 1 is connected to a first partition and Pin 3 is connected to a second partition, then the preset mask control/status B settings shown above would activate the preset when the first partition is open and the second partition is closed.

Preset Storage Space Considerations

In most preset configuration scenarios, it is unlikely that you would reach the storage capacity of a Converge/Converge Pro unit. In the event that you exceed the preset storage space, Console will alert you when you try to save the preset. You will be asked to reduce the number of cross point changes in the Matrix, or reduce the number of Macros in the preset. As a general rule, you make cross point changes to three-fourths of the matrix with up to two macros in a given preset; OR you can use up to 255 nested macros for a given preset.

Exporting Preset Objects

Preset objects allow you to save preset configurations into the Database and reuse them. This enables you to instantly apply preset changes, and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration.

To capture the current preset and save it as an object, right click anywhere in the center pane of the preset screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu.

To apply a preset object, drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Site Pane of Console while in Console is in Preset Mode.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Configuration Mode•

LCD Presets Menu•

Controls and Connections•

Expansion Bus Overview•

Unit Tab•

Channel Tab•

Matrix Tab•

AEC Reference/PA Adapt Reference Tab

Gating Tab•

Control Tab•

Macro Tab·

String Tab•

Database Tab•

Drag & Drop Configuration•

FILE MENU OVERVIEW

File Menu allows you to use Site Files and Print Reports.

Accessing the File Menu

In Console, select File from the menu bar. The File menu appears as shown below:

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection 880CT Current Unit (HV) CONVERGE880TA-0 Site View Tree View (HV) CONVERGE880TA-0 880T L D O P T M Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ACC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Gain Mate NC Matrix NOM Mate Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 NOR F# Comp E# Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco TX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Expansion Audio RX CLEAR To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N Del Comp Max Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: 880CT Unit: CONVERGE880TA-0 (Device ID)

The File menu appears as shown below:

File	View	Add	Connect
	New Site
	Open Site
	Close Site
	Save
	Save As
	Site Properties
	Print
	1 Board Room.cvg
	2 Site1.cvg
	3 Site1.cvg
	Exit

File menu options are explained in the following sections.

File Menu: Site Options

The File menu site options allow you to Create a New Site, open a saved site with Open Site, or close the current site with Close Site.

File Menu: Save Options

The File menu save options allow you to Save and Save As a site file.

File Menu: Print

Print allows you to create, view, print, and save Site and Unit configuration reports.

File Menu: Recent File List

The File menu recent file list displays the last four Site Files opened.

File Menu: Exit

The File menu Exit option closes Console. (To close the current Site without exiting Console, use the Close Site option.)

If you are Connected to a Site, a Confirm dialog appears when you select Exit as shown below.

Confirm Site is Connected! Close Site? Yes No

Press Yes to confirm the exit or No to return to Console. Clicking Yes brings up another Confirm dialog as shown below.

Confirm Save Changes to Site File Site1? Yes No Cancel

Click Yes to save changes to the Site File, No to exit Console without saving changes, or Cancel to abort the exit and return to Console.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site File Overview•

Print Reports

Create a New Site•

Connect To A Site•

Unit Properties•

PRINT REPORTS

The Print Reports option on the File menu allows you to print a configuration properties report for a Site or Unit.

Accessing Print Reports

To print a site or unit report, click on the File menu, select Print, then select Print Site Report or Print Unit Report as shown below.

File View Add Connect New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save As Site Properties Print 1 Board Room.cvg 2 Site1.cvg 3 Site1.cvg Exit Print Site Report Print Unit Report

The Report window appears as shown below.

Report Window

Converge Unit Report Unit Properties Unit Name Audio Number IP Address DACP Telco Counter Code Read Rate Fines Contact (OK) Converge Unit 1:03 Name ID: 101.24.111 @ U5 07900 Hardware Microphone Channels Channel Frame Time Data ACC Settings Aircraft Consoln. Automatics Gain. Oating Type Rate Hold Time Off Run Run Run Adapt Attied Made Adapt Level ACG Settings Auto Max Exposure Times Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Automable Oats. ACG Target Main Gain Threshold Exposure Time. Audio Auto Audio King Telephone Host STMF Audioio King Audioio Host Total Time Audio Answer Displacement Type Adaptor Path Level Ring Level Ring Level Level Level. Telco Rx Channels. Channel Name: Ra- Boutl Rk- Exacnd Bond Dscnd ALC Multi-Mode: ACG Auto Auto Audio Audio Radio STMF Audioio King Audioio Host Total Time Audio Answer Displacement Type Adaptor Path Level Ring Level Ring Level Level Level. Talco Rx: Talco Settings: Channel Name: Gain NCM Males: 1 Outlet 1: 0.8 @ 3: 2 Outlet 2: 0.8 @ 3: 3 Outlet 3: 0.8 @ 3: 4 Outlet 4: 0.8 @ 3: 5 Outlet 5: 0.8 @ 3: 6 Outlet 6: 0.8 @ 3: 7 Outlet 7: 0.8 @ 3: 8 Outlet 8: 0.8 @ 3: 9 Tewler: 10.8 @ 3 8/20/2007 2:23:19 PM Page 1 of 2

The report button bar provides buttons for viewing and printing the document, as well as saving the report to a PDF file. When you are finished viewing the report, click Close to close the report window and return to Console.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site Properties•

Unit Properties•

VIEW MENU OVERVIEW

The View Menu provides an alternate navigation method for viewing the screens displayed by clicking on the Console Tabs.

Accessing the View Menu

Converge Console - Site1.cny File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BBOCT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 8001 MLOPTR MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AGC input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX Process A B C D E F G H Process B C D E F G H Process C D E F G H Process D E F G H Process E F G H Process F G H Process G H G H MACRIS NOM Mate Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco RX From Exp. O to Exo Q to Exo P to Exo Q to Exo R to Exo S to Exo T to Exo U to Exo V to Exo W to Exo X to Exo Y to Exo Z to Exo I to Exo J to Exo K to Exo L to Exo M to Exo N From Exp. P to Exo Q to Exo R to Exo S to Exo T to Exo U to Exo V to Exo W to Exo X to Exo Y to Exo Z to Exo I to Exo J to Exo K to Exo L to Exo M to Exo N From Exp. Q to Exo Q to Exo R to Exo S to Exo T to Exo U to Exo V to Exo W to Exo X to Exo Y to Exo Z to Exo I to Exo J to Exo K to Exo L to Exo M to Exo N From Exp. R to Exo Q to Exo R to Exo S to Exo T to Exo U to Exo V to Exo W to Exo X to Exo Y to Exo Z to Exo I to Exo J to Exo K to Exo L to Exo M to Exo N From Exp. S to Exo Q to Exo S to Exo T to Exo U to Exo V to Exo W to Exo X to Exo Y to Exo Z to Exo I to Exo J to Exo K to Exo L to Exo M to Exo N From Exp. T to Exo Q to Exo S to Exo T to Exo U to Exo V to Exo W to Exo X to Exo Y to Exo Z to Exo I to Exo J to Exo K to Exo L to Exo M to Exo N Exploration Audio TX Del Comp Mass Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BBOCT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

In Console, click View on the menu bar. The View menu appears as shown below:

View Add Connect Modes ● Unit View Channel View Matrix View AEC Reference Builder Macro Builder Gating Builder Control Builder Command Strings Event Scheduler Database Builder

A bullet indicates the view currently displayed in Console.

View Menu Options

Options available on the View menu include:

Unit View•

Channel View•

Matrix View•

AEC Reference Builder•

Macro Builder•

Gating Builder•

Control Builder•

Command Strings•

Event Scheduler•

Database Builder•

ADD MENU

The Add Menu allows you to add units to a site using default configuration settings.

Accessing the Add Menu

Converge Console - Site1.cny File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection 880CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 880T Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ACC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Matrix NOM Mose Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 NOB Ft Comp Btr Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco TX From Exp. O To Eq P From Exp. P To Eq P From Exp. Q To Eq Q From Exp. R To Eq R From Exp. S To Eq S From Exp. T To Eq T From Exp. U To Eq U From Exp. V To Eq V From Exp. W To Eq W From Exp. X To Eq X From Exp. Y To Eq Y From Exp. Z To Eq Z From Exp. I To Eq I From Exp. J To Eq J From Exp. K To Eq K From Exp. L To Eq L From Exp. M To Eq M From Exp. N To Eq N Processing RX A Process A 0.0dB Process A Process B 0.0dB Process B Process C 0.0dB Process C Process D 0.0dB Process D Process E 0.0dB Process E Process F 0.0dB Process F Process G 0.0dB Process G Process H 0.0dB Process H AV Devices Objects Microphone DVD/CD Video Codec VCR Sound Cada Amplifier Loudspeaker Clear87A Clear87A Expansion Audio RX To Eq O To Eq P To Eq Q To Eq R To Eq S To Eq T To Eq U To Eq V To Eq W To Eq X To Eq Y To Eq Z To Eq I To Eq J To Eq K To Eq L To Eq M To Eq N Del Comp Mte Gain Pres Processing TX. Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: 880CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID) Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: 880CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

In Console, click Add on the menu bar. The Add menu appears as shown below:

Adding Units

On the Add menu, select the model you want to add to the site. The Unit Properties dialog appears as shown below:

Converge 88C Unit Properties - General Comm Info: Unit ID 00000000 MAC Address FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Device Name CONVERGES880-0 Device ID 0 Audio Master Slave Room Default Value Meter Type Channel (C) Output Post Gen 12 Front Panel Mode Front Panel Pin Unlock 0000 Versions Password Version Dictionary Version FPGA Version Host DSP Date SAT DSP Date OK Cancel

Configure the new unit's properties using the General tab. Configure the new unit's IP and serial port settings using the Comm tab. For more information on configuring unit properties, see Unit Properties.

graph TD
    A["Input 1: MiO 1"] --> B["Pre Gain -36 dBu"]
    B --> C["Gain Coarse -56 dBu"]
    C --> D["Fine -20 dBu"]
    D --> E["Post Gain -20 dBu"]
    E --> F["Post Process -20 dBu"]
    F --> G["Post Gate -20 dBu"]

    H["PPWR"] --> I["-86 dBu"]
    I --> J["-61 dBu"]
    J --> K["-66 dBu"]
    K --> L["0.0 dB"]
    L --> M["-30 dBu"]
    M --> N["-30 dBu"]

    O["PA Adapt and AEC Reference Power Amp 4"] --> P["AEC"]
    P --> Q["NC"]
    Q --> R["Mute"]
    R --> S["Filter"]
    S --> T["AGC"]
    T --> U["ALC"]
    U --> V["Gate"]

    W["Input 1: Gated"] --> X["0"]
    X --> Y["0"]
    Y --> Z["0"]
    Z --> AA["0"]
    AA --> AB["0"]

    AC["Non Gated"] --> AD[Output 1: Output 2: Output 3: Output 4: Output 5: Output 6: Output 7: Output 8: Output 9: Output 10: PowerAmp 11: PowerAmp 12: PowerAmp 13: PowerAmp 14: PowerAmp 15: PowerAmp 16: PowerAmp 17: PowerAmp 18: PowerAmp 19: PowerAmp 20: PowerAmp 21: PowerAmp 22: PowerAmp 23: PowerAmp 24: PowerAmp 25: PowerAmp 26: PowerAmp 27: PowerAmp 28: PowerAmp 29: PowerAmp 30: PowerAmp 31: PowerAmp 32: PowerAmp 33: PowerAmp 34: PowerAmp 35: PowerAmp 36: PowerAmp 37: PowerAmp 38: PowerAmp 39: PowerAmp 40: PowerAmp 41: PowerAmp 42: PowerAmp 43: PowerAmp 44: PowerAmp 45: PowerAmp 46: PowerAmp 47: PowerAmp 48: PowerAmp 49: PowerAmp 50: PowerAmp 51: PowerAmp 52: PowerAmp 53: PowerAmp 54: PowerAmp 55: PowerAmp 56: PowerAmp 57: PowerAmp 58: PowerAmp 59: PowerAmp 60: PowerAmp 61: PowerAmp 62: PowerAmp 63: PowerAmp 64: PowerAmp 65: PowerAmp 66: PowerAmp 67: PowerAmp 68: PowerAmp 69: PowerAmp 70: PowerAmp 71: PowerAmp 72: PowerAmp 73: PowerAmp 74: PowerAmp 75: PowerAmp 76: PowerAmp 77: PowerAmp 78: PowerAmp 79: PowerAmp 80: PowerAmp 81: PowerAmp 82: PowerAmp 83: PowerAmp 84: PowerAmp 85: PowerAmp 86: PowerAmp 87: PowerAmp 88: PowerAmp 89: PowerAmp 90: PowerAmp 91: PowerAmp 92: PowerAmp 93: PowerAmp 94: PowerAmp 95: PowerAmp 96: PowerAmp 97: PowerAmp 98: PowerAmp 99: PowerAmp 100: NOM (NOM)
    X --> Y
    Y --> Z
    Z --> AA
    AA --> AB
    AB --> AC
    AC --> AC
    AC --> AD
    AD --> AE
    AE --> AF
    AF --> AG
    AG --> AH
    AH --> AI
    AI --> AJ
    AJ --> AK
    AK --> AL
    AL --> AM
    AM --> AN
    AN --> AO
    AO --> AP
    AP --> AQ
    AQ --> AR
    AR --> AS
    AS --> AT
    AT --> AU
    AU --> AV
    AV --> AW
    AW --> AX
    AX --> AY
    AY --> AZ
    AZ --> BA
    BA --> BB
    BB --> BC
    BC --> BD
    BD --> BE
    BE --> BF
    BF --> BG
    BG --> BH
    BH --> BI
    BI --> BJ
    BJ --> BK
    BK --> BL
    BL --> BM
    BM --> BN
    BN --> BO
    BO --> BP
    BP --> BPB
    BPB --> BPCC
    BPCC --> BPCCB
    BPCCB --> BPCCD
    BPCCD --> BPCCE
    BPCCE --> BPCCF
    BPCCF --> BPCCG
    BPCCG --> BPCCH
    BPCCH --> BPCCI
    BPCCI --> BPCCJ
    BPCCJ --> BPCCK
    BPCCK --> BPCCL
    BPCCL --> BPCCL1
    BPCCL1 --> BPCCL2
    BPCCL2 --> BPCCL3
    BPCCL3 --> BPCCL4
    BPCCL4 --> BPCCL5
    BPCCL5 --> BPCCL6
    BPCCL6 --> BPCCL7
    BPCCL7 --> BPCCL8
    BPCCL8 --> BPCCL9
    BPCCL9 --> BPCCL10

Press OK to add the unit to the site or Cancel to return to Console. The added unit appears on the Site View tab of the Site pane, highlighted in orange as shown below:

NOTE: The Status bar at the bottom of the Console window displays the current status of the unit and the site. As shown above, site data errors and unit data errors are indicated by magenta and red LEDs respectively. Complete unit configuration with correct settings to clear the errors. When correct configuration is complete, the status LEDs will change to green. The Status bar also displays Last Macro and Last Preset.

For more information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Unit Properties

Create A New Site•

Connect To A Site•

Site Properties•

Unit Tab•

Configuration Mode Overview•

CONNECT MENU OVERVIEW

The Connect Menu enables you to connect to a site, disconnect from a site, and refresh the current display for a site. Connecting to a site allows you to control and configure the units in that site. See Site Setup Overview for more information.

Accessing the Connect Menu

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection 880CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 880CLLOPTR Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AEC Input 9 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0 0.0dB 0 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.5dB Matrix NOM Mates Gain Pres Output Output1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Output5 Output6 Output7 Output8 AMP PowerStmp 1 PowerStmp 2 PowerStmp 3 PowerStmp 4 NOM Mates Gain Pres Telco TX Telco TX From Exp. O To Exp Q From Exp. P To Exp P From Exp. Q To Exp Q From Exp. R To Exp R From Exp. S To Exp S From Exp. T To Exp T From Exp. U To Exp U From Exp. V To Exp V From Exp. W To Exp W From Exp. X To Exp X From Exp. Y To Exp Y From Exp. Z To Exp Z From Exp. I To Exp I From Exp. J To Exp J From Exp. K To Exp K From Exp. L To Exp L From Exp. M To Exp M From Exp. N To Exp N Del Come Max Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Process Rx A B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F G H Process Af A B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F G H Process Af A B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F G H Process Af A B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F G H Process Af A B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F G H Process Af A B C D E F G H Process Af B C D E F Green Box Color Filter Microphone DVD/CD Video Codec VCR Sound Card Amplifier Loudspeaker Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: 880CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

In Console, select Connect from the menu bar. The Connect menu appears as shown below:

Connect Menu Options

Connect• : Connects to a site via USB or IP.

- Disconnect: Disconnects Console from the currently connected site. (This option is not available if no site is connected.)

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site Setup Overview

Connect To A Site•

Create A New Site•

MODES MENU OVERVIEW

The Modes Menu allows you to switch Console between Configuration Mode and Preset Mode. Configuration Mode allows you to configure a wide range of advanced settings for all models. Preset Mode allows you to create presets for specific venues and apply them to instantly to a unit.

Accessing the Modes Menu

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database B80CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 MILLOPTR MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Max Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ACC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A r B C D E F G H H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X T V Z I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X T V Z I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W X T U V W x y z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z Del Come Max Gain Pres Processing TX Process A r B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W x y z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z v Microphone DVD/CD Video Codec VCR Sound Card Amplifier Loudspeaker Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: B80CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

In Console, select Modes from the menu bar. The Modes menu appears as shown below:

A bullet indicates the current mode. To switch modes, select Configuration or Preset. Console immediately reflects mode changes.

NOTE: You can also switch modes using the 📄 buttons on the Console Button Bar.

For additional information, refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Configuration Mode

Preset Mode·

Console Button Bar•

SERVICES MENU OVERVIEW

The Services Menu provides various utilities for using and managing Converge/Converge Pro units.

Accessing the Services Menu

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection 880CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 880T O L O J P T R Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ADC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Matrix NOM Mose Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 AMP PowerLamp 1 PowerLamp 2 PowerLamp 3 PowerLamp 4 Telco TX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Expansion Audio RX To Eq. O To Eq. P To Eq. Q To Eq. R To Eq. S To Eq. T To Eq. U To Eq. V To Eq. W To Eq. X To Eq. Y To Eq. Z To Eq. I To Eq. J To Eq. K To Eq. L To Eq. M To Eq. N Del Come Mte Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: 880CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

In Console, click Services on the menu bar. The Services menu appears as shown below:

Services	Help
Dialer
Phonebook
Label Editor
Device Log
Event Log
Web Builder
Firmware Loader
Debug Console
System Checks
Execute Preset
Run Macro

Service Menu Options

Options available on the Services menu include:

Dialer•

Phonebook•

Label Editor•

Device Log•

Event Log•

Firmware Loader•

DIALER

The Dialer provides a software telephone interface for teleconferencing applications.

NOTE: Dialer is only available when Console is connected to a site.

Accessing Dialer

To access the dialer, select Dialer from the Services menu; press the Dialer button on the Console Button Bar; or press the Dialer button in the Telco Rx or Telco Tx channel screens.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (10) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (10) CONVERGE80TA-0 5601 CLO D PTR Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1.0.0dB Input 2.0.0dB Input 3.0.0dB Input 4.0.0dB Input 5.0.0dB Input 6.0.0dB Input 7.0.0dB Input 8.0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate ADC Input 9.0.0dB Input 10.0.0dB Input 11.0.0dB Input 12.0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX: Process A: 0.0dB Process B: 0.0dB Process C: 0.0dB Process D: 0.0dB Process E: 0.0dB Process F: 0.0dB Process G: 0.0dB Process H: 0.0dB MACRIX Expansion Audio RX NOM Mates Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 PowerStmp 1 PowerStmp 2 PowerStmp 3 PowerStmp 4 NOM Mates Gain Pres Telco TX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N Del Come Mates Gain Pres Processing TX. Process A: 0.0dB Process B: 0.0dB Process C: 0.0dB Process D: 0.0dB Process E: 0.0dB Process F: 0.0dB Process G: 0.0dB Process H: 0.0dB

Using Dialer

When using the dialer, the date and time, number dialed, and call status are displayed in the LCD section of the dialer window.

Dialer MUTE MUTE RE_NULL 2/12/2007 1:47:17 PM [idle] PhoneBook ClearOne ON/OFF REDIAL FLASH 1 ABC DEF CLEAR 4 GHI JKL MNO 7 PQRS TUV WXYZ * 0 # PHONEBOOK Close

Placing and Ending Calls

To place a call, select a number from the Phonebook section of the dialer window, or manually enter a number, then press the ON/OFF hook button.

You can also access the Phonebook by pressing the PHONEBOOK button.

To end a call, press the ON/OFF hook button.

To redial a number, press the REDIAL button.

Using Line Features

Use the FLASH button to access telco and PBX line features.

Muting

Use the MUTE Tx and MUTE Rx buttons to mute the transmit and receive signals respectively when a call is in progress.

Renulling the Line

During conference calls, line conditions and other factors can cause divergence in the automatic Telephone Echo Cancellation (TEC) adaptation process. If side tone occurs during a conference call, press the RE_NULL button to send a short burst of white noise over the line and initiate TEC readaptation (Not supported in VoIP functionality).

NOTE: Renulling the line sends a burst of white noise that will be audible on the far end of the telephone line.

For more information, please see the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Connect To A Site•

Services Menu Overview•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Phonebook•

Telephone Echo Cancellation•

PHONEBOOK

The Phonebook allows you to store telephone numbers and make speed-dial assignments for teleconferencing applications.

Accessing Phonebook

To access the phone book, select Phonebook from the Services menu; press the Phonebook 📄 button on the Console Button Bar; or press the Phonebook button in the Dialer screen.

Dialer MUTE MUTE RE_NULL 2/12/2007 1:47:17 PM [idle] 1 ABC DEF CLEAR ClearOne 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO ON/OFF REDIAL 7 8 9 FLASH * 0 # PHONEBOOK PHONEBOOK Close

Using Phonebook

To add an entry to the phonebook, press the New Entry button; enter a Name and Number; and select a Speed Dial Number (optional).

Phonebook Edit Speed Dial Name Number 1 Bob Evans 8005551212 Name: Speed Dial No. Number: 1 New Entry Change Remove Removed phonebook entry Close

NOTE: The Number field allows numbers, #, and * only. No other characters (such as parentheses and dashes) are allowed.

Press the Add button to add the entry to the phonebook. The number now appears in the phonebook list, and in the Phonebook portion of the Dialer screen.

Phonebook Edit Speed Dial Name Number 1 Bob Evans 8005551212 2 John Andersen 8005551213 Name: Bob Evans Speed Dial No. Number: 8005551212 1 New Entry Change Remove Added phonebook entry Close

To edit an entry, select it and press the Change button. To delete an entry, select it and press the Remove button.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Dialer•

Button Bar•

Services Menu Overview•

LABEL EDITOR

The Label Editor allows you to quickly change the names (labels) assigned to units and channels. Using descriptive names makes it easier to identify units and channels for configuration and management purposes. Label changes are global, and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced.

In addition to using the label editor to rename objects, you can use the label entry fields provided throughout Console.

Accessing Label Editor

To access the label editor, select Label Editor from the Services menu, or click the Label Editor button on the Converge Button Bar.

(30) Converge840T-03 | (10) Converge880-E9 | 840T Site Name Microphones Mic 1 Mic 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 Line Inputs Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Telco RX Telco RX 1 EBus Input From EBus O From EBus P From EBus Q From EBus R From EBus S From EBus T Unit Name Line Outputs Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Telco Tx Telco Tx 1 EBus Output To EBus O To EBus P To EBus Q To EBus R To EBus S To EBus T Converge840T-F1 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker Telco Rx Telco RX 1 EBus Output

Using Label Editor

As shown above, the label editor contains one tab for each unit in the currently connected site. To modify a label, select the unit tab and click on the entry field for the object name that you wish to change. When finished, click the Ok button to save the changes and close the label editor window.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Services Menu Overview•

Mic Input Settings•

Line Input Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Output Settings•

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Processing Settings•

Fader Settings•

DEVICE LOG

The Device Log captures device events for administration, configuration, and troubleshooting purposes.

NOTE: The device log can store 256K bytes of data. Once this limit is reached, the first 128K of data is truncated and logging resumes.

Accessing Device Log

To access the device log, select Device Log from the Services menu, or click the Device Log button on the Console Button Bar.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (H) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (M) CONVERGE80TA-0 Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID) MID/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gain Input 1 P 0.0dB Input 2 P 0.0dB Input 3 P 0.0dB Input 4 P 0.0dB Input 5 P 0.0dB Input 6 P 0.0dB Input 7 P 0.0dB Input 8 P 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AEC Input 9 P 0.0dB Input 10 P 0.0dB Input 11 P 0.0dB Input 12 P 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A P Process B P Process C P Process D P Process E P Process F P Process G P Process H P 36-16 Matrix NIM Mate Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 80B FS Comp Bit Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco RX P Telco RX Q To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N Extrusion Audio TX Del Comp Mate Gain Pres Processing TX Process A P Process B P Process C P Process D P Process E P Process F P Process G P Process H

Using Device Log

In the Device Log window, select the events you want to log using the Event Selection check boxes.

Device Log Events Event Selection Reset Default Microphone Gains Telco OnOff Errors Safety Mute Processor Gains Dial Access Macro Fader Gains Call Duration System Checks Preset Telco Gains Caller ID Firmware Download Audio Clipping Power Amp. Gains Power Amp. Errors Close

Events available for logging include:

Reset• : Reports unit reset events

Errors• : Reports internal unit errors

Access: • Reports all web, Telnet, front panel, and USB access events

System Checks• : Reports the pass/fail status of System Checks

Firmware Download • : Reports firmware downloads

Default• : Reports unit default events

Safety Mute• : Reports safety mute events

Macro• : Reports Macro execution events

• Preset: Reports when Presets are run
  • Audio Clipping: Reports audio clipping events
• Telco On/Off: Reports when the telco line goes on or off hook
  • Dial: Reports dial command events including DTMF, Phonebook, Speed Dial, and Redial
• Call Duration: Reports the time between on and off hook events for all calls
• Microphone Gains: Reports microphone gain levels
• Processor Gains: Reports processor gain levels
  • Fader Gains: Reports fader gain levels
  • Telco Gains: Reports telco gain levels
  • Power Amp. Gains: Reports power amp gain levels
• Caller ID: Shows Caller ID report
  • Power Amp. Errors: Reports power amp errors

NOTE: All device events and Event Scheduler events are logged automatically.

Use the Refresh, Clear, Save, and Print buttons to refresh the log display, clear the log, save the log to a text file, and print the log.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Site Properties•

System Checks•

Firmware Loader•

Console Overview•

LCD Settings Menu•

Macro Tab•

Preset Mode Overview

Execute Presets•

Dialer•

Phonebook•

EVENT LOG

The Event Log captures Console events for administration and troubleshooting purposes. Event types captured include failed login attempts, site disconnects, unit reboots, socket time outs, internal system errors, and serial command execution errors.

Accessing Event Log

To access the event log, select Event Log from the Services menu, or click the Event Log button on the Console Button Bar.

Converge Console - Site1.cmv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View | Tree View | (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 880CT Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIG/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AOC Input 9 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Amp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 NIM Mate Gain Pres Telco TX From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A F B C D E F G H M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M N M-NM AV Devices Objects Microphone DVD/CB Video Codec VCR Sound Card Amplifier Loudspeaker Converge 880TA MACRISER Expression Audio RX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. NDel Come Mate Gain Pres Processing TX Process A F B C D E F G H HModel: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

Using Event Log

Captured events appear in the left section of the Event Log window. Event Codes and Messages appear in the right section of the window.

Event Log Time Message 3/9/2007 11:16:25 AM [ Unit 7 ] Invalid Unit Values 3/9/2007 11:20:53 AM User Initiated Disconnect 3/9/2007 11:23:07 AM Remote socket timed out. 3/14/2007 3:21:00 PM Remote Connection Closed 3/20/2007 5:00:19 PM Remote socket timed out. 3/22/2007 2:58:47 PM Remote Connection Closed 3/27/2007 11:45:34 AM User Initiated Disconnect 3/27/2007 12:23:00 PM User Initiated Disconnect 4/2/2007 1:33:39 PM Login attempt failed! 4/11/2007 1:02:42 PM Login attempt failed! 5/1/2007 3:23:21 PM [ #30 PHONEBOOKADD-1 Test ] Event Code -110 Message [ Unit 7 ] Invalid Unit Values Print Clear Ok

To print the event log, press the Print button. To clear the event log, press the Clear button and answer Yes to the confirmation dialog that appears.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Services Menu•

Event Scheduler•

WEB BUILDER

Web Builder consists of User Console and Control Console. These consoles allow you to configure a subset of call management and mixing features for access through a web portal integrated into the firmware. The web portal can be accessed over IP with Microsoft's Internet Explorer (requires IE version 5.5 or later and Sun Microsystems Java Runtime Environment version 6.0 or higher).

User Console allows you to configure basic call functions, including on/off hook, redial, volume, and mute, for up to two units. Control Console allows you to perform basic channel and mixing configuration tasks for all units.

Accessing Web Builder

To access the web builder, select Web Builder from the Services menu, or press the Web Builder button on the Console Button Bar.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection 880CT Current Unit (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View | Tree View | (H0) CONVERGE80TA-0 880CT Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AOC Input 9 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A F B C D E F G H Process B F C D E F G H Process C F B C D E F G H Process D F B C D E F G H Process E F C D E F G H Process F F B C D E F G H Process G F B C D E F G H Process H F B C D E F G H 30-12 Matrizio Converge 880TA Expansion Audio RX NIM Male Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 80B PS Comp Btr Gain Pres Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Telco TX Telco TX To Exp. O To Exp. P To Exp. Q To Exp. R To Exp. S To Exp. T To Exp. U To Exp. V To Exp. W To Exp. X To Exp. Y To Exp. Z To Exp. I To Exp. J To Exp. K To Exp. L To Exp. M To Exp. N Del Compe Mate Gain Pres Processing TX Process A F Process B C D E F G H Process C F Process D E F G H Process E F Process F C D E F G H

Configuring User Console

The User Console tab allows you to configure the web version of Dialer, a software interface that emulates the functionality of Clearone's Tabletop Controller. User Console provides six user-programmable keys as described in the following sections.

WebBuilder User Console Control Console Line 1 Line Name Command Description No command specified. Argument Description Not valid. Command Associated with Function 'Telco Line 1' Type DID Command Press 3 - Converge 640T 0 Command: Release 3 - Converge 640T 0 Active State 3 - Converge 640T 0 Status: Type Diff Command Inactive State 3 - Converge 640T 0 PhoneBook ClearOne GAR JXL MNO PORS TUV WXYZ 0 # DOWN UP ROUTE VOLUME Flash

Select the key you want to program from the drop-down list in the upper left hand corner of the screen. Programmable keys include:

Line 1·

Line 2·

User•

Volume Down•

Volume Up•

Mute•

If you are configuring a Line or User button, enter a name for it in the Line (or User) Name field (optional).

The key selected determines the commands available in the Command drop-down lists in the Command section of the screen.

Command Associated with Function "Volume" Press 3 - Converge 840T 0 RAMP 1 F 2 0.0 Command: Release 3 - Converge 840T 0 RAMP 1 F 2 0.0 Active State 3 - Converge 840T 0 GAIN 1 F Status: Type DO Command Inactive State 3 - Converge 840T 0 NONE Apply Clear

For example, the commands available for the volume buttons include GAIN, MACRO, and RAMP. When you select a command, the configurable parameters for that command appear as shown above. (For more information on the command editor, see Command Editor in the Control Tab topic.)

Select the Type, DID (device ID), and Command from the drop-down lists. After selecting a command and configuring its parameters, press the Apply button to save the button programming. To clear a command, press the Clear button.

For some commands, such as MACRO, the Status section of the command editor becomes active. Status controls the LED status indicator for the associated button based on the state conditions entered in the Active State (LED on) and Inactive State (LED off) rows of the Status section.

Command Associated with Function 'User Defined Button' Press 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 1 Command: Release Type DID Command Macro Name 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 2 Active State Type DID Command Macro Name 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 3 Status: Type DID Command Macro Name 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 3 Inactive State Apply Clear

Pressing a programmed button in the Web Portal executes the command selected in the Press row of the Command section. Releasing a button executes the command selected in the Release row (if applicable for the programmed command).

Configuring Control Console

Control Console provides eight fader groups (mixers) with gain sliders, mute buttons, and level meters. It also provides four user-programmable buttons. The fader groups can control multiple units in a site.

WebBuilder User Console Control Console Fader Group 1 Meter Command Group Name Command Description This command selects the status of level reporting for the specified channel. Argument Description Channel/Group depends on unit type: I - Input; L * Line; O - Output; M - Microphone; P - Processing; R - Telco Rx Web Page Layout Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 Command Associated with Function Meter' Type DID Command Channel Group Position Value Press 3 - Converge 840T 0 LVLREPORT 1 F 1 Command: Release 3 - Converge 840T 0 NONE+ Active State 3 - Converge 840T 0 NONE+ Status: Type DID Command Inactive State 3 - Converge 840T 0 NONE+ Apply Clear Close

Select the fader group or user key you want to program from the drop-down list in the upper left hand corner of the screen. For fader groups, you will also need to select Gain, Mute, or Meter from the second drop-down list.

NOTE: You can also select an element to program, such as a gain slider or user button, by selecting its graphical representation in the Control Console window. For example, in the screen shot above, the meter element for Fader Group 1 is selected. The LVLREPORT command associated with the meter will display real-time level of fader group on the Converge Pro 840T unit (DID 0).

The element selected determines the commands available in the Command drop-down lists in the Command section of the screen.

Command Associated with Function Mutel Press Type DID Command Macro Name 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 1 Gash 12dB Command: Release Type DID Command Active State 3 - Converge 840T 0 NUTE Channel Group PAGE Status: Inactive State 3 - Converge 840T 0 NUTE Channel Group PAGE Apply Clear

For example, the commands available for the mute buttons include MACRO and MUTE. When you select a command, the configurable parameters for that command appear as shown above. (For more information on the command editor, see Command Editor in the Control Tab topic.)

Select the Type, DID (device ID), and Command from the drop-down lists. After selecting a command and configuring its parameters, press the Apply button to save the button programming. To clear a command, press the Clear button.

For some commands, such as MACRO, the Status section of the command editor becomes active. Status controls the LED status indicator for the associated button based on the state conditions entered in the Active State (LED on) and Inactive State (LED off) rows of the Status section.

Command Associated with Function 'User Defined Button' Press 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 1 Command: Release Type DID Command Macro Name 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 2 Active State Type DID Command Macro Name 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 3 Status: Type DID Command Macro Name Inactive State 3 - Converge 840T 0 MACRO 1 Apply Clear

Changing the settings of a fader group element, or pressing a programmed button in the Web Portal executes the command selected in the Press row of the Command section. Releasing a button executes the command selected in the Release row (if applicable).

Accessing the Web Portal

After programming User Console and Control Console, you can access them using the Web Portal to monitor and manage audio conferences.

User access privileges to these web-based management tools are as follows:

Administrator• : Full web access.

• Manager: Web access to Dialer, Maintenance, Registration, About, and Help pages.
• User: Web access to the Dialer, Registration, About, and Help pages.

To open the web portal, enter the IP address of the unit you want to connect with. The web portal appears as shown below.

ClearOne. DIALER MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT REGISTRATION LOG OUT HELP ABOUT DEVICE CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGEM4.1 DEVICE 30 CONVERGE - WEB PORTAL Control Console Control Console Gain Mic Processing Chlor Mac/nsPresents Signal Generator

To access programmed call management functions, click on DIALER. To access programmed control console mixing functions, click on MANAGEMENT (shown above).

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Dialer•

Phonebook•

Macro Tab•

Mic Gating•

Mic Input Settings•

Line Input Settings•

Telco/VoIP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Output Settings

Matrix Tab·

FIRMWARE LOADER

Firmware Loader allows you to upgrade firmware when ClearOne releases enhancements. All models use the same firmware file (converge.mdo). When upgrading firmware, all units in the site are automatically updated simultaneously.

NOTE: Before upgrading firmware, save a copy of your site files using the Save or Save As options on the File menu. When upgrading from Converge Console 1.0.4 or 1.1.5 to 2.0.x or 3.0.x the Firmware must be updated twice.

Accessing Firmware Loader

To load firmware, click on the Services menu select Firmware Loader. The Converge Firmware Loader window appears as shown below.

Converge Firmware Loader Select Firmware File Firmware File: C:\Program Files\ClearOne\Converge Console\Firmware\Converge.mdo Firmware File: "Version 0.0.45" "Date 03/06/2007" Name Type Device ID Version Upload Converge840T-03 840T 4 0.0.45 Cancel Upload Firmware Close Upload:

Loading Firmware

Firmware Loader automatically looks for firmware files in the default Converge Console directory.

Press the ⋯ button to locate firmware files stored in a different directory, or enter an explicit file path into the Firmware File entry field. All available firmware files in the chosen directory are displayed in the firmware file table.

Once you have located the firmware file you want to load, select it from the firmware file table and click Upload Firmware. A warning dialog appears (shown below). Click Yes to proceed with the firmware upload.

Warning Uploading the firmware will cause all of the units to be upgraded and then rebooted. Do you want to continue? Yes No

The upload begins, and the Firmware Loader displays progress in the Upload column of the firmware file table, and in the Status Bar at the bottom of the window as shown below:

Converge Firmware Loader Select Firmware File Firmware File: C:\Program Files\ClearOne\Converge Console\Firmware\Converge mdo Firmware File: "Version 0.0.45" "Date 03/06/2007" Name Type Device ID Version Upload Converge840T-03 840T 4 0.0.45 Cancel Upload Firmware Close Upload:

In addition, the LED indicators on the status bar in Console turn yellow to indicate the firmware load is in progress as shown below:

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (HV) CONVERGE80OTA-0 Site View Tree View (d9) CONVERGE80OTA-0 sscot M L O P T R Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AGC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Matrix NOM Mose Gain Pres Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output B PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 NOM Mose Gain Pres Telco TX Telco TX From Exp. O To Exp. O From Exp. P To Exp. P From Exp. Q To Exp. Q From Exp. R To Exp. R From Exp. S To Exp. S From Exp. T To Exp. T From Exp. U To Exp. U From Exp. V To Exp. V From Exp. W To Exp. W From Exp. X To Exp. X From Exp. Y To Exp. Y From Exp. Z To Exp. Z From Exp. I To Exp. I From Exp. J To Exp. J From Exp. K To Exp. K From Exp. L To Exp. L From Exp. M To Exp. M From Exp. N To Exp. N Processing RX A Process A 0.0dB Process A Process B 0.0dB Process B Process C 0.0dB Process C Process D 0.0dB Process D Process E 0.0dB Process E Process F 0.0dB Process F Process G 0.0dB Process G Process H 0.0dB Process H AV Devices Objects Microphone DVD/CD Video Codec VCR Sound Card Amplifier Loudspeaker MALE OF CHINA TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. Model: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80OTA-0 (Device ID)

When the firmware load is complete, the unit reboots. The unit now has the selected firmware file loaded.

If you experience problems with firmware loads, please contact ClearOne Technical Support.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Configure Unit Properties•

Configuration Mode Overview

Customer Service and Support•

DEBUG CONSOLE

The Debug Console provides five tabs for monitoring system performance, testing and troubleshooting audio performance, and running system diagnostics:

Meter View•

Gate View•

Signal Generator•

System Checks•

System Check Config•

Accessing Debug Console

To access the debug console, select Debug Console from the Services menu, or press the Debug Console button on the Console Button Bar.

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (HN) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View | Tree View | (BN) CONVERGE80TA-0 s80T M L O P I N Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mate Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Mate AGC Input Q 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Mate NC Telco RX 0.0dB Output Output1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Output5 Output6 Output7 Output8 Output Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. To Exp. TO Exo Max Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Model: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Connected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

Debug console tabs are described in the following sections.

Meter View Tab

The Meter View tab provides eight user-configurable level meters for monitoring signal levels on any channel in a site.

Debug Console Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Mask | Meter 1 Unit (0) ConvergeSRA-C8 Meter Type: (I) Input Pre Gain Channel 1 Mic 1 Gate Mic 2 Gate Mic 3 Gate Mic 4 Gate Mic 5 Gate Mic 6 Gate Mic 7 Gate Mic 8 Gate -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB Meter 2 Unit (0) ConvergeSRA-C8 Meter Type: (I) Input Pre Gain Channel 1 Mic 1 Gate Mic 2 Gate Mic 3 Gate Mic 4 Gate Mic 5 Gate Mic 6 Gate Mic 7 Gate Mic 8 Gate -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB Meter 3 Unit (0) ConvergeSRA-C8 Meter Type: (I) Input Pre Gain Channel 1 Mic 1 Gate Mic 2 Gate Mic 3 Gate Mic 4 Gate Mic 5 Gate Mic 6 Gate Mic 7 Gate Mic 8 Gate -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB Meter 4 Unit (0) ConvergeSRA-C8 Meter Type: (I) Input Pre Gain Channel 1 Mic 1 Gate Mic 2 Gate Mic 3 Gate Mic 4 Gate Mic 5 Gate Mic 6 Gate Mic 7 Gate Mic 8 Gate -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB Meter 5 Unit (0) ConvergeSRA-C8 Meter Type: (I) Input Pre Gain Channel 1 Mic 1 Gate Mic 2 Gate Mic 3 Gate Mic 4 Gate Mic 5 Gate Mic 6 Gate Mic 7 Gate Mic 8 Gate -86 dB -86 dB -86 dB Meter 6 Unit (0) ConvergeSRA-C8 Meter Type: (I) Input Pre Gain Channel 1 Mic 1 Gate Mic 2 Gate Mic 3 Gate Mic 4 Gate Mic 5 Gate Mic 6 Gate Mic 7 Gate Mic 8 Gate

To configure a meter, select the Unit, Meter Type, and Channel using the drop-down lists. Meter view provides a useful diagnostic tool for system-wide troubleshooting and configuration.

Gate View Tab

The Gate View tab shows real-time gating status, allowing you to monitor gating activity for the mics and gating groups for the currently connected unit.

Debug Console Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Masking | Gate Status Unit Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (H0) Converge880TA00 Close

The gate indicator for each input is dark green in the gate-off condition and light green if the input is gated on.

Signal Generator

The Signal Generator tab enables you to generate test signals to audibly test signal paths, gain settings, routing, and channel configuration settings. The signal generator can also be used for noise masking in courtroom, clergy, and corporate applications.

NOTE: When the signal generator is on for any unit in the site, the Signal Generator LED on the Console Button Bar flashes green.

Debug Console Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Masking | (H0) Converge880TA00 Channel 1 Signal On Signal Timeout ( 0 = no timeout ) 0 Min (H0) Converge880TA00 1 - Input 1 Signal Selection - Logarithmic Swept Sine Wave - Linear Swept Sine Wave - Tone - White - Pink Amplitude - 20 - 0 - 20 - -40 - -60 - -20.0 Frequency 1000 Hz Sweep □ Amount Balance/Hz 20 Hz 10 Hz First Time 2000 Hz Rate 15 ms Close

Test Signal Types

The signal generator provides three types of test signals: Pink, White, and Tone.

• Pink Noise: A test signal containing all the frequencies in a given audio spectrum, with equal energy in each octave. Pink noise is the default signal.
• White Noise: A test signal with equal energy distribution throughout a given frequency range.
• Tone: A sine-wave test signal with less than .03% distortion. Selecting Tone with the Signal Selection slider activates the Frequency configuration section of the tab.
• Linear Sweep Sine Wave: A test signal increasing in frequency using predefined steps.
• Log Sweep Sine Wave: A test signal increasing in frequency using exponential steps (rises on a curve).

Running a Signal Test

Use the following procedure to run a signal test:

Select the unit and channel to test using the unit and channel drop down lists.1.

1. Select the type of test tone using the Signal Selection slider.
2. Select the amplitude (volume) of the test tone using the Amplitude slider. The amplitude range is from -60 to +20dB. The default is -20dB.
3. Set the level for the test tone using the dB entry field or up/down arrows.
4. Set desired test tone duration using the Signal Timeout entry field.
5. For Tone signals, set the additional Frequency settings as explained in the next section.
6. Press the Signal On button to initiate the test signal on the selected unit and channel. The signal will

continue using the specified settings until the Signal Timeout is reached, or the Signal On button is pressed again, whichever occurs first.

Tone Frequency Settings

Configure Frequency settings for tone tests as follows:

1. Select a tone frequency using the Frequency slider, or enter a frequency in the entry box.
2. Alternatively use the Auto Sweep button to sweep a range of frequencies using the Begin Frequency, End Frequency, Increment, and Rate settings. Select the Repeat checkbox if you want the sweep to continue in cycles.

NOTE: Use auto sweep to test the frequency response of a room and speakers, and to identify distortion or rattles produced by the speakers or speaker housings. Auto sweep moves the frequency of the signal generator from a low frequency to a high frequency at the specified rate. The Frequency slide control and readout reflect progress while the sweep is in progress. Sweep range is 20Hz—20kHz; increment range is 1Hz—20kHz, and the rate range is 10ms—2000ms. The default rate is 100ms.

1. Press the Signal On button to generate the tone test signal, or press the Auto Sweep button to initiate an auto sweep.

System Checks Tab

System Checks enable you to test network connections, telephone connections, microphones, and output channels for all units in a site. Running system checks can help identify component failures within the system using the tests you select on the System Check Config tab (described in the next section).

Debug Console Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Masking | System Check Report Unit (H0) Converge880TA00 Test Result Report Network Telephone Mic 1 Mic 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 Mic 5 Mic 6 Mic 7 Mic 8 PA Temp. PA Fault Close

The test LEDs indicate test results as follows:

Red • = Test fails

Yellow• = Test not enabled in System Check Config

Green• = Test passes

System Check Config Tab

The System Check Config tab allows you to select and configure the diagnostic tests run on System Checks tab.

Debug Console Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Masking | System Check Configuration Unit (HD) Converge880TA00 Use in test Unit Output Channel Network Telephone Mic 1 NONE> Mic 2 NONE> Mic 3 NONE> Mic 4 NONE> Mic 5 NONE> Mic 6 NONE> Mic 7 NONE> Mic 8 NONE> PA Temp. PA Fault Close

System Check Config settings include:

• Unit (System Check Configuration): Specifies the unit in the site that you want to test.
  • Network: Select this check-box to test the IP configuration and network connectivity for the selected unit.
• Telephone: Select this check box to test Telco/VoIP rx and/or Telco/VoIP tx functionality.
• Mic 1-4 (840T), Mic 1-8 (880, 880T, 880TA, 8i, SR 1212, SR 1212A): Select the check box(es) for the mic input channels that you want to test.
• Unit: Specifies the unit that will provide test audio to the speaker.
• Output Channel: Specifies the output channel that will provide test audio to the speaker.

System Check Configuration - VH20

System Check Configuration Unit (E0) CONVER0EVH20-8 Use in test Unit Output Channel Network SIP Proxy Packet Status

• Network: Select this check-box to test the IP configuration and network connectivity for the selected unit.
- SIP Proxy: Select this check box to test the Proxy 1 and 2 registration status
- Packet Status: Select this check box to the for packet loss

Select the tests you want to run using the Use in test check boxes, and select the unit(s) and output(s) (with speakers connected) using the Unit and Output Channel drop-down lists. Execute the selected tests by pressing the Start button on the System Checks tab.

Sound Masking Tab

Sound Masking is an Amplifier Out only feature consisting of three modes:

Setting Example Meter View | Gate View | Signal Generator | System Checks | System Check Config | Sound Mass | Unit (H0) CONVERTG680TA-0 Power Amp 1 Power Amp 1 Gain -20 Enable Masking Mode Voice Tuner 0 min Power Amp 2 Power Amp 2 Gain -20 Enable Masking Mode Voice Tuner 0 min Power Amp 3 Power Amp 3 Gain -20 Enable Masking Mode Voice Tuner 0 min Power Amp 4 Power Amp 4 Gain -20 Enable Masking Mode Voice Tuner 0 min Close

Off• : Disables the feature.

• Voice: Masking operates only in the range usually used when the target audio is vocal.
- Wideband: Masking operates throughout the audible range of the unit.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Device Log•

Event Log

Mic Input Settings•

Line Input Settings•

Telco/VolP rx Settings •

Telco/VoIP tx Settings •

Output Settings•

Processing Settings

• Fader Settings
• Matrix Tab

EXECUTE PRESETS

The Execute Presets command on the Services menu allows you to run presets while Console is in Configuration Mode.

NOTE: This command is not available while Console is in Preset Mode.

Accessing Execute Presets

Converge Console - Site1.cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Site Selection BB0CT Current Unit (HV) CONVERGE80TA-0 Site View Tree View (89) CONVERGE80TA-0 800T M L O J P T R Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MIC/Line Pres Gain AEC NC Gate Input 1 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 2 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 3 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 4 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 5 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 6 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 7 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 8 0.0dB 0.0dB Line Pres Gain Max AOC Input 9 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 10 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 11 0.0dB 0.0dB Input 12 0.0dB 0.0dB Telco RX Pres Gain Max NC Telco RX 0.0dB From Exp. O From Exp. P From Exp. Q From Exp. R From Exp. S From Exp. T From Exp. U From Exp. V From Exp. W From Exp. X From Exp. Y From Exp. Z From Exp. I From Exp. J From Exp. K From Exp. L From Exp. M From Exp. N Processing RX A Process A B C D E F G H H I J K L M N O N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T E X Y Z T Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Amp PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 To Eq. O To Eq. P To Eq. Q To Eq. R To Eq. S To Eq. T To Eq. U To Eq. V To Eq. W To Eq. X To Eq. Y To Eq. Z To Eq. I To Eq. J To Eq. K To Eq. L To Eq. M To Eq. N Del Come Mgt Gain Pres Processing TX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Mode: Configuration Site Data: Default Unit Data: Default Not Corrected Last Macro: 0 Last Preset: 0 Site: BB0CT Unit: CONVERGE80TA-0 (Device ID)

From the Console main screen, click on the Services menu and select Execute Preset as shown below.

Services Help Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Web Builder Firmware Loader Debug Console System Checks Execute Preset Run Macro Macro Record F8

The Execute Preset dialog appears as shown below.

Execute Preset Select Preset 1 Combine Room A/B Execute Cancel

Select the preset you want to run from the drop-down list, then click Execute to run the preset or Cancel to return to Console. You can also use macros to execute presets or multiple presets simultaneously. For more information, see the Macro Tab topic.

For additional information, please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics:

Preset Mode•

Services Menu•

Configuration Mode•

Preset Mode Overview•

Macro Tab·

APPENDIX A: APPLICATION PROGRAMMER'S INTERFACE

TYPE AND DEVICE IDS

Converge/Converge Pro Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows:

Model Device Type Device ID Range
880 1 0-B
TH20 2 0-F
VH20 E 0-F
840T 3 0-B
8i A 0-B
880T D 0-B
880TA H 0-B
SR 1212	G	0-B
SR 1212A	I	0-B

CONVENTIONS

This guide uses the following typographic conventions to describe Converge/Converge Pro serial command syntax:

Convention	Description
	Parameters enclosed in < > indicate a mandatory parameter
[X]	Parameters enclosed in [ ] indicate an optional parameter
1-8	Parameters separated by a ‘-’ indicate a range of allowable values
4,7,9	Parameters separated by a ‘,’ indicate a list of allowable values
EREF	Words in UPPERCASE bold indicate command text
Device	Indicates the device type and device number on the Expansion Bus. It is composed of a device type character and a device ID character.

COMMAND FORM DESCRIPTION

The structure of serial commands is as follows:

# [Values]

# indicates the start of a command line, the Carriage Return terminates a command.

NOTE: Serial commands can be either UPPERCASE or lowercase. Return values are always in UPPERCASE. In order for a command to be recognized by the RS-232 serial port, the command must be terminated by a carriage return.

For example, a command to disable mute for Mic Input 5 on a Converge Pro 880 with a Device ID of 2 would have the command line #12 MUTE 5 M 0.

In this command line, 1 = the Device Type for Converge 880, 2 = the Device ID for unit 2, MUTE = serial command, 5 = the channel Value, M = the channel type Value for mic input channels, and 0 = the command Value that turns mute off.

If an asterisk (*) is placed in the Device Type or Device ID fields, the command will apply to all units or all devices respectively. For example, a command with a Device Type = 1 and a Device ID = * would apply the command to all Converge 880 units. A command with a Device Type = * and a Device ID = 6 would apply the command to all units with a Device ID of 6.

If a command specifies "(Null to query in text)" in its Value table, leave a blank in the command line to query the current state of that value. For example, the command #12 MUTE 5 M would return the current mute state of Mic 2 on an 880 unit with a Device ID of 0.

GROUPS AND CHANNELS

All serial commands use common alpha and numeric designators to reference channel groups, channel types, and other command values. Also, different channel groups have different allowable channel ranges, as shown in the following table.

Group Alpha Convergo		Pro 880 Channel Range	Convergo Pro TH20 Channel Range	Convergo Pro 840T Channel Range	Convergo Pro Bi Channel Range	Convergo 880T Channel Range	Convergo 880TA Channel Range	Convergo SR 1212 Channel Range	Convergo SR 1212A Channel Range	Convergo Pro VH20 Channel Range
Inputs I 1-12 1-2 1-8 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-2
Outputs O 1-12 1-2				1-9 (9 is the power amp)	N/A	1-13 (13 is the power amp)	1-8 1-12	1-12 1-2
Mic Input	M	1-8	N/A	1-4	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	N/A
Amplifier Output	J	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	1-4	N/A	1-4	N/A
Gating Group	G	1-4, A-F	N/A	1-4, A-F	1-4, A-F	1-4, A-F	1-4, A-F	1-4, A-F	1-4, A-F	N/A
Processing	P	1-8	N/A	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	N/A
Expansion Bus Audio Channels	E	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N	O-Z, I-N
Line Inputs L	9-12 1-2 5-8 9-12 9-12 9-12			9-12 9-12 1-2
Expansion Bus Reference Channels	A	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8	1-8
Unit	U	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide	01 = LOG2 = Site Wide
GPIO	Y	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
Matrix	X	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
Fader	F	1-4	N/A	1-4	N/A	1-4	N/A	1-4	N/A	N/A
Presets	S	1-32	1-32	1-32	1-32	1-32	1-32	1-32	1-32	1-32
Macros	C	1-255	1-255	1-255	1-255	1-255	1-255	1-255	1-255	1-255
Transmit	T	N/A	1	1	N/A	1	1	N/A	N/A	N/A
Receive	R	N/A	1	1	N/A	1	1	N/A	N/A	N/A
Dictionary	D	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
Phonebook	V	N/A	0	0	N/A	0	0	N/A	0	0
Virtual Reference	B	1 - 4	N/A	1 - 4	N/A	1 - 4	1-4	1 - 4	N/A	N/A
Timed Events	Q	1-10	1-10	1-10	1-10	1-10	1-10	1-10	1-10	1-10
Web	W	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
PA Virtual Reference	H	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	1-4	N/A	1-4	N/A
VoIP Transmit	K	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	1
VoIP Receive	Z	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	1

METER TYPE DEFINITIONS TABLE

Alpha Numeric Level Position for Mics			Level Position for Line Inputs	Level position for Outputs	Level Position for Telco TX	Level Position for Telco Rx	Level Position for Factors
I 1 Input level Input level Input level Post Gain level Input Level N/A
A	2	Level post-gain adjustment, but pre-fitter	Post Gain level Post Gain level Post Limiter level Post Gain level				Level post gain adjustment
N	3	Level post-fitter but pre-gate (non-gated level)	N/A N/A N/A			Level after Gain Stage	N/A
G	4	Level post-gate (gated level)	N/A N/A N/A	N/A N/A
R	5	Echo Return Loss (Not SR 1212 / SR 1212A)	N/A N/A N/A	N/A N/A
E	6	Echo Return Loss Enhancement (Not SR 1212 / SR 1212A)	N/A N/A N/A	N/A N/A
T	7	ERL - ERLE (Not SR 1212 / SR 1212A)	N/A N/A N/A	N/A N/A
C 9 AGC		AGC	N/A N/A	N/A			N/A
Y	10	Pre AGC peak level meter	Pre AGC peak level meter	N/A N/A	N/A N/A
Z	11	Post AGC peak level meter	Post AGC peak level meter	N/A N/A	N/A N/A
B	12	Ambiont	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A
L	13	Room Loss <RETURNS 0's FOR NOW>	N/A N/A N/A	N/A N/A

Alpha	Numeric	Level Position for Processors	Level Position for Amp
I	1	Level into Compressor	Input Level Post NOM
A	2	Level Post Compressor	Output Level Post Gain
N	3	Level Post Gain Stage	Feedback Max Auto Gain
G	4	N/A	Compressor Attenuation
R	5	N/A	Level Pre Compressor
E	6	N/A	Level Post Compressor
T	7	N/A	Adaptive Gain
C	9	N/A	Level of Adaplico Gain Nolso Floor
Y	10	N/A	Level Post Mute/Gain Pre EQ
Z	11	N/A	N/A
B	12	N/A	N/A
L	13	N/A	N/A

SERIAL COMMAND INDEX

AA – Auto Answer Enable / Disable 234

AAMB - Adaptive Ambient Mode .....234

AARINGS – Number of Rings to Auto Answer On 234

ACONN – Audible Connect / Disconnect Indication. 234

ACONNLVL – Audible Connect / Disconnect Level 235

AD – Auto Disconnect Enable / Disable....235

ADCLIP – Audio Clipping 235

ADPRESENT – Audio Presence 236

AEC – Acoustic Echo Cancellation Enable / Disable 236

AGC – Automatic Gain Control 236

AGCSET – Automatic Gain Control Adjust 237

AMBLVL – Ambient Level Adjust 237

AMXDUET – Use AMX Duet Discovery .....237

AUDIOMASTER – Expansion Bus Audio Master Mode. 237

AV – Adaptive Volume 237

AVG - Adaptive Volume Gain 238

AVR - Adaptive Volume Reference 238

AVRT - Adaptive Volume Ratio 238

AVT - Adaptive Volume Threshold 238

BAUD – Baud Rate 239

CALLDUR – Call Duration....239

CALLERID – Reports Caller ID Information 239

CGROUP – Compressor Group Select 239

CHAIRO – Chairman Override Mode 239

CLEAREFFECT – ClearEffect Wide Band Telco Emulation .....240

CLOCK - Clock Set 240

COMPDLY – Compressor Delay 240

COMPDLYEN – Compressor Delay Enable 240

COMPRESS – Compressor Adjust....241

COMPSEL – Compression Select....241

COUNTRY – Country Selection....241

CTRLMASTER – Control Master Mode 241

DECAY – Decay Adjust .....242

DEFAULT – Default The Unit 242

DELAY – Delay Adjust 242

DELAYSEL - Delay Select 242

DEVICENAME – Argument Identification Label....242

DEVICESUBTYPE – Sets the Subtype of a Connected Device....243

DEVICETYPE – Sets the Type of a Connected Device .....243

DFLTM - Default Meter 243

DIAG – Diagnostic Commands 243

DIAL - DTMF Dialing 244

DID - Device ID 244

DTMFLVL - DTMF Tone Level 244

DTONELVL – Dial Tone Level 244

DUPDATE – Download Update 244

DVER – Command Dictionary Version 244

ENETADDR – Ethernet Port IP Address 245

ENETDHCP – Ethernet DHCP Selection 245

ENETDNSA2 – Ethernet DNS Server Address 2 245

ENETDNSA – Ethernet DNS Server Address 245

ENETDNS – Ethernet DNS Selection 245

ENETDOMAIN – Ethernet Domain Argument ......245

ENETGATE – Ethernet Default Gateway Address 245

ENETSUBN – Ethernet Subnet Mask 246

ENETVLAN – Enable VLAN Tagging 246

ENETVLANID – VLAN ID 246

ENETVLANPRI – VLAN Priority 246

EREF – Expansion Bus Reference 246

EVENT – Run Scheduled Event 247

FEB - Feedback Elimination Bandwidth 247

FEDR - Feedback Elimination Dynamic Node Reset 247

FE - Feedback Elimination Enable 247

FEF - Feedback Elimination Fixed Filter 248

FEG - Feedback Elimination Auto Gain Max 248

FEGL – Feedback Elimination Gain Level 248

FELD - Feedback Elimination Lock Depth 248

FEM – Feedback Elimination Mode 249

FEN - Feedback Elimination Nodes 249

FER - Feedback Elimination Node Reset .....249

FERNG - Feedback Elimination Ring Elimination Mode 249

FESC - Feedback Elimination Setup Complete 250

FES - Feedback Elimination Setup. 249

FILTER - Filter Adjust 250

FILTSEL – Filter Select 250

FLOW – Flow Control 251

FMP - First Mic Priority Mode 251

GAIN – Gain Adjustment 251

GATE – Gate Status 251

GHOLD - Gate Hold Time Adjust 252

GMODE – Gating Mode 252

GPIOSTATUS – General Purpose Status 252

GRATIO – Gate Ratio Adjust. 252

GREPORT – Gate Report 253

GRPSEL – Gating Group Select 253

HOOKD – Hook Flash Duration....253

HOOK – Hook Flash 253

LABEL - Label 253

LCDCONTRAST – LCD Contrast 254

LMO – Last Mic On Mode 254

LOCBLDG – Location: Building 254

LOCCITY – Location: City 254

LOCCNTRY – Location: Country 255

LOCCOMP – Location: Company 255

LOCREGION – Location: Region 255

LOCROOM – Location: Room 255

LOCSITENAME – Location: Site Argument 255

LOCSTATE – Location: State 255

LOGMASK – Device Log Mask 256

LVL-Level 256

LVLREPORTEN – Level Report Enable 257

LVLREPORT – Level Report 256

MACRO – Macro Execution/Reporting 257

MANUFACTURER – Manufacturer Identification Label 257

MAX – Maximum Gain Setting 257

MCGAIN – Multi-Channel Gain 258

MCMINMAX – Multi-Channel Min and max Gain Setting 258

MC - Multi-Channel Mode. 258

MCMUTE – Multi-Channel Min and Max Gain Setting 259

MCRAMP - Multi-Channel Ramp 259

MINMAX – Minimum and Maximum Gain Setting 260

MIN – Minimum Gain Setting 259

MLINE - Mic / Line Coarse Gain Setting 260

MMAX – Maximum Number of Microphones .....260

MODEL - Model Identification Label 260

MTRXCLEAR – Clear Matrix 261

MTRXLVL - Matrix Attenuation Adjust 261

MTRX – Matrix Routing. 261

MUTE – Mute 262

NAME – Unit Name (NETBIOS Name) 262

NCD – Noise Cancellation Depth Adjust .....262

NCSEL – Noise Cancellation Select 263

NLP - Non Linear Processing Adjust 263

NOM – Number of Open Microphones Mode .....263

NTPSRV – NTP Network Time Server Address 263

NULL – Null the Telephone Line ......263

OFFA - Off Attenuation Mode. 264

PAA – PA Adaptive Mode 264

PACEN – PA Softclipper Enable 264

PAENERGY – PA Energy-saver mode 264

PAEQEN – PA EQ Filter Enable 265

PAEQRST – PA EQ Filter Reset 265

PAEQSET – PA EQ Filter Set .....265

PAFLT – PA Fault 266

PAIMPED - PA Output Impedance 266

PALEN - PA Limiter Enable 266

PALT – PA Limiter Threshold 266

PANGAT – PA Noise Gate Activation Timer 267

PANGEN – PA Noise Gate Enabled 267

PANGF – PA Noise Gate Filter 267

PANGM – PA Noise Gate Mode 267

PANGT - PA Noise Gate Threshold .....268

PAPOL – Polarity Switch 268

PARST – PA Reset 268

PASME – PA Sound Mask Enable 268

PASML – PA Sound Mask Level 268

PASMM – PA Sound Mask Mode .....269

PASMT – PA Sound Mask Timer 269

PATO – PA Thermal Overload 269

PBDIAL - Dial a PB Entry by Argument 269

PHONEBOOKADD – Adds an Entry to the Phonebook .....269

PHONEBOOKCNT – Counts Entries in the Phonebook 270

PHONEBOOKDEL – Deletes an Entry in the Phonebook. 270

PHONEBOOKREAD – Queries the Phonebook by Index 270

PP – Phantom Power 270

PRESET – Preset Execution/Reporting 270

PRGSTRING – Program String 271

PROXYSTAT – Proxy Registration Status 271

PTTTHRESHOLD – Push to Talk Threshold....271

PUSHTOTALK – Push to Talk 271

RAMP – Ramp Gain Adjustment 272

REDIAL – Redial the Last Number 272

REFSEL – Reference Select for PA Adaptation & AEC 272

REFSET – Reference Channel Set Up 272

RESET – Reset 272

RINGEREN – Audible Ring Enable 273

RINGERLVL – Audible Ring Level 273

RINGERSEL – Audible Ring Melody Selection .....273

RINGERTEST – Audible Ring Melody Test....273

RINGMOD – Ring Cadence Mode .....274

RINGOFF – Ring Cadence Off Time 274

RINGON – Ring Cadence On Time 274

RING – Ring Indication....273

RXBOOST – Receive Boost 275

RXBSTEN – Receive Boost Enable....275

SERECHO – Serial Echo 275

SFTYMUTE – Safety Mute....275

SIGGENEN – Signal Generator Enable 276

SIGGEN – Signal Generator 276

SIGGENSWEEP – Signal Generator Sweep 276

SIGTOUT – Signal Generator Time Out .....276

SLVL – Speech Level Control 277

SMTPSRV – SMTP Mail Server Address 277

SNMPMNGRIP – SNMP Manager Host IP Address 277

SNMPMNGRPORT – SNMP Manager Notification Port 277

SNMPREADCOMM – SNMP Read Community String 277

SNMPWRITECOMM – SNMP Write Community String .....277

SPEEDDIAL – Speed Dial a Number 278

STRING – String Execution....278

SYSCHECKS – System Checks 278

SYSRESULT – System Check Result 278

TAMODE – Telco Adapt Mode 279

TELCOLVLCTRL - Telco RX Level Control Enable / Disable 280

TELOVER – Telco Current Overload 280

TE – Telco Enable 280

TIMELOCALE – Time Locale Settings....280

TOUT – Time Out Select 281

UID - Unit ID 281

VER - Version 281

XAA – Auto Answer Enable/Disable .....281

XAARINGS – Number of Rings to Auto Answer On 281

XACONN – Audible Connect / Disconnect Indication .....282

XACONNLVL – Audible Connect / Disconnect Level 282

XCALLDUR – Call Duration....282

XCALLERID – Reports Caller ID Information 282

XCGROUP – Compressor Group 282

XCOMPRESS – Compressor Adjust .....283

XCOMPSEL – Compressor Enable....283

XDELAY – Audio Delay....283

XDELAYSEL – Audio Delay Enable 283

XDELAYSEL – Audio Delay Enable .....284

XDIAL - DTMF Dialing 284

XDTMFLVL - DTMF Tone Level 284

XDTONELVL - Dial Tone Level. 285

XHOOKD - Hook Flash Duration. 285

XHOOK – Hook Flash 285

XLOCALNUM - Local Number 285

XPBDIAL – Dial a PB Entry by Name 286

XREDIAL – Dial the last number again .....286

XRINGEREN – Audible Ring Enable 286

XRINGERLVL – Audible Ring Level .....286

XRINGERSEL – Audible Ring Melody Selection .....287

XRINGERTEST – Audible Ring Melody Test .....287

XRING – Ring Indication ....286

XSPEEDDIAL – Speed Dialing....287

XTE – Telco Enable 287

SERIAL COMMANDS

Serial commands are shown in bold, followed by the command form and argument details.

AA – Auto Answer Enable / Disable

This command selects/reports the setting of auto answer.

Command Form: DEVICE AA [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

AAMB – Adaptive Ambient Mode

This command selects/reports the setting of adaptive ambient.

Command Form: DEVICE AAMB [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = toggle

(Null to query in text)

AARINGS – Number of Rings to Auto Answer On

This command selects/reports the setting of the number of rings to auto answer.

Command Form: DEVICE AARINGS [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 2 - 4

(Null to query in text)

ACONN – Audible Connect / Disconnect Indication

This command selects/reports the status of the audible connect / disconnect indication.

Command Form: DEVICE ACONN [Value].

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

ACONNLVL – Audible Connect / Disconnect Level

This command selects/reports the audible connect / disconnect indicator's level.

Command Form: DEVICE ACONNLVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group Group 1 17 (R)
Value Signed Float 2 -12.00 – 12.00	dB
(Null to query in text)

AD – Auto Disconnect Enable / Disable

This command selects/reports the setting of auto disconnect.

Command Form: DEVICE AD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group	1 17 (R)
Value Unsigned Integer	2 0 = Off
	1 = Loop Drop
	2 = Call Progress
	3 = Loop Drop + Call Progress
	(Null to query in text)

ADCLIP – Audio Clipping

This command reports the channels that are currently clipping their audio signals. This command is read only. This command is implemented only for inputs.

Command Form: DEVICE ADCLIP [Values]

Argument	Type	Size Values
Value	Bit Map of Inputs	2	XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX|......|→ Input 1 (lsb) to 12 (msb)|......|→ Reserved (Null to query in text)
	Bit Map of Outputs	2	XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX|......|→ Output 1 (lsb) to 13 (msb)|....|→ Reserved
	Bit Map of Processors	2	XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX|......|→ Processor A (lsb) to H (msb)|----|→ Reserved
	Bit Map of Faders	1	XXXX XXXX|----|→ Faders 1 (lsb) to 4 (msb)|----|→ Reserved
	Bit Map of Telco	1	XXXX XXXX|→ Telco RX|→ Telco TX|----|→ Reserved

ADPRESENT – Audio Presence

This command displays the channels that currently have valid audio signals present. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE ADPRESENT [Values]

Argument Type Size Values

Value Bit Map of Inputs	2 XXXX	XXXX XXXX XXXX|...... |→ Input 1 (lsb) to 12 (msb)|...... |→ Reserved (Null to query in text)
Bit Map of Outputs	2 XXXX	XXXX XXXX XXXX|...... |→ Output 1 (lsb) to 13 (msb)|.... |→ Reserved
Bit Map of Processors	2 XXXX XXXX	XXXX XXXX|...... |→ Processor A (lsb) to H (msb)|---- |→ Reserved
Bit Map of Faders	1 XXXX	XXXX|---- |→ Faders 1 (lsb) to 4 (msb)|---- |→ Reserved
Bit Map of Telco	1 XXXX	XXXX|→ Telco RX|→ Telco TX|---- |→ Reserved

AEC – Acoustic Echo Cancellation Enable / Disable

This command selects/reports the setting of Acoustic Echo Canceller.

Command Form: DEVICE AEC [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1		See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1	3 (M)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2	0 = Off1 = On2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

AGC – Automatic Gain Control

This command selects/reports the setting of automatic gain control.

Command Form: DEVICE AGC [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel Channel 1		See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1	1, 3, 7 (I, M, L)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2	0 = Off1 = On2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

AGCSET – Automatic Gain Control Adjust

This command selects/reports the settings of the Automatic Gain Control.

Command Form: DEVICE AGCSET [Threshold Target Attack Gain]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 1, 3, 7 (I, M, L)
Threshold Signed Integer 1 -50 – 0			dB
	(Null to query in text)
Target Signed Integer 1 -30 – 20 dB
Response	Unsigned Float	2 0.10 – 10.00	S
Time
Gain	Unsigned Float	2 0.00 – 18.00	dB

AMBLVL – Ambient Level Adjust

This command selects/reports the ambient level.

Command Form: DEVICE AMBLVL [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 3 (M)
Value	Signed Float	2 -80.00 – 0.00(Null to query in text)	dB

AMXDUET – Use AMX Duet Discovery

This command sets and reports the status of AMX Duet Discovery.

Command Form: DEVICE AMXDUET [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Value	Unsigned Integer	4 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = toggle
		(Null to query in text)

AUDIOMASTER – Expansion Bus Audio Master Mode

This command reports the mode of the unit for control of the expansion bus audio.

Command Form: DEVICE AUDIOMASTER [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Value	Unsigned Integer	4 1 = Master2 = Slave(Null to query in text)

AV – Adaptive Volume

This command enables/disables adaptive volume tracking on a power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE AV [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 23 (J)
Value	Signed Float	2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

AVG – Adaptive Volume Gain

This command sets the maximum gain setting that the algorithm will not exceed.

Command Form:

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupsAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Signed Short 2 0.00 to +18.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

AVR – Adaptive Volume Reference

This command selects/reports the microphone or expansion bus reference channel to be used for adaptive volume tracking on a power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE AVR [CHANNEL] [GROUP]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 (M) 1-8

(E) 1-18

(Null to query in text)

Group Group 1 3, 6 (M or E)

AVRT – Adaptive Volume Ratio

This command sets the ratio at which gain will be automatically applied based upon the ambient level in the reference microphone. Example: A 1:1 setting would apply 1 dB of gain for every 1dB rise in ambient level of the reference microphone up to the Max Gain setting.

Command Form: DEVICE AVRT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = 2:1

Ratio

1 = 1:1

2 = 1:2

(Null to query in text)

AVT – Adaptive Volume Threshold

This command sets the level at which the adaptive volume algorithm will be activated. This value is referenced to the noise floor of the channel and the target above ambient for the adaptive volume to reach.

Command Form: Device AVT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Signed Short 2 -80.00 to 0.00

(Null to query in text)

BAUD – Baud Rate

This command selects/reports the baud rate of the serial port.

Command Form: DEVICE BAUD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

(Null to query in text)

CALLDUR – Call Duration

This command returns current call duration. If no call is active, this command returns 0. At the time of call termination, this command will automatically be sent out to report call duration. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE CALLDUR

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Reserved 20

Duration String 8 String of format HR:MN:SS

CALLERID – Reports Caller ID Information

This command reports Caller Identification Information. This command is reportable only. It cannot be queried or set.

Command Form: DEVICE CALLERID

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Reserved	Unsigned Integer 2 0
Number	String	16 1 – 16 chars
Label	String	16 1 – 16 chars

CGROUP – Compressor Group Select

This command selects/reports the setting of the compressor group.

Command Form: DEVICE CGROUP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel		1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 5 (P)
Value	Unsigned Integer 2 0 = none		Compressor Group
		1 - 4(Null to query in text)

CHAIRO – Chairman Override Mode

This command selects/reports the setting of chairman override.

Command Form: DEVICE CHAIRO [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel		1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 3 (M)
Value	Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

CLEAREFFECT – ClearEffect Wide Band Telco Emulation

This command enables / disables or reports the current status of the ClearEffect.

Command Form: DEVICE CLEAREFFECT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

CLOCK - Clock Set

This command sets or reports the current time.

Command Form: DEVICE CLOCK [Date Month Year Hours Minutes Seconds Day]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Date	Unsigned Integer	1 1 – 31
Month	Unsigned Integer	1 1 – 12
Year	Unsigned Integer	2 2000 – 2099(NULL to Query in Text)

Hours Unsigned Integer 100 - 23

Minutes Unsigned Integer 100 - 59

Seconds Unsigned Integer 100 - 59

Day of Unsigned Integer 1 1 = Sunday

Week

2 = Monday

3 = Tuesday

4 = Wednesday

5 = Thursday

6 = Friday

7 = Saturday

COMPDLY – Compressor Delay

This command sets signal compression delay on a Channel for look ahead compression functionality. Delay from 0-20 msec

Command Form: DEVICE COMPDLY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0-20

msec

(Null to query in text)

COMPDLYEN – Compressor Delay Enable

This command enables signal compression delay on a Channel for look-ahead compression functionality

Command Form: DEVICE COMPDLYEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

COMPRESS – Compressor Adjust

This command selects/reports the settings of the compressor.

Command Form: DEVICE COMPRESS [Threshold Ratio Attack Release Gain]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 5 (P)
Threshold Signed Integer 1 -60 – 20				dB
		(Null to query in text)
Ratio Unsigned Integer 1 1 – 20
Attack	Unsigned Float	2	0.00 – 100.00	Ms
Release	Unsigned Integer 2 100 – 2000			Ms
Gain	Unsigned Float	4 0.00 – 20.00		dB

COMPSEL – Compression Select

This command selects/reports the compressor activation.

Command Form: DEVICE COMPSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel	Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group 1 5 (P)
Value	Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

COUNTRY – Country Selection

This command sets / reports the country for telco compliance purposes.

Command Form: DEVICE COUNTRY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value	Unsigned Integer 4 1 = US / Canada
	2 = Europe
	3 = Mexico
	4 = Australia
	5 = South Africa
	6 = Japan
	7 = Brazil
	8 = South Korea
	9 = China
	10 = Singapore
	11 = Taiwan
	12 = New Zealand
	13 = India
	14 = Hong Kong
	15 = Malaysia
	16 = Argentina
	(Null to query in text)

CTRLMASTER – Control Master Mode

This command reports the mode of the unit for SNMP control.

Command Form: DEVICE CTRLMASTER [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 = Master

2 = Slave

(Null to query in text)

DECAY – Decay Adjust

This command selects/reports the setting of the decay rate.

Command Form: DEVICE DECAY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 1 = Slow

2 = Medium

3 = Fast

(Null to query in text)

DEFAULT – Default The Unit

Sets the unit to factory defaults. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE DEFAULT

No Arguments

DELAY – Delay Adjust

This command selects/reports the setting of delay time.

Command Form: DEVICE DELAY [Value]

Argument Type	Size Values	Units
Channel Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group Group	1 5 (P)
Value Unsigned Float	2 0.00 – 250.00	Ms
	(Null to query in text)

DELAYSEL – Delay Select

This command selects/reports the delay activation of an assignable processing channel.

Command Form: DEVICE DELAYSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 5 (P)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

DEVICENAME – Argument Identification Label

This selects/reports the Device Argument identification label of the specific channel.

COMMAND FORM: DEVICE DEVICENAME [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 1, 2, 3, 7(I, O, M, L)

Label String 12 1 - 12 characters

CLEAR = clear the label

(Null to query in text)

DEVICESUBTYPE – Sets the Subtype of a Connected Device

This command enables/disables or reports the current type of device connected to an input or output.

Command Form: DEVICE DEVICESUBTYPE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 7 (I, O, M, L)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 (NULL to query in text)

DEVICETYPE – Sets the Type of a Connected Device

This command enables / disables or reports the current type of device connected to an input or output.

Command Form: DEVICE DEVICETYPE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 7 (I, O, M, L)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 (NULL to query in text)

DFLTM - Default Meter

This command selects/reports the setting of the default meter on the front panel.

Command Form: DEVICE DFLTM [Channel Group Position]

Argument Type		Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels(Null to query in text)
Group	Group	1 1, 2, 3, 7, 16, 17 (I, O, M, L, T, R)
Position Meter Type		2 1 – 4, as applicable for groupSeeMeter Type Definitions

DIAG – Diagnostic Commands

This command is used to return status and diagnostic information. It is intended to be used as a text command only. This is a query only command.

Command Form: DEVICE DIAG [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 23 (J)
Value	Unsigned Short	2	0 = List of current commands(J) Power Amp1 = Fan/Temp2 = Noise Gate3 = Feedback Nodes
Information	String	80 Diagnostic String(ALWAYS NULL IN TEXT)

DIAL – DTMF Dialing

This command dials a DTMF sequence or reports back the last sequence dialed.

Command Form: DEVICE DIAL [Number]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Reserved 2 0

Number String 40 1 - 40 Chars of '0' - '9', '*', '#', '

(Null to query last number dialed in text)

DID – Device ID

This command reports the device id. This command is read only except through the front panel.

Command Form: DEVICE DID [Value]

Argument Type		Size Values		Units
Value	Unsigned Integer	4	See Type And Device IDs (Null sent in text, Value returned)

DTMFLVL – DTMF Tone Level

This command selects/reports the DTMF tone level.

Command Form: DEVICE DTMFLVL [Value]

Argument Type		Size Values	Units
Channel Channel		1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group Group		1 17 (R)
Value	Signed Float	2 -12.00 – 12.00	dB
		(Null to query in text)

DTONELVL – Dial Tone Level

This command selects/reports the audible dial tone level.

Command Form: DEVICE DTONELVL [Value]

Argument Type		Size Values	Units
Channel Channel		1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group Group		1 17 (R)
Value	Signed Float	2 -12.00 – 12.00	dB
		(Null to query in text)

DUPDATE – Download Update

This command reports the status of download updates.

Command Form: DEVICE DUPDATE [Channel Group Status Percent Done Message]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Channel	Unsigned Integer	1
Group	Unsigned Integer	1
Status	Unsigned Integer	1	(Null to query in text)
Percent Done	Unsigned Integer	1
Message	Char	60

DVER – Command Dictionary Version

This command reports the version of the command dictionary being used by the unit. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE DVER [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 (Sent with a Null in text)

ENETADDR – Ethernet Port IP Address

This command selects/reports the IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETADDR [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value IP Address 4 (Null to query in text)

ENETDHCP – Ethernet DHCP Selection

This command selects/reports the use of DHCP of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETDHCP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

ENETDNS – Ethernet DNS Selection

This command selects/reports the use of DNS of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETDNS [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 40 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

ENETDNSA – Ethernet DNS Server Address

This command selects/reports the DNS server IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETDNSA [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Value IP Address 4 (Null to query in text)

ENETDNSA2 – Ethernet DNS Server Address 2

This command selects/reports the alternate DNS server IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETDNSA2 [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Value IP Address 4 (Null to query in text)

ENETDOMAIN – Ethernet Domain Argument

This command selects/reports the Domain Argument of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETDOMAIN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Value String 64 (Null to query in text)

ENETGATE – Ethernet Default Gateway Address

This command selects/reports the default gateway of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETGATE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Value IP Address 4 (Null to query in text)

ENETSUBN – Ethernet Subnet Mask

This command selects/reports the Subnet mask of the Ethernet port on the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETSUBN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value IP Address 4 (Null to query in text)

ENETVLAN – Enable VLAN Tagging

This command enables/disables VLAN tagging. Valid on VH20 ONLY. Change requires reboot to become effective.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETVLAN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned	4 0 = VLAN Tagging Off
Integer	1 = VLAN Tagging On
	2 = Toggle
	(Null to query in text)

ENETVLANID – VLAN ID

This command set/reports VLAN Tag ID for all Ethernet packets (including SIP). Valid on VH20 ONLY. Change requires reboot to become effective.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETVLANID [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned	4 1 – 4094
Integer	(Null to query in text)

ENETVLANPRI – VLAN Priority

This command sets/reports the VLAN Tagging Priority for all IP packets. Valid on VH20 ONLY. Change requires reboot to become effective.

Command Form: DEVICE ENETVLANPRI [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned	40-7
Integer	(Null to query in text)

EREF – Expansion Bus Reference

This command selects an output or reports which output is the expansion bus reference.

Command Form: DEVICE EREF [Value Channel Value Group]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Reference Channels in Groups and Channels Group Group 1 8 (A, E)

Value Channel 1 0 = none

See 2, 20 (O, B) in Groups and Channels

(Null to query in text)

Value Group 1 0 for none or 2, 20 (N for none or O, B)

EVENT – Run Scheduled Event

This command manually runs a scheduled event on a unit. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE EVENT

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 1 - 10

Group Group 1 21 (Q)

Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0

FE – Feedback Elimination Enable

This command enables or disables feedback elimination on the power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE FE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = On

1 = Off

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

FEB – Feedback Elimination Bandwidth

This command sets the filter bandwidth of the notch filter. Options are a Q = 5 or Q = 10

Command Form: DEVICE FEB [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = 5

1 = 10

Default 0 (5)

(Null to query in text)

FEDR – Feedback Elimination Dynamic Node Reset

This command will reset only the dynamic filters on the feedback eliminator. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE FEDR

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Reserved Zero 2 Value:0-16

Nodes

(Null to query in text)

FEF – Feedback Elimination Fixed Filter

This command sets the number of fixed filter to use in the feedback eliminator. The fixed filters number will be used during the initialization phase when gain is increased until feedback occurs. A fixed filter will be set at the feedback point during the initialization.

Command Form: DEVICE FEF[VALUE]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Reserved Unsigned Short 2 Zero

FEG – Feedback Elimination Auto Gain Max

This command sets the target gain for auto setup in feedback cancellation.

Command Form: DEVICE FEG [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Reserved Unsigned Short 20 - 8

dB

(Null to query in text)

FEGL – Feedback Elimination Gain Level

This command reports the gain value achieved at the end of the feedback automatic setup. The maximum value possible is set in the FEG command. This is a query only command.

Command Form: DEVICE FEGL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Signed Float 2 -99.99 to 99.99

dB

(Sent with Null, value returned)

FELD – Feedback Elimination Lock Depth

This command sets the operation of a fixed filter node to be either locked or unlocked. In locked mode, the fixed filter's depth will remain the same after all the fixed filters are placed. In unlocked mode, the fixed filter's depth can be modified anytime until the maximum depth is achieved.

Command Form: DEVICE FELD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Float 20 = Locked

1 = Unlocked

Default 0

(Null to query in text)

FEM – Feedback Elimination Mode

This command set the feedback mode to either Music or Voice. This effects how aggressive the reduction is.

Command Form: DEVICE FEM[Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Float 20 = Locked

1 = Unlocked

Default 0

(Null to query in text)

FEN – Feedback Elimination Nodes

This command reports the total number of filter nodes (fixed and dynamic) currently being used for the feedback cancellation. This is a query only command.

Command Form: DEVICE FEN[Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 2 Total Nodes

(ALWAYS NULL IN TEXT)

FER – Feedback Elimination Node Reset

This command resets both the fixed and dynamic filters on the feedback eliminator. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE FER[Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 2 Zero

FERNG – Feedback Elimination Ring Elimination Mode

This command enables/disables the Ring Elimination Mode on the feedback eliminator.

Command Form: DEVICE FERNG[Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Reserved Zero 20 = 0ff

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

FES – Feedback Elimination Setup

This command reset the feedback eliminator and initiates an automatic training cycle. When the automatic setup is complete, the FESC (Feedback Elimination Setup Complete) command will be issued. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE FES [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Reserved Zero 2 Zero

FESC – Feedback Elimination Setup Complete

This command reports when the automatic feedback eliminator setup training cycle is in progress. The training cycle is started using the command FES (Feedback Elimination Setup). This is a query only command.

Command Form: DEVICE FESC[Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Setup Complete

1 = Setup in Progress

(Sent Null, Value Returned)

FILTER – Filter Adjust

This command selects/reports the settings of a filter.

Command Form: DEVICE FILTER [Type Frequency Gain/Slope Bandwidth/Subtype]

Argument Type	Size	Values		Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 3, 5 (M, P)
Node	Unsigned	1 Group 3	1 - 4
	Integer	Group 5	1 - 15
Type	Unsigned	1 0 = None
	Integer	1 = All Pass
		2 = Low Pass
		3 = High Pass
		4 = Low Shelving
		5 = High Shelving
		6 = Parametric Equalizer
		7 = CD Horn
		8 = Bessel Crossover
		9 = Butterworth Crossover
		10 = Linkwitz-Riley Crossover
		11 = Notch
		(Null to query in text)
Frequency	Unsigned	4 Type 0	0 (Null in text)	Hz
	Float	Type 1 - 6, 8 - 11	20.00 - 20000.00
		Type 7 500.00 - 5000.00
Gain/Slope	Signed Float	2	Type 0 - 3, 7, 11	0 (Null in text) dB /dB perOctave
			Type 4 - 6	-15.00 - 15.00
			Type 8 - 9	12, 18, 24
			Type 10	12, 24
Bandwidth/Subtype	Unsigned	2	Type 0 - 5, 7	0 (Null in text) Octaves /Type
	Float		Type 6, 11	0.05 - 5.00
			Type 8 - 10	2 = Low Pass3 = High Pass

FILTSEL – Filter Select

This command turns on and off the filters.

Command Form: DEVICE FILTSEL [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1	SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1	3, 5 (M, P)

Node Unsigned Integer 1 Group 3 1 - 4

0xFF for all (* text)

Group 5 1 - 15

0xFF for all (* text)

Value Unsigned Integer 1 0 = Off

1 = On 2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

FLOW – Flow Control

This command selects/reports the flow control of the serial port on the unit. Hardware flow control is implemented using DTR and DSR.

Command Form: DEVICE FLOW [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Off

1 = On 2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

FMP – First Mic Priority Mode

This command selects/reports first Mic priority mode.

Command Form: DEVICE FMP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 4 (G)
Value	Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On 2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

GAIN – Gain Adjustment

This command changes or reports back the gain for a channel.
Command Form: DEVICE GAIN [Value] [Absol/Rel]

Argument Type		Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 25, 26 (I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R, K, Z)
Value Signed		2 -99.90 – 99.90 **	dB
	Float	(Null to query in text)
Absol / Rel		0 A = Absolute
		R = Relative
		Null = Relative

NOTE: Values indicate valid range for entry values only. Actual internal range of the gain stage is from -65 to 20. Absolute values will be limited to the internal gain range.

GATE – Gate Status

This command reports the gate status of Mics. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE GATE [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Value	Hexadecimal	4 Bits 0 – 7 represent gate status on Mics 1 – 8 (Null sent in text, Value returned)

GHOLD – Gate Hold Time Adjust

This command selects/reports the setting of hold time.

Command Form: DEVICE GHOLD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 3 (M)
Value Unsigned Float 2 0.10 – 8.00	S
	(Null to query in text)

GMODE – Gating Mode

This command selects/reports the setting of gating mode.

Command Form: DEVICE GMODE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group	1 3 (M)
Value Unsigned Integer	2 1 = Auto
	2 = Manual On
	3 = Manual Off
	(Null to query in text)

GOVER – Gating Override

This command selects/reports the setting of gating override.

Command Form: DEVICE GOVER [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group	1 3 (M)
Value Unsigned Integer	2 0 = Off
	1 = On
	2 = Toggle
	(Null to query in text)

GPIOSTATUS – General Purpose Status

This command sets the state of a General Purpose Status Pin.

Command Form: DEVICE GPIOSTATUS Pin Port [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Pin	Unsigned Integer	1 1 – 24 (Only user definable status pins.
Port	Unsigned Integer	1 1 – 2
Value	Unsigned Integer	2 0 = High 1 = Low 2 = Toggle(NULL to query in text)

GRATIO – Gate Ratio Adjust

This command selects/reports the setting of the gate ratio.

Command Form: DEVICE GRATIO [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group	1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 - 50

dB

(Null to query in text)

GREPORT – Gate Report

This command selects/reports the mode of gate and audio presence status reporting.

Command Form: DEVICE GREPORT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

GRPSEL – Gating Group Select

This command selects/reports which Gating Group a microphone input is assigned.

Command Form: DEVICE GRPSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 13 (M)

Value Channel 2 See 4 (G) in Groups and Channels

(Null to query in text)

HOOK - Hook Flash

This command sends a hook flash. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE HOOK

Argument

Type Size Values

Units

Channel	Channel 1	See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Reserved		2 0

HOOKD – Hook Flash Duration

This command selects/reports the hook flash duration.

Command Form: DEVICE HOOKD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 50 - 2000

Ms

(Multiples of 10 Ms only)

(Null to query in text)

LABEL - Label

This selects/reports the label of the specific channel or the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE LABEL [In/Out] [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values
Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 20,

25, 26

(H, I, J, O, M, G, P, E, L, A, F, S, C, T, R, B,

K, Z)

Input / Output to Unsigned Integer 2 Groups all but 6 0

Matrix

Groups 6 0 = output

1 = input

Label String 20 1 - 20 characters

CLEAR = clear the label

(Null to query in text)

LCDCONTRAST – LCD Contrast

This command selects/reports the LCD Contrast Setting.

Command Form: DEVICE LCDCONTRAST [Value]

Argument Type		Size	Values	Units
Value	Unsigned Integer	4 0 (lightest) – 63 (darkest)(Null to query in text)

LMO – Last Mic On Mode

This command selects/reports last Mic on mode.

Command Form: DEVICE LMO [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Channel	Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	14 (G)
Value	Unsigned Integer	20 = Off
			1 - 8 = Mic 1 – 8 to be the last mic0xFF (* in text) = Last Mic to stay on (Null to query in text)

This command sets or reports back the current value of the local number.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCALNUM [Number]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Channel Channel		1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Reserved		2 0
Number	String	16 1 – 16 Chars of '0' – '9', '*', '#', '(Null to query in text)

LOCBLDG – Location: Building

This command sets/reports the location of the unit: Building string.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCBLDG [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Value	String	80	CLEAR = Clear current value1 – 63 Characters(Null to query in text)

LOCCITY – Location: City

This command sets/reports the location of the unit: City string.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCCITY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 63 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOCCNTRY – Location: Country

This command sets/reports the location country of the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCCNTRY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 63 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOCCOMP – Location: Company

This command sets/reports the location of the unit: Company string.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCCOMP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 63 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOCREGION – Location: Region

This command sets/reports the location of the unit: Region string.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCREGION [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 63 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOCROOM – Location: Room

This command sets/reports the location of the unit: Room string.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCROOM [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 63 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOCSITENAME – Location: Site Argument

This command sets/reports the location of the unit Site name.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCSITENAME [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 64 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOCSTATE – Location: State

This command sets/reports the location of the unit: State/Prefecture string.

Command Form: DEVICE LOCSTATE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 63 Characters

(Null to query in text)

LOGMASK – Device Log Mask

This command sets or reports the device event log mask.

Command Form: DEVICE LOGMASK [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

> Reset

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

> Errors

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

> Password Access

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

> Telco On/Off

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

>Dial

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

> Call Duration

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

> System Checks

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

>Firmware Download

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|(Reserved)

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|| | | > Default

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | :---: (Reserved):

LVL - Level

This command reports the level of a channel. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE LVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 20, 25, 26(I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R, K, Z)
Position	Meter Type	2	SeeMeter Type Definitions
Value	Signed Float 4 -99.99 – 99.99(Sent with Null in text, Value returned)

LVLREPORT – Level Report

This command selects/reports the status of level reporting for the specified channel.

Command Form: DEVICE LVLREPORT [Value]

Argument Type

Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, K, Z

(I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R, K, Z)

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Off (Delete from list being reported)

1 = On (Add to list being reported)

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

LVLREPORTEN – Level Report Enable

Enables level reporting for the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE LVLREPORTEN [Value]

Argument Type

Size

Values

Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Turn off reporting but leave current list

1 = Turn on reporting

2 = Turn off reporting and clear the list

(Null to query in text)

MACRO – Macro Execution/Reporting

This command executes a specified macro or reports the last macro executed.

Command Form: DEVICE MACRO [Value]

Argument Type

Size

Values

Units

Value Channel 4 See 14 (C) in Groups and Channels

(Null to query last macro ran in text)

NOTE: The response will indicate successful execution of the macro, but it does not guarantee that each command in the macro was executed.

MANUFACTURER – Manufacturer Identification Label

This command selects/reports the model identification label of the specified channel.

Command Form: DEVICE MANUFACTURER [Value]

Argument Type		Size	Values	Units
Channel Channel		1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group		1 1, 2, 3, 7(I, O, M, L)
Reserved	Unsigned Integer	2	0
Label	String	16	1-16 charactersCLEAR = clear the label (Null to query in text)	dB

MAX – Maximum Gain Setting

This command changes or reports back the maximum gain setting for an input, output or assignable processing block.

Command Form: DEVICE MAX [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 25, 26 (I, O, M, P, L, F, T, R, K,

Z)

Value Signed Float 2 -65.00 - 20.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

MC - Multi-Channel Mode

This command groups audio controls for channels. Audio Controls include Gain, Ramp Gain, and Mute.

Command Form: DEVICE MC [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values
Channel	Channel 1 1 – n (Max number of channels in Multi-Channel Group divided by 2)
Group	Group	1 128 (No text group)
Multi- Channel	Group	2 Only 23 (J) accepted for now. See GroupAndChannels
Group
Bitmap	Hexadecimal Integer	31 30 ... 15 14 13 12.11.10.09.08.07.06.05.04.03.02.01.00Up to maximum number of channels per group

MCGAIN - Multi-Channel Gain

This command that groups adjusts/reports audio gain of the grouped channels.

Command Form: DEVICE MCGAIN [Value] [Absol/Rel]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 1 – n (Max number of channels in Multi-Channel Group divided by 2)
Group Group 1 128 (No text group)
Multi-	Unsigned	2 Only 23 (J) accepted for now.
Channel	Integer	See GroupAndChannels
Group
Value String	4 -99.90 – 99.90	dB
	(Null to query in text)
Absol./Rel.	0 A = AbsoluteR = RelativeNull = Relative

MCMINMAX - Multi-Channel Min and max Gain Setting

This command changes or reports back the minimum and maximum gain setting for a channel

Command Form: DEVICE MCMINMAX [Value] [Min Max]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels

Group Group 1 128 (No text group)

Multi- Group 2 Only 23 (J) accepted for now.

Channel See GroupAndChannels

Group

Value Signed Short 2 -65.00 – 20.00 dB

(Null to query in text)

Max Signed Short 2 -65.00 – 20.00 dB

MCMUTE – Multi-Channel Min and Max Gain Setting

This command performs/reports audio mutes of the grouped channels.

Command Form: DEVICE MCMUTE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 1 - n (Max number of channels in Multi-Channel

Group divided by 2)

Group Group 1 128 (No text group)

Multi- Group 1 Only 23 (J) accepted for now.

Channel See GroupAndChannels

Group

Value Unsigned Char 10 = Off 1 = On 2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

MCRAMP – Multi-Channel Ramp

This command performs audio gain ramps of the grouped channels. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE MCRAMP

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 1 - n (Max number of channels in Multi-Channel

Group divided by 2)

Group Group 1 128 (No text group)

Multi- Group 2 Only 23 (J) accepted for now.

Channel See GroupAndChannels

Group

Rate Signed Integer 2 -50 - 50 dB /

If value = 0, the ramp will stop. sec

If value < 0, the gain will ramp down.

If value > 0, the gain will ramp up.

Target Signed Integer 2 -65 – 20 dB

If NULL in text or 0x80 in binary, the ramp will use the

channel's maximum and minimum for a target.

MIN – Minimum Gain Setting

This command changes or reports back the minimum gain setting for a channel.

Command Form: DEVICE MIN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 25, 26 (I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R,

K, Z)

Value Signed Float 2 -65.00 - 20.00

(Null to query in text)

dB

MINMAX – Minimum and Maximum Gain Setting

This command changes or reports back the minimum and maximum gain setting for a channel.

Command Form: DEVICE MINMAX [Min Max]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 25, 26 (I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R,

K, Z)

Min

Signed Float 2 -65.00 - 20.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

Max

Signed Float 4 -65.00 - 20.00

dB

MLINE – Mic / Line Coarse Gain Setting

This command selects/reports the setting of coarse gain.

Command Form: DEVICE MLINE [Value]

Argument Type
Size Values
Units

Channel Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group	1 3 (M)
Value Unsigned Integer	2 0 = 0 dB
	7 = 7 dB
	14 = 14 dB
	21 = 21 dB
	28 = 28 dB
	35 = 35 dB
	41 = 41 dB
	50 = 50 dB
	56 = 56 dB
	(Null to query in tex)
	(No other values are)

MMAX – Maximum Number of Microphones

This command selects/reports the maximum number of microphones for a Gating Group.

Command Form: DEVICE MMAX [Value]

Argument Type
Size Values
Units

Channel Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group Group	1 4 (G)
Value Unsigned Integer	2 0 = Unlimited
	1 - 8 = Maximum # of Mics(Null to query in text)

MODEL – Model Identification Label

This command selects/reports the model identification label of the specified channel.

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 1, 2, 3, 7
		(I, O, M, L)
Reserved Unsigned Integer	2	0
Label String 16 1-16 characters
		CLEAR = clear the label (Null to query in text)

MTRX – Matrix Routing

This command selects/reports the matrix routing of an input to an output.

Command Form: DEVICE MTRX [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Source Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Source Group	Group	1 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 12, 17, 25, 26(I, M, P, E, L, F, R, K, Z)
Destination Channel Channel		1 SeeGroups and Channels
Destination Group	Group	1 2, 5, 6, 12, 16, 20, 25, 26(H, J, O, P, E, F, T, B, K, Z)
Value	Unsigned Integer	4 0 = Cross point off1 = Cross point on (Not Valid for Mic Sources)2 = Toggle (Not Valid for Mic Sources)3 = Non Gated (Mic Sources Only)4 = Gated (Mic Sources Only)5 = Pre-AEC (Mic Sources Only)6 = Routing Prohibited (Cross point is off and may not be turned on)(Null to query in text)

MTRXCLEAR – Clear Matrix

Clears the ENTIRE matrix for the unit. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE MTRXCLEAR

No Arguments

MTRXLVL – Matrix Attenuation Adjust

This command selects/reports the matrix level at the cross point.

Command Form:

DEVICE MTRXLVL [Value] [A/R]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Source Channel Channel 1 SeeGroups and Channels
Source Group Group 1 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 12, 17, 25, 26
		(I, M, P, E, L, F, R, K, Z)
Destination Channel Channel 1 SeeGroups and Channels
Destination Group	Group 1 2, 5, 6, 12, 16, 25, 26
		(H, J, O, P, E, F, T, K, Z)
Value	Signed Float	4 -99.00 – 99.00 **	dB
		(Null to query in text)
Absol / Rel		0 A = Absolute
		R = Relative
		Null = Relative

NOTE: Values indicate entry range only. Actual internal range of the matrix attenuation is from -60 to +12dB, and absolute values are limited to the internal gain range.

MUTE – Mute

This command selects/reports the setting of mute on a channel.

Command Form: DEVICE MUTE [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 25, 26 (I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R, K, Z)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

NAME – Unit Name (NETBIOS Name)

This command sets/reports the name of the unit which is also used for its NETBIOS name.

Command Form: DEVICE NAME [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values		Units
Value	String	16	1 – 15 Characters (Null to query in text)

NCD – Noise Cancellation Depth Adjust

This command selects/reports the depth setting of the Noise Cancellation.

Command Form: DEVICE NCD [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 3, 17, 26 (M, R, Z)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2 6 – 15	dB
		(Null to query in text)

NCSEL – Noise Cancellation Select

This command selects/reports the setting of the Noise Cancellation for each microphone channel.

Command Form: DEVICE NCSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 3, 17, 26 (M, R, Z)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

NLP – Non Linear Processing Adjust

This command selects/reports the setting of non-linear processing for each microphone channel.

Command Form: DEVICE NLP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 = Off

1 = Soft

2 = Medium

3 = Aggressive

(Null to query in text)

NOM – Number of Open Microphones Mode

This command selects/reports the setting of Number of Open Microphones (NOM) on output channels.

Command Form: DEVICE NOM [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 2, 16, 25 (J, O, T, K)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

NTPSRV – NTP Network Time Server Address

This command selects/reports the IP addresses of the NTP Time Server the unit's NTP client requests time status from.

Command Form: DEVICE NTPSRV [Value 1 Value 2]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Value 1	IP Address	4 (Null to query in text)
Value 2	IP Address	4

NULL – Null the Telephone Line

This command nulls the telephone line. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE NULL

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel 1	SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group 1	17 (R)

Reserved 2 0

OFFA – Off Attenuation Mode

This command selects/reports the off attenuation value of a Mic channel.

Command Form: DEVICE OFFA [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned 20.00-60.00

Float (Null to query in text)

PAA – PA Adaptive Mode

This command selects/reports PA adaptive mode for the specified Mic.

Command Form: DEVICE PAA [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 13 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

PACEN – PA Softclipper Enable

This command changes enables the softclipper function on a power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PACEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned 20 = Off

Short 1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

PAENERGY – PA Energy-saver mode

This command switches the 36-volt rails off and on for the power amplifier. It is intended to be used for a low power or energy saving mode.

Command Form: DEVICE PAENERGY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned 20 = Energy Saver Mode OFF (Power Amp On)

Short 1 = Energy Saver Mode ON (Power Amp Off)

(Null to query in text)

PAEQEN – PA EQ Filter Enable

This command enables the EQ filter on a PA Channel

Command Form: DEVICE PAEQEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 23 (J)
Value Unsigned	20 = Off
Short	1 = On
	2 = Toggle
	(Null to query in text)

PAEQRST – PA EQ Filter Reset

This command resets the EQ Level for ALL bands in the filter bank. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE PAEQEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group 1 23 (J)
Reserved	Zero	2 Zero

PAEQSET – PA EQ Filter Set

This command sets/reports the EQ Level for a given band in the filter bank

Command Form: DEVICE PAEQEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group 1 23 (J)
Band	Unsigned	2 1 = 32.25 Hz	Hz
	Short	2 = 62.5 Hz
		3 = 125.0 Hz
		4 = 250.0 Hz
		5 = 500.0 Hz
		6 = 1000.0 Hz
		7 = 2000.0 Hz
		8 = 4000.0 Hz
		9 = 8000.0 Hz
		10 = 16000.0 Hz
Value	Signed	4 -12.00 – 12.00	dB
	Float	(Null to query in text)

PAFLT - PA Fault

This indicates one of the power amplifier channels is in a FAULT condition. This is Read-Only, and is automatically generated if a fault occurs.

Command Form: DEVICE PAEQEN [Bitmap]

Argument Type Size Values

Bitmap Hexadecimal Integer 4

31 30 ... 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Frame Sync Fault PA Power Fault UART Fault DSP Memory Fault Amp 2 Fault Amp 1 Fault I2C Fault Fan Controller Fault SPI Fault

PAIMPED – PA Output Impedance

This command selects the output impedance for the PA channel to be either 8 ohms or 70/100V.

Command Form: DEVICE PIAMPED [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned 20 = 8 ohms Short 1 = 70/100V (Null to query in text)

PALEN – PA Limiter Enable

This command changes enables the Limiter on a power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PALEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 23 (J)
Value	Unsigned Short	2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

PALT – PA Limiter Threshold

This command sets the Limiter threshold on a power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PALT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 23 (J)
Value	Signed Float	2 -65.00 to +20.00 (Null to query in text) dB

PANGAT – PA Noise Gate Activation Timer

This command sets the Noise Gate activation timer. The noise gate will be activated if the timer conditions are met along with Gate thresholds.

Command Form: DEVICE PANGAT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 2 1 -16

Minutes

(Null to query in text)

PANGEN – PA Noise Gate Enabled

This command enables noise gating on a PA Channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PANGEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = No Filter

1 = High Pass

2 = Low Pass

3 = Hi and Low Pass

(Null to query in text)

PANGF – PA Noise Gate Filter

This command sets either a High Pass or Low Pass filter to be used in the activation of the noise gate. This will affect the threshold conditions for activation of the gate. A low pass will remove noise floor contributions to gate threshold above 500 HZ. A high pass will remove noise floor contribution to gate threshold above below 2K.

Command Form: DEVICE PANGF [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

PANGM – PA Noise Gate Mode

This command sets the Noise Gate mode to be either manual or automatic. In manual mode the gate threshold will be used to activate. In auto mode the noise floor will be used to activate.

Command Form: DEVICE PANGM [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Automatic

1 = Manual

(Null to query in text)

PANGT – PA Noise Gate Threshold

This command sets the Noise Gate Threshold that will be used when in the manual mode. This represents the level at which the noise gate will activate.

Command Form: DEVICE PANGT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Signed Float 2 -100.00 to 0.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

PAPOL – Polarity Switch

This command changes audio signal polarity on a power amplifier channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PAPOL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Normal

1 = Reverse

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

PARST – PA Reset

This command resets the power supplies on an individual power amplifier circuits. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE PARST [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Reserved Zero

2 Zero

PASME – PA Sound Mask Enable

This command enables the sound mask signal on a PA Channel

Command Form: DEVICE PASME [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Voice Mode

1 = Wideband Mode

(Null to query in text)

PASML – PA Sound Mask Level

This command selects/reports the sound mask level on a PA channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PASML [Amplitude]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Amplitude Signed Short 2 -60.00 - 20.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

PASMM – PA Sound Mask Mode

This command selects/reports the sound mask mode on a PA channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PASMM [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 2 0 = Voice Mode

1 = Wideband Mode

(Null to query in text)

PASMT – PA Sound Mask Timer

This command selects/reports the timer on sound mask signal on a PA channel.

Command Form: DEVICE PASMT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 - 1440 (24 hours)

(Null to query in text)

Minutes

PATO – PA Thermal Overload

This indicates if a thermal overload condition is occurring on one of the power amplifier channels. This is Read-Only, and is automatically generated if a overload occurs.

Command Form: DEVICE PATO [Bitmap]

Argument	Type	Size	Values													Units
Bitmap	Hexadecimal Integer	4	31	30	...	08	07	06	05	04	03	02	01	00
															Fan IC Temp. Overload
															Intake Temp. Overload
															Outlet Temp. Overload
															<Bits 03 - 31 unused>

PBDIAL – Dial a PB Entry by Argument

This command dials a speed dial number by name. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE PBDIAL

Argument	Type Size Values			Units
Channel	Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group 1 17 (R)
Reserved	Unsigned Integer	2 0
Label	String	16	1 – 16 chars

PHONEBOOKADD – Adds an Entry to the Phonebook

This command saves an entry in the phonebook. There is no query for this command. No two entries can share the same label. An argument error will be returned if an entry already exists. To change an entry, you must first delete it and then add it again. If label is blank, the first 20 characters of the number will be used as the label. The Number argument must not be blank. If an entry already exists with the assigned speed dial it will be overwritten. The entries are alphabetized based on Label.

Command Form: DEVICE PHONEBOOKADD

Argument

Type Size Values

Units

Speed Dial Unsigned Integer 4 0 for not assigned to a speed dial

1 - 20

Number String 44 1 - 44 chars '0' - '9', '*', '#'

Label String 16 1 - 16 chars

PHONEBOOKCNT – Counts Entries in the Phonebook

This command queries the number of entries in the phonebook. This command is query only.

Command Form: DEVICE PHONEBOOKCNT

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 40 - 20

PHONEBOOKDEL – Deletes an Entry in the Phonebook

This command deletes an entry in the phonebook. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE PHONEBOOKDEL

Argument Type Size Values Units

Label String 16 1 - 16 chars

PHONEBOOKREAD – Queries the Phonebook by Index

This command queries an entry in the phonebook. This command is query only.

Command Form: DEVICE PHONEBOOKREAD [Speed Number Label]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Index	Unsigned Integer 2 0 – 19 (Must be less than the Number of Phone Book Entries)
Speed Dial	Unsigned Integer 2 0 for not assigned to a speed dial1 – 20(NULL to query in text)
Number	String 44 1 – 44 chars ‘0’ – ‘9’, ‘*’, ‘#’
Label	String 16 1 – 16 chars

PP – Phantom Power

This command selects/reports the setting of phantom power.

Command Form: DEVICE PP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 3 (M)
Value	Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

PRESET – Preset Execution/Reporting

This command selects/reports the state of a preset.

Command Form: DEVICE PRESET [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values		Units
Channel	Channel	1	0 (Binary)/Null (Text) = Query Last Preset RanSeeGroups and Channels

Group Group 1 13 (S)

Value Unsigned Integer 20 = Set preset state to off

1 = Set state to on and execute if not already on

2 = Execute and return state to off

(Null to query current state in text)

PRGSTRING – Program String

This command sets/reports a programmed string.

COMMAND FORM: DEVICE PRGSTRING [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

ID Unsigned Integer 40-7

Value String 80 CLEAR = Clear current value

1 - 80 Chars

(Null to query in text)

Special Characters:

\a = alert

\b = backspace

\f = form feed

\n = new line

\r = carriage return

\t = horizontal tab

\v = vertical tab

\ = backslash

PROXYSTAT – Proxy Registration Status

This command reports the registration status for the primary or secondary proxy. This command is only queried, not set, and can be sent asynchronously.

Command Form: DEVICE PROXYSTAT

Argument Type	Size Values	Units
Index Channel Index	1 0 = Primary Proxy
	1 = Secondary Proxy
Group Group	1 129 (No text group)
Value Signed Float	2 0 = SIP Proxy Disabled
	1 = SIP Proxy Registered
	2 = SIP Proxy NOT Registered

PTTTHRESHOLD – Push to Talk Threshold

This command selects/reports the setting of the push to talk threshold for a microphone.

Command Form: DEVICE PTTTHRESHOLD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values			Units
Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group		1 3 (M)
Value Float		2 -100 to 0	dB
		(Null to query in text)

PUSHTOTALK – Push to Talk

This command selects/reports the setting of push-to-talk for a microphone.

Command Form: DEVICE PUSHTOTALK [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group		1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

RAMP – Ramp Gain Adjustment

This command starts / stops the gain ramp for an input, output or assignable processing block. There is no query associated with this command.

Command Form: DEVICE RAMP [Target]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1	1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 16, 17, 25, 26 (I, J, O, M, P, L, F, T, R, K, Z)
Rate	Signed Integer	1 -50 – 50	If value=0, the ramp will stop.If value< 0, the gain will ramp down.If value>0, the gain will ramp up.	dB / s
Target Signed Integer	1 -65 – 20		If NULL in text or 0x80 in binary, the ramp will use the channel's maximum and minimum for a target.	dB

REDIAL – Redial the Last Number

This command redials the last number. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE REDIAL

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Reserved		2 0

REFSEL – Reference Select for PA Adaptation & AEC

This command selects/reports which output or expansion bus reference is used for a Mic input as a reference for power amp adaptation mode and acoustic echo cancellation where applicable.

Command Form: DEVICE REFSEL [Ref. Group Ref. Channel]

Argument	Type	Size Values		Units
Channel	Channel	1	See 3 (M) inGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 3 (M)
Reference Group Group		1 2, 8, 20 (A, B, E, H, J, O)
Reference Channel	Channel	1	SeeGroups and Channels(Null to query in text)

REFSET – Reference Channel Set Up

This command selects/reports the output the reference channel tracks.

Command Form: DEVICE REFSET [Reference Output]

Argument Type	Size Values		Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 20 (B)
Value	Reference Output	2 0 = noneSee 2 (O) inGroups and Channels(Null to query in text)

RESET – Reset

Resets the unit. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE RESET

No Arguments

RING – Ring Indication

This command indicates a ringing line. This command is reportable only. It cannot be queried or set.

Command Form: DEVICE RING

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 17 (R)
Value Unsigned	20 = Ring Cycle Ended
Integer	1 = Ring Cycle Started

RINGEREN – Audible Ring Enable

This command sends/reports the use of an audible ring.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGEREN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values			Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

RINGERLVL – Audible Ring Level

This command selects/reports the audible ring's level.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGERLVL [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Channel	Channel	1	SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1	17 (R)
Value	Signed Float	2	-12.00 – 12.00 (dB)(Null to query in text)

RINGERSEL – Audible Ring Melody Selection

This command sends/reports the audible ring melody.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGERSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values			Units
Channel	Channel	1 SeeGroups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2 1 – 3(Null to query in text)

RINGERTEST – Audible Ring Melody Test

This command plays the current audible ringer melody. This command is executable only. There is no query.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGERTEST

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0

RINGMOD – Ring Cadence Mode

This command sets the ring cadence to either standard mode or custom mode. The cadence can be set using the RINGON and RINGOFF commands. The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGMOD [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Standard

1 = Custom

(Null to query in text)

RINGOFF – Ring Cadence Off Time

This command sets the ring cadence off time. The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGOFF [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = 80

ms

1 = 128

2 = 256

3 = 384

4 = 512

5 = 640

6 = 768

7 = 896

8 = 1024

(Null to query in text)

RINGON – Ring Cadence On Time

This command sets the ring cadence on time. The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command.

Command Form: DEVICE RINGON [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = 100

ms

1 = 150

2 = 200

3 = 256

4 = 384

5 = 512

6 = 640

7 = 1024

(Null to query in text)

RXBOOST – Receive Boost

This command selects/reports the receive boost status.

Command Form: DEVICE RXBOOST [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0, 3, 6, 9, or 12

dB

(Null to query in text)

RXBSTEN – Receive Boost Enable

This command selects/reports the receive boost status.

Command Form: DEVICE RXBSTEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

SERECHO – Serial Echo

This command selects/reports the serial echo of the RS-232 port.

Command Form: DEVICE SERECHO [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

NOTE: The unit will return the updated state of the last selection in the same form as the command.

SFTYMUTE – Safety Mute

This command selects/reports the state of the safety mute. Safety mute holds all outputs in a muted state. It used for syncing to a site document to avoid feedback or blown speakers until the unit is in a settled state.

Command Form: DEVICE SFTYMUTE [Value]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Units
Value	Channel	4 0 = off
		1 = on
		2 = toggle
		(Null to query in text)

SIGGEN – Signal Generator

This command selects/reports of the signal generator activation.

Command Form: DEVICE SIGGEN [Channel Group Type Amplitude Frequency]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
			(Null to query in text)
Group Group 1 1, 3, 7 (I, M, L)
Type Unsigned Integer 2 1 = Pink Noise
			2 = White Noise
			3 = Tone
Amplitude Signed Float		4 -60.00 – 20.00		dB
Frequency	Unsigned Float	4	Type 1 – 2	0 (Null in text)	Hz
			Type 3	20.00 – 20000.00

SIGGENEN – Signal Generator Enable

This command selects/reports of the signal generator activation.

Command Form: DEVICE SIGGENEN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value	Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Off
	1 = On
	2 = Toggle
	(Null to query in text)

SIGGENSWEEP – Signal Generator Sweep

This command starts the signal generator with a tone and does a sweep. If Repeat is 0, the signal generator will turn off after the sweep. If Repeat is 1, the signal generator will turn off after signal generator timeout. To stop the sweep, send a SIGGENEN command with a 0. During the sweep, the box will send out updated SIGGEN commands.

Command Form:

DEVICE SIGGENSWEEP

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 1, 3, 7 (I, M, L)
Amplitude Signed Float		2 -60.00 – 20.00	dB
Start	Unsigned Float	4 20.00 – 20000.00	Hz
Frequency
End	Unsigned Float	4 20.00 – 20000.00 (must be greater than the start)	Hz
Frequency
Increment	Unsigned Float	4 1.00 – 20000.00	Hz
Frequency
Rate Unsigned Integer 2 10 – 2000 ms			Hz
Repeat	Unsigned Integer 2 0 = repeat off
		1 = repeat on

SIGTOUT – Signal Generator Time Out

Sets the signal generator time out for the unit.

Command Form: DEVICE SIGTOUT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value	Unsigned Integer 4 0 = Disable	Min
	1 - 30
	(Null to query in text)

SLVL – Speech Level Control

This command selects/reports the setting of Speech Level Control.

Command Form: DEVICE SLVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 3 (M)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

SMTPSRV – SMTP Mail Server Address

This command selects/reports the IP address of the SMTP Mail server, and the Email Address the unit's SMTP client sends messages to.

Command Form: DEVICE SMTPSRV [Value Address]

Argument Type		Size	Values	Units
Value	IP Address	4 (Null to query in text)
		(0.0.0.0 Clears IP and String)
Address String		40	1 – 40 characters
			(Null to query in text)

SNMPMNGRIP – SNMP Manager Host IP Address

This command selects/reports the IP address of the SNMP Manager.

Command Form: DEVICE SNMPMNGRIP [Value]

Argument	Type Size	Values	Units
Value	IP Address	4	IP Address of SNMP Manager to send Traps to (Null to query in text)

SNMPMNGRPORT – SNMP Manager Notification Port

This command selects/reports the SNMP Trap port for SNMP Manager.

Command Form: DEVICE SNMPMNGRPORT [Value]

Argument	Type Size Values	Units
Value	Unsigned Integer 4 1-255	(Null to query in text)

SNMPREADCOMM – SNMP Read Community String

This command selects/reports the SNMP read community string.

Command Form: DEVICE SNMPREADCOMM [Value]

Argument	Type	Size	Values	Units
Value	String	30	Read Community validation string (GET data)(Null to query in text: defaults to “public”)

SNMPWRITECOMM – SNMP Write Community String

This command selects/reports the SNMP Write Community String.

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 30 Write Community validation string (SET data)

(Null to query in text: Default = "private")

SPEEDDIAL – Speed Dial a Number

This command dials a speed dial number.

Command Form: DEVICE SPEEDDIAL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17 (R)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2 1 – 20
		(Null to query in text)

STRING – String Execution

This command sends the specified string out the serial port.

Command Form: DEVICE STRING [ID]

Argument Type Size Values
Units

ID

Unsigned Integer

40-7

(Null to query last string in text)

SYSCHECKS – System Checks

Initiates the system checks. There is no query for this command.

The System Check integer bits determine which tests are run. Each bit set generates a separate SYSRESULT response.

COMMAND FORM: DEVICE SYSCHECKS

Argument Type
Size Values

SYSRESULT – System Check Result

This command reports the results of the system check. This command is reportable only. It cannot be queried or set. The System Check integer bits determine which test result will be reported. Each test results in a separate SYSRESULT message.

Argument Type Size Values

Status Unsigned	20 = Fail
Integer	1 = Pass
	2 = NULL <Not Tested or Test Disabled in SYSCONFIG>
Message String 40 For the telephone on hook: the message will report the line voltage, the line current, other results, and if dial tone is detected.
	For the telephone off hook: the message will report the line current, other results, and if dial tone is detected. The bit mask for the other results is
	xxxx xxxx
	| | | | | | | | --> set if switched from CTR21 to FCC because of low current
	| | | | | | | --> set if used DIAL bit while dialing
	| | | | | | --> set if switch from Low Voltage to Japan because of current
	| | | | | --> set if switch from Low Voltage to FCC because of current
	| | | | --> DAA OVL status
	| | | --> DAA DOD status
	| | --> DAA OPD status
	| --> Not used

For the network check: the box will report if no IP address is set. If it is set, the box will ping the gateway. The message will say the ping failed if it is not returned in 5 s. Otherwise, the message will report how many seconds it took to return the ping.

TAMODE – Telco Adapt Mode

This command selects/reports the Telco adapt mode.

Command Form: DEVICE TAMODE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel	Channel	1	See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1	17 (R)
Value	Unsigned Integer	2	0 = Auto1 = Burst(Null to query in text)

TE – Telco Enable

This command selects/reports the hook status.

Command Form: DEVICE TE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

TELCOLVLCTRL – Telco RX Level Control Enable / Disable

This command selects/reports the setting of Telco Rx level control.

Power Amp Temp Check

Command Form: DEVICE TELCOLVLCTRL [Value]

SIP Proxy Registration Status

Argument Type Size Values Units

Packet Loss Statistics

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (T)

Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

TELOVER – Telco Current Overload

This command reports that the Telco circuitry has experienced a current overload that has forced it to go off hook. This condition can occur because of a connection to a Digital PBX, and is done to protect the Telco Circuitry from damage. The command is a notification only, and cannot be set or queried.

Command Form: DEVICE TELOVER

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17 (R)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Not Overloaded

1 = OVERLOADED

TIMELOCALE – Time Locale Settings

This command sets or reports the time locale settings.

Command Form: DEVICE TIMELOCALE [DaylightSavings TimeZone TimeZoneName]

Argument	Type	Size Values	Power Amp Temp CheckPower Amp Fault Check	Units
Daylight Savings	Unsigned Integer	4	0 = Do not use Daylight SavingsSIP Proxy Registration Status1 = Use Daylight SavingsPacket Loss Statistics(NULL to Query in Text)
Time Zone	Unsigned Integer	4	The number of seconds from UDT. (-86400 - 86400)
Time Zone Argument	String	32	Description of time zone

TOUT – Time Out Select

This command selects/reports the inactivity time out before returning to the unit title screen on the front panel.

Command Form: DEVICE TOUT [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 = No Time Out	Min
1 – 15
(Null to query in text)

UID - Unit ID

This command reports the unit id. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE UID [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value Hexadecimal 4 (Sent with a Null, value returned in text)

VER - Version

This command reports the version of the unit. This command is read only.

Command Form: DEVICE VER [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Value String 8 Version of format MM.mm.rr (Sent with a Null in text, value returned)

XAA – Auto Answer Enable/Disable

This command selects/reports the setting of auto answer. This command can be used to replace the AA command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XAA [Value]

Argument	Type Size Values		Units
Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Value	Unsigned Short	2 0 = Off
		1 = On
		2 = Toggle
		(Null to query in text)

XAARINGS – Number of Rings to Auto Answer On

This command selects/reports the setting of the number of rings to auto answer. This command can be used to replace the AARINGS command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XAARINGS [Value]

Argument	Type Size Values		Units
Channel	Channel	1 See Groups and Channels
Group	Group	1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Value	Unsigned Short	2 2-4
		(Null to query in text)

XACONN – Audible Connect / Disconnect Indication

This command selects/reports the status of the audible connect / disconnect indication. This command can be used to replace the ACONN command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XACONN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

XACONNLVL – Audible Connect / Disconnect Level

This command selects/reports the audible connect / disconnect indicator's level. This command can be used to replace the ACONNLVL command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XACONNLVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Signed Short 2 -12.00 - 12.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

XCALLDUR – Call Duration

This command indicates how long a call has lasted. If no call is in session, this will report 0. At the time of call termination, this command will automatically be sent out reporting the duration. This command can be used to replace the CALLDUR command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XCALLERID

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Number	String	44	1-44 Characters
Name	String	44	1-44 Characters

XCALLERID – Reports Caller ID Information

This command reports Caller Identification Information. This command can be used to replace the CALLERID command for the R group. This command is reportable only. It cannot be queried or set.

Command Form: DEVICE XCALLDUR

Argument Type Size Values
Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Reserved	Unsigned Short 2 0
Duration	String	8 String of format HR:MN:SS

XCGROUP – Compressor Group

This command sets the compressor group for synchronized operation of the compressor. This command can be used to replace the CGROUP command for the P group.

Command Form: DEVICE XCGROUP [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 5, 23 (P, J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = None

1 = Group 1

2 = Group 2

3 = Group 3

4 = Group 4

(Null to query in text)

XCOMPRESS – Compressor Adjust

This command controls/reports the signal compression setting on a Channel. This command can be used to replace the COMPRESS command for the P group.

Command Form: DEVICE XCOMPRESS [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J, P)

Value Unsigned Short 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

XCOMPSEL – Compressor Enable

This command enables signal compression on a Channel. This command can be used to replace the COMPSEL command for the P group.

Command Form: DEVICE XCOMPSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 23 (J, P)

Value Unsigned Short 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

XDELAY – Audio Delay

This command controls/reports signal delay on a Channel. This command can be used to replace the DELAY command for the P group.

Command Form: DEVICE XDELAY [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 5, 23 (P, J)

Value Unsigned Short 2 0.0 - 250.00

ms

(Null to query in text)

XDELAYSEL – Audio Delay Enable

This command enables signal delay on a Channel. This command can be used to replace the DELAYSEL command for the P group.

Command Form: DEVICE XDELAYSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values

Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 5, 23 (P, J)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

XDELAYSEL – Audio Delay Enable

This command enables signal delay on a Channel. This command can be used to replace the DELAYSEL command for the P group.

Command Form: DEVICE XDELAYSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 5, 23 (P, J)

Value Unsigned Short 2 0 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

XDIAL – DTMF Dialing

This command dials a DTMF sequence or reports back the last sequence dialed. This command can be used to replace the DIAL command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XDIAL [Number]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Reserved Unsigned Short 20

Number String 44 1 - 44 Chars of '0' - '9', '*', '#',

(Null to query in text)

XDTMFLVL - DTMF Tone Level

This command selects/reports the DTMF tone's level. This command can be used to replace the DTMFLVL command for the R group. You can't change level during a call.

Command Form: DEVICE XDTMFLVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Signed Short 2 -12.00 - 12.00

dB

(Null to query in text)

XDTONELVL – Dial Tone Level

This command selects/reports the audible dial tone's level. This command can be used to replace the DTONELVL command for the R group. You can't change level during a call.

Command Form: DEVICE XDTONELVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Value Signed Short 2 -12.00 – 12.00	dB
(Null to query in text)

XHOOK – Hook Flash

This command sends a hook flash. This command can be used to replace the HOOK command for the R group. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE XHOOK

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Reserved Unsigned Short	2 0

XHOOKD – Hook Flash Duration

This command selects/reports the hook flash duration. This command can be used to replace the HOOKD command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XHOOKD

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels
Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Reserved Unsigned Short	2 50 – 2000	Ms
	(Multiples of 10 Ms only)
	(Null to query in text)

This command sets or reports back the current value of the local number. This command can be used to replace the LOCALNUM command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XLOCALNUM [Number]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)
Reserved Unsigned Short	2 0

Number String 16 1 - 16 Chars of '0' - '9', '*', '#', '

XPBDIAL – Dial a PB Entry by Name

This command dials a speed dial number by name. This command can be used to replace the PBDIAL command for the R group. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE XPBDIAL

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Reserved Unsigned Short 20

Number String 16 1 - 16 Chars

XREDIAL – Dial the last number again

This command redials the last number. This command can be used to replace the REDIAL command for the R group. There is no query for this command.

Command Form: DEVICE XREDIAL

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Reserved Unsigned Short 20

XRING – Ring Indication

This command indicates a ringing line. This command can be used to replace the RING command for the R group. This command is reportable only. It cannot be queried or set.

Command Form: DEVICE XRING

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Ring Cycle Ended 1 = Ring Cycle Started

XRINGEREN – Audible Ring Enable

This command sends/reports the use of an audible ring. This command can be used to replace the RINGEREN command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XRINGEREN [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Off 1 = On 2 = Toggle (Null to query in text)

XRINGERLVL – Audible Ring Level

This command selects/reports the audible ring's level. This command can be used to replace the RINGERLVL command for the R group. You cannot change this value while the phone is ringing.

Command Form: DEVICE XRINGERLVL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 2 -12.00 - 12.00 (dB)

dB

(Null to query in text)

XRINGERSEL – Audible Ring Melody Selection

This command sends/reports the audible ring melody. This command can be used to replace the RINGERSEL command for the R group. You can't change the value while phone is ringing.

Command Form: DEVICE XRINGERSEL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 21-5

(Null to query in text)

XRINGERTEST – Audible Ring Melody Test

This command plays the current audible ringer melody. This command can be used to replace the RINGERTEST command for the R group. This command is executable only. There is no query.

Command Form: DEVICE XRINGERTEST

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Reserved Unsigned Short 20

XSPEEDDIAL – Speed Dialing

This command dials a speed dial number. This command can be used to replace the SPEEDDIAL command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XSPEEDDIAL [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 2 1 - 20

(Null to query in text)

XTE – Telco Enable

This command selects/reports the hook status. This command can be used to replace the TE command for the R group.

Command Form: DEVICE XTE [Value]

Argument Type Size Values Units

Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels

Group Group 1 17, 26 (R, Z)

Value Unsigned Short 20 = Off

1 = On

2 = Toggle

(Null to query in text)

SERIAL COMMAND SUPPORT TABLE

The following table shows serial command support by Converge/Converge Pro device type. Note that telco-related commands only work on models that have telephone interfaces (Converge Pro 880TA, 880T, 840T, TH20); and AEC and NC-related commands do not work with Converge SR 1212 and SR 1212A.

Command Name	Converge Pro 880	Converge Pro 880T	Converge Pro 840T	Converge Pro 8i	Converge Pro TH20	Converge SR 1212	Converge 880TA	Converge SR 1212A	Converge Pro VH20
AA XXXX
AAMB XXXXXX
AARINGS XXXX
ACONN XXXX
ACONNLV XXXX
AD XXXX
ADCLIP XXXXXXXXX	X
ADPRESENT	XXXXXXXXX		XX
AEC	XXXX			X
AGC	XXXXXXXXX		XX
AGCSET	XXXXXXXXX		XX
AMBLVL	XXXXXXXXX
AMXDUET	XXXXXXXXX		XX
AV	XXXXXXXXX		X
AVG							XX
AVR							XX
AVRT							XX
AVT							XX
AUDIOMASTER	XXXXXXXXX		XX
BAUD XXXXXXXXX	X
CALLDUR		XXXX
CALLERID		XXXX
CGROUP	XXXXXXXXX
CHAIRO	XXXXXXXXX
CLEAREFFECT		XXXX
CLOCK	XXXXXXXXX		XX
COMPDLY							XX
COMPDLYEN							XX
COMPRESS	XXXXXXXXX
COMPSEL	XXXXXXXXX
COUNTRY		XXXXX
CTRLMASTER XXX	XXXXXXXXX
DECAY	XXXXXXXXX
DEFAULT	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
DELAY	XXXXXXXXX
DELAYSEL	XXXXXXXXX
DEVICENAME	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
DEVICESUBTYPE	XXXXX	XXXX
DEVICETYPE	XXXXX	XXXX
DFLTM	XXXXX	X				X
DIAG							XX
DIAL		XXXXX
Command Name	Converge Pro 880	Converge Pro 880T	Converge Pro 840T	Converge Pro 81	Converge Pro TH20	Converge SR 1212	Converge 880TA	Converge SR 1212A	Converge Pro VH20
DIDXXXXXXXXX
DTMFLVLXXXX
DTONFLVLXXXX
UPDATEXXXXXXXXX
OVERXXXXXXXXXX
ENETADDRXXXXXXXXX
ENETDHCPXXXXXXXXX
ENETDNSXXXXXXXXX
ENETDNSAXXXXXXXXX
ENETDNSA2XXXXXXXXX
ENETDOMAINXXXXXXXXX
ENETGATE	XXXXXXXXXX
ENETQOSVAL									X
ENETQOSDSCP									X
ENETSUBNXXXXXXXXX
ENETVLAN									X
ENETVLANID									X
ENETVLANPRI									X
EREF	XXXXXXXXX
EVENT	XXXXXXXXXX
FE							XX
FEB							XX
FEDR							XX
FEF							XX
FEG							XX
FEGL							XX
FELD							XX
FEM							XX
FEN							XX
FER							XX
FERRG							XX
FES							XX
FESC							XX
FILTER	XXXXXXXXX
FILTSEL	XXXXXXXXX
FLOW	XXXXXXXXX
FMP	XXXXXXXXX
GAIN	XXXXXXXXX
GATEXXXXXXXXX
GHOLD	XXXXXXXXX
GMODE	XXXXXXXXX
GOVER	XXXXXXXXX
GPIOSTATUSXXXXXXXXX
GRATIO	XXXX		XXX
GREPORT	XXXXXXXXX
GRPSEL	XXXXXXXXX
HOOK	XXXX
Command Name	Converge Pro 890	Converge Pro 880T	Converge Pro 840T	Converge Pro 81	Converge Pro TH20	Converge SR 1212	Converge 880TA	Converge SR 1212A	Converge Pro VH20
HOOKD XXXX
LABEL XXXXXXXXX
LCDCONTRAST XXXXXXXXX
LMO XXXXXXX
LOCALNUM XXXX
LOCBLDG XXXXXXXXX
LOCCITY XXXXXXXXX
LOCCNTRY XXXXXXXXX
LOCCOMP	XXXXXXXXXX
LOCREGION	XXXXXXXXXX
LOCROOM	XXXXXXXXXX
LOCSITENAME	XXXXXXXXXX
LOCSTATE	XXXXXXXX		XXX
LOGMASK	XXXXXXXXXX
LVL	XXXXXXXXXX
LVLREPORT	XXXXXXXXXX
LVLREPORTEN	XXXXXXXX		XXX
MACRO	XXXXXXXXXX
MANUFACTURER	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
MAX	XXXXXXXXXX
MC							XX
MCGAIN							XX
MCMINMAX							XX
MCMUTE							XX
MCRAMP							XX
MIN	XXXXXXXXXX
MINMAX	XXXXXXXXXX
MLINE XXXXXXX
MMAX	XXXXXXXX
MODEL	XXXXXXXXXX
MTRX	XXXXXXXXXX
MTRXCLEAR	XXXXXXXXXX
MTRXLVL	XXXXXXXXXX
MUTE	XXXXXXXXXX
NAME	XXXXXXXXXX
NCD XXXXXXX		X
NCSEL	XXXXXXXX			X
NLP	XXXX			XX
NOM	XXXXXXXX
NTPSRV	XXXXXXXXXX
NULL		XXXXX
OFFA	XXXXXXXX
PAA	XXXXXXXX
PACEN							XX
PAENERGY							XX
PAEQEN							XX
PAEQRST							XX
Command Name	Converge Pro 880	Converge Pro 880T	Converge Pro 840T	Converge Pro 81	Converge Pro TH20	Converge SR 1212	Converge 880TA	Converge SR 1212A	Converge Pro VH20
PAEQSET X X
PAFLT X X
PAIMPED X X
PALEN X X
PALT X X
PANGAT X X
PANGEN X X
PANGF X X
PANGM X X
PANGT X X
PAPOL X X
PARST X X
PASME X X
PASML X X
PASSM							XX
PASMT X X
PATO							XX
PBDIAL		X	X		X		X		X
PHONEBOOKADD		X	X		X		X		X
PHONEBOOKCNT		X	X		X		X		X
PHONEBOOKDEL		X	X		X		X		X
PHONEBOOKREAD		X	X		X		X		X
PP	X	X	X	X		X	X	X
PRESET	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
PRGSTRING	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
PROXYSTAT									X
PTTTHRESHOLD	X	X	X	X			X	X
PUSHTOTALK	X	X	X	X			X	X
RAMP	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
REDIAL		X	X		X		X	X
REFSEL	X	X	X	X		X	X	X
REFSET	X	X	X	X		X	X	X	X
RESET	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
RING		X	X		X		X
RINGEREN		X	X		X		X
RINGERLYL		X	X		X		X
RINGERSEL		X	X		X		X
RINGERTEST		X	X		X		X
RINCMOD		X	X		X		X
RINGOFF		X	X		X		X
RINGON		X	X		X		X
RXBOOST		X	X		X		X
RXBSTEN		X	X		X		X
SERTCHO	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
SFTYMUTE	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
SIGGEN	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
SIGGENEN	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X	X
SIGGENSweep XXXXXXXXX
SIGTOUT XXXXXXXXX
SLVL XXXXXXXX
SMTPSV XXXXXXXXX
SNMPMNGRIP XXXXXXXXX
SNMPMNGRFORT XXXXXXXXX
SNMPREADCOMM XXXXXXXXX
SNMPWRITECOMM XXXXXXXXX
SPEEDDIAL XXXX
STRING	XXXXXXXXXX
SYSCHECKS	XXXXXXXXXX
SYSRESULT	XXXXXXXXXX
TAMODE		XXXX
TE		XXXX
TELCOLVLCTRL		XXXX
TELOVER		XXXX
TIMELOCALE XXXXXXXXX
TOUT	XXXXXXXXXX
UID	XXXXXXXXXX
VER	XXXXXXXXXX
XAA		XXXX		X
XAARINGS		XXXX		X
XACONN		XXXX		X
XACONNLVL		XXXX		X
XACALLDUR		XXXX		X
XACALLERID		XXXX		X
XCGROUP	XXXXXXXXXX
XCOMPRESS XXXXXXXXX
XCOMPSEL	XXXXXXXXXX
XDELAY	XXXXXXXXXX
XDELAYSEL	XXXXXXXXXX
XDIAL		XXXX		X
XDTMFLVL		XXXX		X
XDTONETLVL		XXXX		X
XHOOK		XXXX		X
XHOOKD		XXXX		X
XLQCALNUM		XXXX		X
XPDIAL		XXXX		X
XREDIAL		XXXX		X
XRING		XXXX		X
XRINGEREN		XXXX		X
XRINGERLVL		XXXX		X
XRINGERSEL		XXXX		X
XRINGERTEST		XXXX		X
XSPEEDDIAL		XX		XX		X
XTE		X	X		X		X		X

ALL MODELS: RS-232 PORT CONNECTING WITH TELNET

Users can connect to any unit via RS-232 and telnet. Available telnet commands are the same as those used in the Serial Command section of this appendix.

How to Connect with Telnet:

Use the telnet client of your choice• Telnet uses port 23•

• The user name and password are the same as used by Console. The default username is clearone and the default password is converge. These are not case sensitive.
• The telnet session will time out after 15 minutes of no receive data. A heart beat to keep the session alive will need to be used. ClearOne recommends using the VER command to establish a heart beat in order to keep the session alive.

ALL MODELS: RS-232 PORT

Pin # User Definable Control
1 N DCD
2 N TXD
3 N RXD
4 N DTR
5 N Ground
6 N DSR
7 N CTS
8 N RTS
9 N No connection

NOTE: To avoid communication errors, ClearOne recommends using all nine pins when connecting to the RS-232 port.

APPENDIX B: DEFAULT PINOUTS

CONTROL/STATUS PORTS

Converge Pro 880: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input)
2 Y Status (Output)
3 Y Control (Input) Mute All Mics Toggle
4 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute All Mics
5 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 9 Toggle
6 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 9
7 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 10 Toggle
8 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 10
9 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 11 Toggle
10 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 11
11 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 12 Toggle
12 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 12
13 Y Control (Input) Volume Up Output 1 (1 dB)
14 Y Status (Output)
15 Y Control (Input) Volume Down Output 1 (1 dB)
16 Y Status (Output)
17 N Status (Output) Microphone 1 Gate Status
18 N Status (Output) Microphone 2 Gate Status
19 N Status (Output) Microphone 3 Gate Status
20 N Status (Output) Microphone 4 Gate Status
21 N Status (Output) Microphone 5 Gate Status
22 N Status (Output) Microphone 6 Gate Status
23 N Status (Output) Microphone 7 Gate Status
24 N Status (Output) Microphone 8 Gate Status
25 NA NA Ground

Converge Pro 880T: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input)
2 Y Status (Output)
3 Y Control (Input) Mute All Mics Toggle
4 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute All Mics
5 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 9 Toggle
6 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 9
7 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 10 Toggle
8 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 10
9 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 11 Toggle
10 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 11
11 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 12 Toggle
12 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 12
13 Y Control (Input) Toggle Telco On/Off
14 Y Status (Output) Telco Toggle Status (On/Off)
15 Y Control (Input)
16 Y Status (Output)
17 N Status (Output) Microphone 1 Gate Status
18 N Status (Output) Microphone 2 Gate Status
19 N Status (Output) Microphone 3 Gate Status
20 N Status (Output) Microphone 4 Gate Status
21 N Status (Output) Microphone 5 Gate Status
22 N Status (Output) Microphone 6 Gate Status
23 N Status (Output) Microphone 7 Gate Status
24 N Status (Output) Microphone 8 Gate Status
25 NA NA Ground

Converge Pro 840T: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input)
2 Y Status (Output)
3 Y Control (Input) Mute All Mics Toggle
4 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute All Mics
5 Y Control (Input) Telco On/Off Toggle
6 Y Status (Output) Status of Telco On/Off
7 Y Control (Input) Auto Answer Toggle
8 Y Status (Output) Status of Auto Answer
9 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 5 Toggle
10 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 5
11 Y Control (Input) Mute Input 5 Toggle
12 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Input 5
13 Y Control (Input) Volume Up Output 8 (1 dB)
14 Y Status (Output)
15 Y Control (Input) Volume Down Output 8 (1 dB)
16 Y Status (Output)
17 N Status (Output) Microphone 1 Gate Status
18 N Status (Output) Microphone 2 Gate Status
19 N Status (Output) Microphone 3 Gate Status
20 N Status (Output) Microphone 4 Gate Status
21 Y Status (Output)
22 Y Status (Output)
23 Y Status (Output)
24 Y Status (Output) Ring Indication
25 NA NA Ground

Converge Pro 8i: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input)
2 Y Status (Output)
3 Y Control (Input) Mute All Mics Toggle
4 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute All Mics
5 Y Control (Input) Mute Mic 1 Toggle
6 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Mic 1
7 Y Control (Input) Mute Mic 2 Toggle
8 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Mic 2
9 Y Control (Input) Mute Mic 3 Toggle
10 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Mic 3
11 Y Control (Input) Mute Mic 4 Toggle
12 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Mic 4
13 Y Control (Input) Mute Mic 5 Toggle
14 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Mic 5
15 Y Control (Input) Mute Mic 6 Toggle
16 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Mic 6
17 N Status (Output) Microphone 1 Gate Status
18 N Status (Output) Microphone 2 Gate Status
19 N Status (Output) Microphone 3 Gate Status
20 N Status (Output) Microphone 4 Gate Status
21 N Status (Output) Microphone 5 Gate Status
22 N Status (Output) Microphone 6 Gate Status
23 N Status (Output) Microphone 7 Gate Status
24 N Status (Output) Microphone 8 Gate Status
25 NA NA Ground

Converge Pro TH20: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User	Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input) Telco On
2 Y Status (Output) Telco On Indicator
3 Y Control (Input) Telco Off
4 Y Status (Output) Telco off indicator
5 Y Control (Input)
6 Y Status (Output)
7 Y Control (Input)
8 Y Status (Output)
9 Y Control (Input) Transmit Mute
10 Y Status (Output) Transmit Mute status
11 Y Control (Input) Receive Mute
12 Y Status (Output) Receive mute status
13 Y Control (Input)
14 Y Status (Output)
15 Y Control (Input)
16 Y Status (Output)
17 Y Status (Output)
18 Y Status (Output)
19 Y Status (Output)
20 Y Status (Output)
21 Y Status (Output)
22 Y Status (Output)
23 Y Status (Output)
24 Y Status (Output) Ring Indication
25 NA NA Ground

Converge Pro VH20: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User	Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input) Telco On
2 Y Status (Output) Telco On Indicator
3 Y Control (Input) Telco Off
4 Y Status (Output) Telco off indicator
5 Y Control (Input)
6 Y Status (Output)
7 Y Control (Input)
8 Y Status (Output)
9 Y Control (Input) Transmit Mute
10 Y Status (Output) Transmit Mute status
11 Y Control (Input) Receive Mute
12 Y Status (Output) Receive mute status
13 Y Control (Input)
14 Y Status (Output)
15 Y Control (Input)
16 Y Status (Output)
17 Y Status (Output)
18 Y Status (Output)
19 Y Status (Output)
20 Y Status (Output)
21 Y Status (Output)
22 Y Status (Output)
23 Y Status (Output)
24 Y Status (Output) Ring Indication
25 NA NA Ground

Converge SR 1212: Port A (Female DB-25)

Pin # User Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 Y Control (Input)
2 Y Status (Output)
3 Y Control (Input) Mute All Mics Toggle
4 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute All Mics
5 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 9 Toggle
6 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 9
7 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 10 Toggle
8 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 10
9 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 11 Toggle
10 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 11
11 Y Control (Input) Mute Output 12 Toggle
12 Y Status (Output) Status of Mute Output 12
13 Y Control (Input) Volume Up Output 1 (1 dB)
14 Y Status (Output)
15 Y Control (Input) Volume Down Output 1 (1 dB)
16 Y Status (Output)
17 N Status (Output) Microphone 1 Gate Status
18 N Status (Output) Microphone 2 Gate Status
19 N Status (Output) Microphone 3 Gate Status
20 N Status (Output) Microphone 4 Gate Status
21 N Status (Output) Microphone 5 Gate Status
22 N Status (Output) Microphone 6 Gate Status
23 N Status (Output) Microphone 7 Gate Status
24 N Status (Output) Microphone 8 Gate Status
25 NA NA Ground

All Models: Port B (Female DB-25)

Pin # User Definable Control/Status Default Description
1 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 0
2 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 0
3 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 1
4 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 1
5 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 2
6 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 2
7 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 3
8 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 3
9 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 4
10 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 4
11 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 5
12 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 5
13 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 6
14 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 6
15 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 7
16 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 7
17 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 8
18 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 8
19 N Control (Input) Preset Mask Bit 9
20 N Status (Output) Preset Indicator Bit 9
21 Y Control (Input)
22 Y Status (Output)
23 NA NA +3.3V 300 mA
24 NA NA +3.3V 300 mA
25 NA NA Ground

ALL MODELS: RS-232 PORT

Pin # User Definable Control
1 N DCD
2 N TXD
3 N RXD
4 N DTR
5 N Ground
6 N DSR
7 N CTS
8 N RTS
9 N No connection

NOTE: To avoid communication errors, ClearOne recommends using all nine pins when connecting to the RS-232 port.

APPENDIX C: FIRMWARE LOADING PROCEDURE

The 3.X versions of Converge Console offer significant upgrades from previous versions. ClearOne strongly encourages users to upgrade all firmware to the latest release version.

Converge Console detects the version of the Site's current firmware and determines whether or not it requires a firmware upgrade. If the connected Site contains units that are Version 3.X, they must be remove from the expansion bus prior to performing the firmware upgrade. Please follow the steps below to upgrade your Firmware:

Step 1: Remove any 2.X and 3.X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 1.X units.

Step 2: Re-connect to the 1.X stack with Console.

Step 3: Download the 2.X firmware file to the stack of units.

Step 4: The units will default and reboot after the download of 3.X firmware. The 1.X to 3.X upgrade requires the firmware to be loaded twice to complete the version upgrade.

Step 5: Reconnect to the stack with Console. Download 3.X a second time to the units. The units will reboot.

Step 6: Units are fully upgraded

Step 7: Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel.

Step 8: Remove any 3.X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 2.X units.

Step 9: Re-connect to the 2.X stack with Console

Step 10: Download the 3.X firmware file to the stack of units

Step 11: Units are fully upgraded

Step 12: Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel

APPENDIX C: SPECIFICATIONS

CONVERGE PRO 880

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting) Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Noise (EIN): -126 dBu, 22 kHz BW, max gain, Rs=150 Ω• THD+N: <0.02%• Dynamic Range: >100 dB (non A-weighted)• Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Auto Mixer Features

Number of Open Microphones (NOM) • PA Adaptive Mode • First Mic Priority Mode • Last Mic Mode • Maximum # of Mics Mode • Ambient Level • Gate Threshold Adjust • Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate

Matrix Mixing Features

• 36x36 matrix
  • 12 analog in/out
  • 12 expansion bus in/out
  8 assignable processing blocks in/out
  • 4 assignable fader blocks in/out

Assignable Processing Blocks

• Filters
  » All pass
  » Low pass
  » High pass
  » Low shelving
  » High shelving
  » Parametric EQ
  » Notch
  » CD Horn
• Crossovers
  » Bessel
  » Butterworth
  » Linkwitz-Riley
• Compressor
  • Delay; adjustable up to 250 ms

Assignable Fader Blocks

- Gain/Mute

Microphone Input Configuration

• Input Gain Adjust
• Mic or Line Level
  Phantom Power on/off•
• Echo Cancellation on/off
• Noise Cancellation on/off
• Filters
  » All Pass

» Low Pass

» High Pass

» Notch

» PEQ

- Mute on/off

• Chairman Override on/off

- AGC on/off

• Automatic Level Control on/off

• Auto Gate/Manual gate

• Adaptive Ambient on/off

- Pre AEC channel

Mic/Line Inputs 1-8

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
• Impedance: < 10 KΩ
• Nominal Level: adjustable -56 dBu to 0 dBu (7 dB step coarse gain adjustment)
  • Maximum Level: -65 dBu to +20 dBu
• Echo Cancellation: 130 ms tail time (works with 12 dB of room gain)
• Noise Cancellation: 6–15 dB attenuation
  • Phantom Power: 24 V, selectable

Line Inputs 9-12

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
• Impedance: < 10 KΩ
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Outputs 1-12

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced
• Impedance: < 50
• Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Expansion Bus In/Out

• Proprietary Network
• RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps
• CAT-5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length
- Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)
• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port
• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port
- RJ-45 Connectors

Ethernet

RS-232

• Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not supported on RS-232 port)
• DB-9 female
• 9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
  • Hardware flow control on (default)/off

USB

• Version 2.0 compatible
- Type: B-connector

CONVERGE PRO 880 (continued)

Control/Status Ports

DB-25 female A/B (2)

Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground) •

Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each

+3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

Converge™ Console

Power Input Range

Auto-Adjusting•

100–240 VAC; 50/60 Hz•

Power Consumption

30 W Typical

Dimensions (L x D x H)

17.25" × 10.25" × 1.75"

43.8 x 26 x 4.5 cm

Weight

7.5 lbs/3.3375 kg unit weight

12 lbs/5.4kg shipping weight•

Operating Temperature

14^ / - 10^ to 122^ / 50^ ambient unit temperature

Approvals

• See Appendix D: Compliance
• AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections
—Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

910-151-880 Converge Pro 880

8-Channel AEC Microphone Mixer

CONVERGE PRO 880T

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting) Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Noise (EIN): -126 dBu, 22 kHz BW, max gain, Rs-150 Ω THD+N: <0.02% Dynamic Range: >100 dB (non A-weighted) Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Auto Mixer Features

Number of Open Microphones (NOM) •

PA Adaptive Mode•

First Mic Priority Mode•

Last Mic Mode•

Maximum # of Mics Mode•

Ambient Level•

Gate Threshold Adjust

Off Attenuation Adjust•

- Hold Time

- Decay Rate

Matrix Mixing Features

• 37x38 matrix
  • 12 analog in/out
  • 12 expansion bus in/out
  8 assignable processing blocks in/out•

• 4 assignable fader blocks in/out

• 1 10W speaker amplifier

• 1 telco input/1 telco output

Assignable Processing Blocks

• Filters
  » All pass
  » Low pass
  » High pass
  » Low shelving
  » High shelving
  » Parametric EQ
  » Notch
  » CD Horn

- Crossovers

» Bessel

» Butterworth

» Linkwitz-Riley

- Compressor

• Delay; adjustable up to 250 ms

Assignable Fader Blocks

- Gain/Mute

Microphone Input Configuration

• Input Gain Adjust
• Mic or Line Level
  Phantom Power on/off•
• Echo Cancellation on/off
• Noise Cancellation on/off
• Filters

» All Pass

» Low Pass

» High Pass

» Notch

» PEQ

- Mute on/off

• Chairman Override on/off

• AGC on/off
  • Automatic Level Control on/off
  • Auto Gate/Manual gate
  • Adaptive Ambient on/off
• Pre AEC channel

Mic/Line Inputs 1-8

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
• Impedance: < 10 KΩ
• Nominal Level: adjustable -56 dBu to 0 dBu (7 dB step coarse gain adjustment)
  • Maximum Level: -65 dBu to +20 dBu
• Echo Cancellation: 130 ms tail time (works with 12 dB of room gain)
• Noise Cancellation: 6–15 dB attenuation
  • Phantom Power: 24 V, selectable

Line Inputs 9-12

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
• Impedance: < 10 KΩ
  • vNominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Outputs 1-12

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced
• Impedance: < 50
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Amplifier Output

• Binding Post Connection
• 10 Watts @ 4 Ω Impedance
THD + Noise: < 0.5%

Telco Line

• RJ-11
• POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog extension from a PBX
  • A-lead supervision provided

Telco Set

• RJ-11
- POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog extension from a PBX
• A-lead supervision provided

Telephone Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled

• Frequency Response: 250Hz to 3.3 kHz ±1dB

• THD+N: <0.3% re-max level 250 Hz to 3.3 kHz

• SNR: > 62 dB re-max level

Telco Line Echo Cancellation

• Tail Time: 31 ms
  • Null: 55 dB nominal

Telephone Noise Cancellation

- Noise Cancellation 6-15 dB attenuation

Expansion Bus In/Out

• Proprietary Network
  • RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps
  • CAT-5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length

CONVERGE PRO 880T (continued)

Ethernet

Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)

10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port•

10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port•

RJ-45 Connectors

RS-232

Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not •

supported on RS- 232 port)

DB-9 female•

9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, •

1 stop bit, no parity

Hardware flow control on (default)/off•

USB

Version 2.0 compatible

Type: B-connector•

Control/Status Ports

DB-25 female A/B (2) •

Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground)

Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each

• +3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

- Converge™ Console

Power Input Range

- Auto-Adjusting

• 100–240 VAC; 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

30 W Typical

Dimensions (L x D x H)

- 17.25" x 10.25" x 1.75"

43.8 x 26 x 4.5 cm

Weight

• 7.5 lbs/3.3375 kg unit weight

• 12 lbs/5.4kg shipping weight

Operating Temperature

14^ / - 10^ to 122^ / 50^ ambient unit temperature

Approvals

• See Appendix D: Compliance

- AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections —Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

910-151-881 Converge Pro 880T

8-Channel AEC Microphone Mixer with Telephone Hybrid and

10W Amplifier

CONVERGE PRO 880TA

Audio Performance:

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed from 20 HZ to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting)

Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22kHz +- 1 dB

Noise(EIN): -126 dBu, 20 kHz BW, max Gain• Rs= 150 ohm•

THD+ Noise: <.02%•

Dynamic Range: >105 dB (non A weighted) •

Crosstalk: <91 db re 20dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel.

Audio Mixer Parameters

• Number of Open Microphones

PA Adaptive Mode•

First Mic Priority Mode•

Maximum # of Mics*

Ambient Level

Gate Threshold Adjust•

Off Attenuation Adjust•

Hold Time•

Decay Rate•

• Chairman Override
  • 96 Total Microphones per site
  • 6- Global Gating Groups
  • 4- Internal Gating Groups

Matrix Mixing Parameters

• 8- Microphone Analog Inputs
• 4- Analog Line Inputs 8-Analog Line Outputs
• 4- Power Amplifier Outputs
• 18- Expansion Bus in/out
- 8- Processing Blocks

Assignable Processing Blocks

- Filters:

Delay up to 250 msec*

Power Amplifier Output Processing

• Feedback Elimination w/ ring cancellation
  • 10-band EQ filter
  • 4- node filter bank for crossover
• Delay Block
• Compressor/Limiter
• Noise Gate for Hiss Control
  • Sound Masking Generator per channel
  • Adaptive Volume Control
  • Multi Channel Control

Microphone Processing

- 4-node filter bank

AGC/.ALC

Power Amplifier

• Channels: 4
  • Amplifier Output: 35-Watt into 8 ohm
  • Impedence: Selectable 8ohm, 70V, 100 V
  • THD+ Noise: <.2% (1/3 Power)

• Crosstalk: <-68dB

Telco Line Port

• RJ-11 POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog PBX extension
  • A-lead supervision provided

Telco Set Port

• Pass-though RJ-11 analog jack

Telephone Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and

• Receive ALC disabled
  • Frequency Response: 250Hz to 3.3 kHz ±1dB
  • THD+N: <0.3% re-max level 250 Hz to 3.3 kHz
  • SNR: > 62 dB re-max level

Telco Line Echo Cancellation

• Tail Time: 31ms
  • Null: 55 dB nominal

Telephone Noise Cancellation

- Noise Cancellation 6-15 dB attenuation

Expansion Bus

• Connection: CAT 5, RJ45
  Mix Minus Structure*
  • 18 Audio Buses
• 6 Gating Buses
  • 8 PA Reference Buses

Network

• 10/100 Auto Switching (PC and Network Port)
- HTTP Server
- Telnet Client
- SNMP Agent
- SNTP Client
• DNS
• DHCP

RS-232

• DB-9
- 9.6k - 115k baud
• 8/1/0
• Hardware Flow Control

USB

• 2.0 Compatible
- Type B connector

GPIO

• DB 25 female (A/B)
• Inputs: Active Low
  • Outputs: Open Collector, 40Vdc, 40 mA

Power

• 100-240VAC; 50/60 Hz,
• 300 Watts (maximum)

Environmental

• Operating temperature:
  • 32-122 degrees F

Humidity:

• 15 to 80%

Mechanical

• Dimensions: 2RU
  • 3.5" H x 17.25" W x 15.92" D
  • Weight: < 30 lbs.

Compliance

EMC- FCC Part 15 Class A•

EMI - EN55024 •

Safety - IEC60950, CSA, CCC

Class 2 Wiring Required

CONVERGE PRO 840T

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting) Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Noise (EIN): -126 dBu, 20 kHz BW, max gain, Rs-150 Ω THD+N: <0.02% Dynamic Range: >100 dB (non A-weighted) Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Auto Mixer Features

Number of Open Microphones (NOM) •

PA Adaptive Mode•

First Mic Priority Mode•

Last Mic Mode•

Maximum # of Mics Mode•

Ambient Level•

Gate Threshold Adjust

Off Attenuation Adjust•

- Hold Time

- Decay Rate

Matrix Mixing Features

• 29x30 matrix
• 8 analog in/out
  • 1 speaker out (amplified)
  • 12 expansion bus in/out
  4 assignable processing blocks in/out
  • 4 assignable fader blocks in/out
• 1 telco in/out

Assignable Processing Blocks

• Filters
  » All pass
  » Low pass
  » High pass
  » Low shelving
  » High shelving
  » Parametric EQ
  » Notch
  » CD Horn

- Crossovers

» Bessel

» Butterworth

» Linkwitz-Riley

- Compressor

• Delay; adjustable up to 250 ms

Assignable Fader Blocks

- Gain/Mute

Microphone Input Configuration

• Input Gain Adjust
• Mic or Line Level
  Phantom Power on/off•
• Echo Cancellation on/off
• Noise Cancellation on/off
• Filters

» All Pass

» Low Pass

» High Pass

» Notch

» PEQ

- Mute on/off

• Chairman Override on/off

• AGC on/off
  • Automatic Level Control on/off
  • Auto Gate/Manual gate
  • Adaptive Ambient on/off
• Pre AEC channel

Mic/Line Inputs 1-4

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
  • Impedance: < 10 KΩ
• Nominal Level: adjustable -56 dBu to 0 dBu (7 dB step coarse gain adjustment)
  • Maximum Level: -65 dBu to +20 dBu
• Echo Cancellation: 130 ms tail time (works with 12 dB of room gain)
• Noise Cancellation: 6–15 dB attenuation
• Phantom Power: 24 V, selectable

Line Inputs 5-8

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
• Impedance: < 10 KΩ
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Outputs 1-8

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced
• Impedance: < 50
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Amplifier Output

• Binding Post Connection

• 10 Watts @ 4 Ω Impedance

THD + Noise: < 0.5%

Telco Line

• RJ-11
• POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog extension from a PBX
  • A-lead supervision provided

Telco Set

• RJ-11
- POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog extension from a PBX
• A-lead supervision provided

Telephone Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled

• Frequency Response: 250Hz to 3.3 kHz ±1dB

• THD+N: <0.3% re-max level 250 Hz to 3.3 kHz

• SNR: > 62 dB re-max level

Telco Line Echo Cancellation

• Tail Time: 31 ms
  • Null: 55 dB nominal

Telephone Noise Cancellation

• Noise Cancellation 6-15 dB attenuation

Expansion Bus In/Out

• Proprietary Network
  • RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps
• CAT-5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length

CONVERGE PRO 840T (continued)

Ethernet

Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)

10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port•

10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port•

RJ-45 Connectors

RS-232

Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not •

supported on RS- 232 port)

DB-9 female•

9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, •

1 stop bit, no parity

Hardware flow control on (default)/off

USB

Version 2.0 compatible

Type: B-connector•

Control/Status Ports

DB-25 female A/B (2) •

Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground) •

Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each

• +3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

- Converge™ Console

Power Input Range

- Auto-Adjusting

• 100–240 VAC; 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

30 W Typical

Dimensions (L x D x H)

- 17.25" x 10.25" x 1.75"

43.8 x 26 x 4.5 cm

Weight

• 7.5 lbs/3.3375 kg unit weight

• 12 lbs/5.4kg shipping weight

Operating Temperature

14° F/-10° C to 122° F/50° C ambient unit temperature

Approvals

• See Appendix D: Compliance

- AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections —Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

910-151-840 Converge Pro 840T

4-Channel AEC Microphone Mixer with Telephone Hybrid and

10W Amplifier

CONVERGE PRO 8I

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting) Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Noise (EIN): -126 dBu, 20 kHz BW, max gain, Rs-150 Ω THD+N: <0.02% Dynamic Range: >100 dB (non A-weighted) Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Auto Mixer Features

Number of Open Microphones (NOM) •

PA Adaptive Mode•

First Mic Priority Mode•

Last Mic Mode•

Maximum # of Mics Mode•

Ambient Level•

Gate Threshold Adjust

Off Attenuation Adjust•

- Hold Time

- Decay Rate

Matrix Mixing Features

- 36x24 matrix

• 12 analog in/out

• 12 expansion bus in/out

8 assignable processing blocks in/out•

• 4 assignable fader blocks in/out

Assignable Processing Blocks

- Filters

» All pass

» Low pass

» High pass

» Low shelving

» High shelving

» Parametric EQ

» Notch

» CD Horn

- Crossovers

» Bessel

» Butterworth

» Linkwitz-Riley

- Compressor

• Delay; adjustable up to 250 ms

Assignable Fader Blocks

- Gain/Mute

Microphone Input Configuration

- Input Gain Adjust

- Mic or Line Level

Phantom Power on/off•

- Echo Cancellation on/off

- Noise Cancellation on/off

- Filters

» All Pass

» Low Pass

» High Pass

» Notch

» PEQ

- Mute on/off

• Chairman Override on/off

- AGC on/off

• Automatic Level Control on/off

• Auto Gate/Manual gate

- Adaptive Ambient on/off

- Pre AEC channel

Mic/Line Inputs 1-8

- Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging

- Impedance: < 10 K

- Nominal Level: adjustable -56 dBu to 0 dBu (7 dB step coarse gain adjustment)

• Maximum Level: -65 dBu to +20 dBu

- Echo Cancellation: 130 ms tail time (works with 12 dB of room gain)

- Noise Cancellation: 6–15 dB attenuation

• Phantom Power: 24 V, selectable

Line Inputs 9-12

- Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging

- Impedance: < 10 KΩ

- Nominal Level: 0 dBu

• Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Expansion Bus In/Out

- Proprietary Network

• RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps

• CAT-5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length

Ethernet

• Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)

• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port

• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port

- RJ-45 Connectors

RS-232

- Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not supported on RS-232 port)

- DB-9 female

- 9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity

• Hardware flow control on (default)/off

USB

• Version 2.0 compatible

- Type B connector

Control/Status Ports

• DB-25 female A/B (2)

- Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground)

• Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each

• +3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

- Converge Console

Power Input Range

Auto-Adjusting

• 100–240 VAC; 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

- 30 W Typical

Dimensions (L x D x H)

- 17.25" x 10.25" x 1.75"

- 43.8 x 26 x 4.5 cm

CONVERGE PRO 8I (CONTINUED)

Weight

7.5 lbs/3.3375 kg unit weight

12 lbs/5.4 kg shipping weight

Operating Temperature

14° F/-10° C to 122° F/50° C ambient unit temperature

Approvals

See • Appendix D: Compliance AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections • —Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

910-151-810 Converge Pro 8i 8-Channel AEC Microphone Mixer (no outputs)

CONVERGE PRO TH20

Telephone Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled Frequency Response: 250Hz to 3.3 kHz ±1dB THD + N: <0.3% re-max level 250 Hz to 3.3 kHz SNR: >62 dB re-max level

Telephone Noise Cancellation

Noise Cancellation 6-15 dB attenuation

Telco Line Echo Cancellation

Tail Time: 31 ms Null: 55 dB nominal

Telco Line

RJ-11 POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog extension • from a PBX) A-lead supervision provided

Telco Set

RJ-11 POTS (plain old telephone service) or analog extension • from a PBX A-lead supervision provided

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting) Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Rs=150 Ω• THD+N: <0.02%• Dynamic Range: 100 dB (non A-weighted)• Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Line Inputs 1, 2

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
  • Impedance: < 10 KΩ
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Line Outputs 1,2

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced
  • Impedance: < 50 kΩ
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Expansion Bus In/Out

• Proprietary Network
  • RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps
• Category 5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length between any two Converge/Converge Pro devices
  • Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)
  • 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port
  • 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port
• RJ-45 Connectors

Ethernet

RS-232

• Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not supported on RS-232 port)
• DB-9 female
• 9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
• Hardware flow control on (default)/off

USB

• Version 2.0 compatible
- Type: B-connector

Control/Status Ports

• DB-25 female A/B (2)
- Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground)
• Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each
• +3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

- Converge Console

Power Input Range

• Auto-Adjusting
  • 100–240 VAC: 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

- 30 W Typical

Dimensions (L x D x H)

• 17.25" x 10.25" x 1.75"
• 43.8 x 26 x 4.5 cm

Weight

• 7.5 lbs/3.3375 kg unit weight
• 12 lbs/5.4kg shipping

Operating Temperature

- 14^ / - 10^ to 122^ / 50^ ambient unit temperature

Approvals

• See Appendix D: Compliance
- AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections —Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

910-151-820 Converge Pro TH20 Telephone Hybrid for Converge Pro 880, 880T, 840T, 8i, and Converge SR 1212

CONVERGE PRO VH20

VoIP Features

VoIP Features•

SIP V2 (RFC 3261 and companionion RFC s)

Codec Support•

G.711u »

G.711A

G.822 wideband audio »

G.729AB »

g.723.1»

Security Features

Full Security Capability with TLS, AES, SRTP•

Noise Cancellation

Noise Cancellation 6-15 dB attenuation

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting)

Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Rs=150 Ω THD+N: <0.02%

Dynamic Range: 100 dB (non A-weighted)

Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Line Inputs 1, 2

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging
• Impedance: < 10 KΩ
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Line Outputs 1,2

• Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced
  • Impedance: < 50 kΩ
  • Nominal Level: 0 dBu
  • Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Expansion Bus In/Out

• Proprietary Network
• RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps
- Category 5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length between any two Converge/Converge Pro devices

Ethernet

• Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)
• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port
• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port
- RJ-45 Connectors

RS-232

• Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not supported on RS-232 port)
• DB-9 female
• 9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
• Hardware flow control on (default)/off

USB

• Version 2.0 compatible
- Type: B-connector

Control/Status Ports

• DB-25 female A/B (2)
- Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground)
• Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each
• +3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

- Converge™ Console

Network

- Remote Management & Configuration

Operating Temperature

- 14^ / - 10^ to 122^ / 50^ ambient unit temperature

Approvals

• See Appendix D: Compliance
- AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections —Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

• 910-151-825 Converge Pro VH20
- Telephone Interface for Converge/Converge Pro Platform

CONVERGE SR 1212

Audio Performance

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all • measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting) Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22 kHz ±1dB Noise (EIN): -126 dBu, 22 kHz BW, max gain, Rs-150 Ω THD+N: <0.02% Dynamic Range: >100 dB (non A-weighted) Crosstalk <-91 dB re 20 dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel

Auto Mixer Features

Number of Open Microphones (NOM) •

PA Adaptive Mode•

First Mic Priority Mode•

Last Mic Mode•

Maximum # of Mics Mode•

Ambient Level•

Gate Threshold Adjust

Off Attenuation Adjust•

- Hold Time

- Decay Rate

Matrix Mixing Features

- 36x36 matrix

• 12 analog in/out

• 12 expansion bus in/out

8 assignable processing blocks in/out•

• 4 assignable fader blocks in/out

Assignable Processing Blocks

- Filters

» All pass

» Low pass

» High pass

» Low shelving

» High shelving

» Parametric EQ

» Notch

» CD Horn

- Crossovers

» Bessel

» Butterworth

» Linkwitz-Riley

- Compressor

• Delay; adjustable up to 250 ms

Assignable Fader Blocks

- Gain/Mute

Microphone Input Configuration

- Input Gain Adjust

- Mic or Line Level

Phantom Power on/off•

- Filters

» All Pass

» Low Pass

» High Pass

» Notch

» PEQ

- Mute on/off

• Chairman Override on/off

- AGC on/off

• Automatic Level Control on/off

• Auto Gate/Manual gate

• Adaptive Ambient on/off

Mic/Line Inputs 1-8

- Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging

- Impedance: < 10K

- Nominal Level: adjustable -56 dBu to 0 dBu (7 dB step coarse gain adjustment)

• Maximum Level: -65 dBu to +20 dBu

- Phantom Power: 24 V, selectable

Line Inputs 9-12

- Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced, bridging

- Impedance: < 10 K

• Nominal Level: 0 dBu

• Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Outputs 1-12

- Push-on mini-terminal block, balanced

- Impedance: < 50 Ω

- Nominal Level: 0 dBu

• Maximum Level: 20 dBu

Expansion Bus In/Out

- Proprietary Network

- RJ-45 (2), 1.9 Mbps

- Category 5 twisted-pair cable, 200' maximum cable length between any two Converge/Converge Pro devices

Ethernet

• Autoswitching with Quality of Connection (QoC)

• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port

• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port

- RJ-45 Connectors

RS-232

- Serial Command Protocol Only (Console software not supported on RS-232 port)

- DB-9 female

- 9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 baud rate; 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity

• Hardware flow control on (default)/off

USB

• Version 2.0 compatible

- Type: B-connector

Control/Status Ports

• DB-25 female A/B (2)

- Inputs A/B: active low (pull to ground)

• Outputs A/B: open collector, 40 VDC max, 40 mA each

• +3.3 VDC pins (2) (300 mA over-current protected)

Configuration & Administration Software

- Converge Console

Power Input Range

Auto-Adjusting

• 100–240 VAC; 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

- 30 W Typical

CONVERGE SR 1212 (continued)

Dimensions (L x D x H)

17.25" × 10.25" × 1.75" •

43.8 x 26 x 4.5 cm

Weight

7.5 lbs/3.3375 kg unit weight

12 lbs/5.4kg shipping weight

Operating Temperature

14°F/-10°C to 122°F/50°C ambient unit temperature

Approvals

See • Appendix D: Compliance

AES48-2005: AES standard on interconnections •

—Grounding and EMC practices — Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry (self certified)

Part Number

910-151-900 Converge SR 1212

12x12 Digital Matrix Mixer

CONVERGE SR 1212A

Audio Performance:

Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, all measurements are performed from from 20 HZ to 22 kHz BW limit (no weighting)

Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 22kHz +- 1 dB

Noise(EIN): -126 dBu, 20 kHz BW, max Gain

Rs= 150 ohm•

THD + Noise: <.02%

Dynamic Range: >105 dB (non A weighted) •

Crosstalk: <91 db re 20dBu @ 20 kHz channel to • channel.

Audio Mixer Parameters

• Number of Open Microphones

PA Adaptive Mode•

First Mic Priority Mode•

Maximum # of Mics•

Ambient Level

Gate Threshold Adjust•

Off Attenuation Adjust

Hold Time•

Decay Rate•

Chairman Override•

• 96 Total Microphones per site

• 6- Global Gating Groups

• 4- Internal Gating Groups

Matrix Mixing Parameters

• 8- Microphone Analog Inputs

• 4- Analog Line Inputs

8-Analog Line Outputs

• 4- Power Amplifier Outputs

• 18- Expansion Bus in/out

- 8- Processing Blocks

Assignable Processing Blocks

- Filters:

» All Pass

» Low Pass

» Low shelving

» High shelving

» PEQ

» Notch

» Crossovers

- Compressor

Delay up to 250 msec

Power Amplifier Output Processing

• Feedback Elimination w/ ring cancellation

• 10-band EQ filter

• 4- node filter bank for crossover

- Delay Block

- Compressor/Limiter

- Noise Gate for Hiss Control

• Sound Masking Generator per channel

• Adaptive Volume Control

- Multi Channel Control

Microphone Processing

- 4-node filter bank

AGC/.ALC•

Power Amplifier

- Channels: 4

- Amplifier Output: 35-Watt into 8 ohm

• Impedence: Selectable 8ohm, 70V, 100 V

• THD+ Noise: <.2% (1/3 Power)

• Crosstalk: <-68dB

Expansion Bus

- Connection: CAT 5, RJ45

Mix Minus Structure•

• 18 Audio Buses

- 6 Gating Buses

• 8 PA Reference Buses

Network

• 10/100 Auto Switching (PC and Network Port)

- HTTP Server

- Telnet Client

- SNMP Agent

- SNTP Client

• DNS

• DHCP

RS-232

• DB-9

• 9.6k - 115k baud

• 8/1/0

• Hardware Flow Control

USB

• 2.0 Compatible

- Type B connector

GPIO

• DB 25 female (A/B)

- Inputs: Active Low

• Outputs: Open Collector, 40Vdc, 40 mA

Power

• 100-240VAC; 50/60 Hz,

• 300 Watts (maximum)

Environmental

- Operating temperature:

• 32-122 degrees F

Humidity:

• 15 to 80%

Mechanical

- Dimensions: 2RU

• 3.5" H x 17.25" W x 15.92" D

• Weight: < 30 lbs.

Compliance

• EMC- FCC Part 15 Class A

- EMI - EN55024

• Safety - IEC60950, CSA, CCC

• Class 2 Wiring Required

APPENDIX D: COMPLIANCE

WARNING: The country code must be set correctly in Console to ensure that the unit operates properly when connected to the telco network, and that it complies with the country's telco requirements. Changing this code to a country other than the intended country of operation might cause Converge Pro devices to be non-compliant.

FCC PART 15/ICES-003 COMPLIANCE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada ICES-003. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by ClearOne Communications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC PART 68 COMPLIANCE

US:FBIBR00BCONVPRO

Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.0B(ac)

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules Requirements adopted by ACTA. On the mixer unit of this equipment contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to your telephone company.

The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENs for the calling area. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g. 03 is a REN of 0.3).

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

This equipment uses an RJ11C jack that is used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network. This RJ11C jack complies with the applicable FCC Part 68 Rules and Requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.

If you experience problems with this equipment, contact ClearOne Communications, 5225 Wiley Post Way, Suite 500, Salt Lake City, Utah 84116, or by phone at [phone] for repair and warranty information. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

No user serviceable parts are contained in this product. If damage or malfunction occurs, contact ClearOne Communications for instructions on its repair or return.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY

This equipment uses AC power which can be subjected to electrical surges, typically lightning transients which are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. The warranty for this equipment does not cover damage caused by electrical surge or lightning transients. To reduce the risk of this equipment becoming damaged it is suggested that the customer consider installing a surge arrestor.

IC COMPLIANCE

IC: 1970A-CONVPRO

Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.0B(ac)

NOTICE: The term "IC" before the certification/registration number signifies that Industry of Canada technical specifications were met.

This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.

The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENs for the calling area. The REN for this product is listed above.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companies inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by ClearOne Communications. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE

Conformity of the equipment with the guidelines below is attested by the CE mark.

Manufacturer's Name: ClearOne Communications

Manufacturer's Address: Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower

5225 Wiley Post Way, Suite 500

Salt Lake City, Utah 84116 U.S.A.

EU Representative Name: ClearOne Communications Ltd.

EU Representative Address: Atlantic House

Imperial Way

Reading Berkshire

RG2 0TD

United Kingdom

Model: Converge Pro (880, 81, 880T, 840T, TH20, VH20), Converge SR 1212.

Product Standard(s) to which Conformity of the Council Directive(s) is declared:

EMC - 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive":

EN 55022: 2006 (Emissions) Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement.

EN 61000-3-2: 2004 Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emissions.

EN 61000-3-3: 2002 Section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including 16 A.

EN 55024: 1998 (Immunity) +A1+A2 Information technology equipment - Immunity characteristics -Limits and methods of measurements.

EN 61000-4-2: 2001 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity

EN 61000-4-3: 2006 Radiated RF Immunity

EN 61000-4-4: 2004 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity

EN 61000-4-5: 2005 Lightning Surge Immunity

EN 61000-4-6: 2006 Conducted RF Immunity

EN 61000-4-8: 1993 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

EN 61000-4-11: 2004 Voltage Dips and Voltage Interruptions

Safety - 73/23/EEC "Low Voltage Directive (LVD)":

IEC 60950-1: 2001

Equipment.

Safety of Information Technology Equipment, Including Electrical Business

Telecom - Telecom Terminal Equipment (Converge Pro 840T & Converge Pro TH20 Only):

ETSI ES 203 021 - 1, 2 and 3 Access and Terminals (AT); Harmonized basic attachment requirements for Terminals for connection to analogue interfaces of the Telephone Networks; Update of the technical contents of TBR 021, EN 301 437, TBR 015, TBR 017; Part 1: General aspects, Part 2: Basic transmission and protection of the network from harm, Part 3: Basic Interworking with the Public Telephone Networks.

RoHS - 2002/95/EC Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) & WEEE - 2002/96/EC Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE):

We herein certify that the products listed above are in compliance with the EU directive 2002/95/EC and EU directive 2002/96/EC.

We, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards. Date of Issue: August 4, 2009

Legal Representative in Europe

/s/ Tracy Bathurst

Signature

Tracy Bathurst

CTO

EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE

Conformity of the equipment with the guidelines below is attested by the CE mark.

EC Declaration of Conformity

Manufacturer's Name: ClearOne Communications

Manufacturer's Address: Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower

5225 Wiley Post Way, Suite 500

Salt Lake City, Utah 84116 U.S.A.

EU Representative Name: ClearOne Communications Ltd.

EU Representative Address: Atlantic House

Imperial Way

Reading Berkshire

RG2 0TD

United Kingdom

Model: Converge Pro 880TA & Converge SR 1212A

Product Standard(s) to which Conformity of the Council Directive(s) is declared:

EMC - 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive":

EN 55103-1: 1997 (Emissions) Electromagnetic Compatibility – Product family standard for audio, video, audio-visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use, Part 1 Emissions.

EN 55103-1:1997 Magnetic Field Emissions – Annex A @ 10 cm.

EN 55022: 2006 Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement. Radiated, Class A Limits; Conducted, Class B Limits.

EN 61000-3-2: 2000 Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emissions.

EN 61000-3-3: 1995+A1:2001 Section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including 16 A.

EN 55103-2: 1997 (Immunity) Electromagnetic Compatibility – Product family standard for audio, video, audio-visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use, Part 2 Immunity

EN 61000-4-2: 2001 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity

EN 61000-4-3: 2006 Radiated RF Immunity

EN 61000-4-4: 2004 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity

EN 61000-4-5: 2005 Lightning Surge Immunity

EN 61000-4-6: 2006 Conducted RF Immunity

EN 61000-4-11: 2004 Voltage Dips and Voltage Interruptions

Safety - 73/23/EEC "Low Voltage Directive (LVD)":

EN 60065:2002

Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus – Safety requirements.

RoHS - 2002/95/EC & 2005/618/EC Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) & WEEE - 2002/96/EC Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE).

I herein certify that the products listed above are in compliance with the EU directive 2002/95/EC and EU directive 2002/96/EC.

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards. Date of Issue: February 13, 2009

Legal Representative in Europe

/s/ Greg A. LeClaire

Signature

Greg A. LeClaire CFO

NEW ZEALAND COMPLIANCE

In the event of main power failure, Converge/Converge Pro equipment will become inoperable with regard to making telephone calls.

All persons using Converge/Converge Pro equipment for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law, which requires that at least one party to the conversation be aware that the conversation is being recorded. In addition, the principles enumerated in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of any personal information collected, the purpose of this collection, how it is used, and what is disclosed to any other party.

JAPANESE COMPLIANCE

The DC resistance of the PSTN line is restricted to 1700 - 397 = 1373 Ohms.

APPENDIX F: PROVISIONING THE CONVERGE VH20

PROVISIONING THE CONVERGE VH20

Overview

This document describes the process of configuring a Converge VH20 using configuration files and compares this to the use of the Converge Console software.

Automatic provisioning

By default the VH20 is configured to automatically get provisioning information from a TFTP server defined by the DHCP server. This power on default behavior can be changed to configure from a different TFTP server or to stay with current settings. These changes can be made through the Console software by changing the network settings for ENETTFTPIP (for the TFTP IP address) or ENETPROV (for selecting source for provisioning).

If provisioning has been enabled, at boot time two files will be requested from the TFTP server. These files are named as follows:

CLROVoipConfig.txt

and

CLROVoipConfig_[MAC address].txt

where [MAC address] is the 12 digit hexadecimal MAC address of the VH20 to be configured. Thus the first file can contain settings general to all units and the second file can contain unique settings specific to a unit.

NOTE: Although the settings configuration file may appear to be well formed XML, it MUST adhere to the formatting as defined in this example. Parameter settings CANNOT be spread across multiple lines.

For example:

Valid

<username> admin </username> 

Invalid

<username> 

admin

</username> 

Also, since there are two proxies, each proxy tag can take an index value of 0 or 1 for the primary or secondary proxy. Those tags that take a proxy index are shown within the tag field with index=n where n = 0 or 1. For example, the tag to enable the primary proxy sip authentication would be:

<use_sipauth index=0> 1 </use_sipauth> 

A sample CLROVoipConfig.txt file containing configuration settings is shown below. After the sample file is a complete list of tags and the ranges allowed.

<C1CONFIG>
    <dialplan> C1EngDialPlan.txt </dialplan>
    <tls_cert_update> 2 </tls_cert_update>
    <tls_private_cert index=0> C1PKeyCert.txt </tls_private_cert>
    <tls_local_cert index=0> C1LocalCert.txt </tls_local_cert>
    <tls_ca_cert index=0> C1CA0Cert.txt, C1CA1Cert.txt </tls_ca_cert>
</C1CONFIG> 

All configuration tags and associated ranges

ringtone index 1 to 5

Local telephone number

1 - mute ringer on incoming call 0 - disable mute

File name of Dialplan - TFTPed from server

1 - enable SIP authentication 0 - disable sip authentication

sip authentication username

sip authentication password

1 - enable 0 - disable

sip proxy server IP, hostname or FQDN

sip proxy server port

range 1024 to 65535

1 - enable 0 - disable

sip outbound proxy IP, hostname or FQDN

sip outbound proxy port

range 1024 to 65535

sip registration timeout in seconds

1 - enable 0 - disable

range 90 to 65535

range: must be greater than or equal to min SE timer (see below)

range 90 to 65535

range 0 to 65535

range 0 to 65535

range 0 to 65535

range 0 to 65535

sip transport: 0 - udp, 1 - tcp, 2 - tls

sip udp port

range 1024 to 65535

sip tcp port

range 1024 to 65535

sip tls port

range 1024 to 65535

1 - enable inband dtmf relay 0 - disable

dtmf relay payload - 96 to 127

1 - enable voice activity detection 0 - disable

1 - enable adaptive vad 0 - disable

vad threshold -20 to +10

vad noise matching 0 - none, 1 - level

g.722 64kbps codec priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.722 56kbps codec priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.722 48kbps codec priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.711ulaw codec priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.711Alaw codec priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.729A/B codec priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.723.1 high rate priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

g.723.1 low rate priority 1(lowest) to 255(highest)

1 to 4096 enable with this VLANID, 0 – disable VLAN

priority of vlan packets range: 0-7

set quality of service precedence range: 0-8

0 0x0

1 0x8

2 0x10

3 0x18

4 0x20

5 0x28

6 0x30

7 0x38

8 allows a custom value to be specified by qos_custom_dscp.

See qos_custom_dscp below.

A custom value of QOS precedence range 0-0x39

See qos_precedence above

1 - enable 0 - disable

range 1024 to 65535

default -to use the current domain name

proxy -to use the proxy address

[ Fully qualified domain name ] -to specify a domain name

1 - always update the tls filename and data

2 - if the file name is not present, then request the file data

file name of private key to load

file name of local certificate to load

comma seperated list of up to 5 CA certificate filenames to be loaded.

1 - enable 0 - disable

1 - enable 0 - disable

1 - AES CM 128

2 - FS 128

1 - HMAC SHA1 80

2 - HMAC_SHA1_32

set KDR offer range 0 - 24

1 - enable 0 - disable

The Dial Plan Configuration File

The dial plan configuration file defines rules for gathering digits when dialing a phone number and also defines the mapping of the gathered digits to a specific target. A sample dial plan is defined below.

<C1DIALPLAN>
    <SYSCONFIG DIALTIME="120000" FIRST_DIGIT_WAIT="30000" INTER_DIGIT_WAIT="30000"
TERMINATION_DIGIT="#"/>
    <DIGITMAP MATCH="911" MIN_DIGITS="3" MAX_DIGITS="3" STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS="0" ADD_PREFIX_
AFTER_STRIP="" DIAL_STRING="+&@sipgateway.com"/> <!-- 911 Emergency -->
    <DIGITMAP MATCH="+&" MIN_DIGITS="4" MAX_DIGITS="4" STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS="0" ADD_PREFIX_
AFTER_STRIP="" DIAL_STRING="+&@sipproxy.com"/> <!-- Enterprise extensions -->
    <DIGITMAP MATCH="9" MIN_DIGITS="8" MAX_DIGITS="43" STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS="1" ADD_PREFIX_
AFTER_STRIP="" DIAL_STRING="+&@sipgateway.com"/> <!-- Outside dialing -->
    <DIGITMAP MATCH="0" MIN_DIGITS="1" MAX_DIGITS="1" STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS="0" ADD_PREFIX_
AFTER_STRIP="" DIAL_STRING="[e-mail]"/> <!-- Operator -->
</C1DIALPLAN> 

NOTE: All tokens associated with the SYSCONFIG and DIGITMAP MUST appear on separate single lines in the actual configuration file.

NOTE: Although the dial plan configuration file may appear to be well formed XML, it MUST adhere to the format defined above.

The DIALTIME token defines the total time in milliseconds allowed to enter the dialed digits before the phone will play a re-order tone.

The FIRST_DIGIT_WAIT token defines the time in milliseconds the phone will wait after going off-hook to enter the first digit before the a re-order tone is played.

The INTER_DIGIT_WAIT token defines the time in milliseconds the phone will wait after the first digit is entered before another digit must be entered before the number is dialed.

The TERMINATION_DIGIT token defines the termination digit to be entered if the maximum number of digits have not yet been entered and the number is to be dialed before the INTER_DIGIT_WAIT timer is still active.

The MATCH token defines the digits which MUST be matched when the user begins entering digits for the DIGITMAP rule to take effect.

The MIN_DIGITS token defines the minimum number of digits which MUST be entered once that match rule has been invoked. This number must be greater than or equal to the number of digits in the MATCH string.

The MAX_DIGITS token defines the maximum number of digits which MAY be entered after the match rule has been invoked. The completion of the number may be achieved when the maximum number of digits have been entered or the TERMINATION_DIGIT is pressed. The MAX_DIGITS parameter MUST be greater than or equal to the MIN_DIGITS parameter.

The STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS parameter defines the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the complete dial string before it is passed to the underlying stack to be dialed. For example if the user entered 1234 and STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS was set to 2, the string passed to the underlying stack for dialing would be 34.

The ADD_PREFIX_AFTER_STRIP token defines a set of prefix characters that are to be applied to the beginning of the dial string AFTER the STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS rule has been applied. Adding to the previous example, if the ADD_PREFIX_AFTER_STRIP were set to "56" and the user entered 1234, the string passed to the underlying stack would be 5634.

The DIAL_STRING token defines the address which will be dialed when a number satisfying the MATCH rule is entered.

The characters “+&” define a wild card, which can be entered to simplify entering multiple rules for similar addresses. In the example shown above, when any four digit number is entered, it is passed to the stack as “@sipgateway.com”.

NOTE: Although the wild card parameter is defined in the MATCH string and in the DIAL_STRING, it assumes that the rules applied for STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS and ADD_PREFIX_AFTER_STrip still take effect before the entered number replaces the wild card in the DIAL_STRING.

GLOSSARY

Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) A process in which acoustical echo is removed from a signal. AEC can be used to remove unwanted signals from mic audio if the unwanted acoustic signal is available separately as an electronic signal.

Adaptive Ambient This portion of the mixer monitors the varying ambient noise level in the room and changes the threshold level at which a microphone gates on.

Ambient Level A user-defined background noise level used to control microphone gating (used only if Adaptive Ambient is disabled).

Ambient Noise The existing room-level noise, such as that caused by ventilation systems, paper shuffling, and background chatter.

Attack Time Determines how quickly compression is enabled (calibrated in milliseconds). See also Compression, Compressor, and Threshold.

Attenuation A reduction of signal amplitude.

Audible Hook Indication A series of beeps that indicates when the telephone line goes on or off hook. This feature can be turned on or off, and the level can be adjusted in the Telco Rx Channel Configuration window.

Audible Ringer Indication When a call comes in, you can hear it ring if Audible Ringer Indication is turned on in the Telco Rx Channel Configuration window. The ringer level can also be adjusted.

Audio Routing The process of routing input signals to output channels in the Matrix based on default or user-defined cross points. See also Matrix.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Automatically increases or decreases audio gain to maintain a consistent audio level.

Automatic Gating Automatically gates microphones on or off based on gating parameters set in the Mic Input Channel Configuration window.

Automatic Level Control (ALC) ALC can be selected for telco receive and mic input channels. ALC keeps soft and loud telephone participants at a consistent level. ALC can be turned on or off in the Telco Rx and Mic Input Channel Configuration windows. The default is on for Telco Rx and on for mic inputs.

Bandwidth The difference between the lower and upper end points of an audio band. Also, the range or differences between the limiting frequencies of a continuous frequency band.

Baud Rate The number of signal transitions per second, or the clock rate of the serial bit stream in hertz. Given 7 or 8 bits for data plus start and stop, the approximate ASCII character transmission rate is one-tenth the baud rate.

CD Horn EQ (Constant Directivity Horn Equalizer) Horn drivers used in arenas and auditoriums have an inherent 6dB/octave high frequency rolloff. The CD Horn EQ compensates for this characteristic.

Chairman Override Provides gating priority for chairman override enabled microphones within the same gating group. When a mic with chairman override gates on, all mics that don't have chairman override enabled and are in the same gating group will gate off.

ClearEffect™ To reduce bandwidth requirements, telephone lines limit audio bandwidth to a range of 300Hz-3.3kHz. ClearEffect™ enhances the incoming signal from a telephone line to emulate wideband audio by adding high and low frequencies to the audio signal, creating a richer, fuller sound. All output signals routed from an input channel with ClearEffect™ enabled are routed as wideband audio.

Clipping Clipping occurs when a signal level exceeds the maximum level a circuit can handle. This is usually caused by improper gain settings. Clipping causes distortion, listener fatigue, and accelerated failure of speakers.

Compression An induced reduction in the dynamic range of all or part of an audio signal. Compression is usually used to protect individual loudspeaker components from damage caused by transient peaks in audio signals.

Compressor A signal processor used to perform compression and control the dynamic range of an audio signal.

Control Bus Part of the Expansion Bus, the Control Bus passes control information to the units. Control is not affected by audio master/slave settings and will continue to function even if the units are not using the audio channels. See also Expansion Bus.

Crossover A device that passes designated frequency ranges of an audio signal to specified loudspeaker elements in a sound system. Converge Pro provides the following types of crossovers:

• Bessel A crossover using a low-pass filter design characterized by a linear phase response. This results in a constant time delay throughout the passband.
• Butterworth A crossover using a low-pass filter design characterized by a maximally flat magnitude response. This results in no amplitude ripple in the passband.
• Linkwitz-Riley A fourth-order crossover consisting of a cascaded second order Butterworth low-pass filter. Offers a vast improvement over the Butterworth crossover and is the de facto standard for professional audio active crossovers.

Cross Point The intersection between an input and an output in the routing matrix. Cross point cells are color coded according to input type: yellow = gated; blue = non-gated; brown = pre-AEC; green = cross point. See also Gating, Pre-AEC Channel.

Cross Point Level Adjust The process of adjusting the audio level (gain/attenuation) at the cross point. Cross Point Levels are set using the Cross Point Attenuation Slider, which allows you attenuate the signal from 0 to -60dB (it also allows you to add gain to the signal, from 0 to 12dB).

Decay Rate Determines how fast a mic input channel gates off after the specified Hold time expires (slow, medium, fast). The default is medium.

Default Meter The input/output level meter displayed on the front panel LED meter. All Converge Pro meters are peak-level meters.

Delay Delay calculates the amount of signal delay based on the distance between audio source and audience, and the temperature. Introducing an appropriate amount of delay can maintain acoustical alignment and proper sound imaging in a room regardless of speaker location. This setting can also compensate for propagation delay caused by signal processing, such as analog to digital conversion. Delay is set in the Channel Property Configuration window for Processing channels. See also Processing Blocks.

Device ID A number which identifies the unit when multiple units of the same device type are connected via the Expansion Bus. All Converge Pro units ship from the factory with a default DID of 0.

Device Type A number which identifies the type of unit. Converge Pro Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows:

Model Device Type Device ID Range
880 1 0-7
TH20 2 0-F
840T 3 0-7
8i A	0-7

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Part of the IP protocol suite, DHCP enables a host server to dynamically assign IP addresses, subnet masks, default gateways, and other parameters to devices on IP-based networks. See also Default Gateway and Subnet Mask.

Dial Tone Level A setting in the Channel Property Configuration window for Telco Rx channels that allows you to adjust the dial tone level in 1dB steps to ±12 dB.

DNS (Domain Name System) Part of the IP protocol suite, DNS manages the translation of plain-text internet domain names (URLs) into numeric IP addresses.

DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Dialing DTMF or touch-tone dialing allows users to issue tones for access to voice mail, pagers, etc.

DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Level A setting in the Channel Property Configuration window for Telco Rx channels used to adjust the level (volume) of the DTMF tones that are heard when dialing. Level can be adjusted in 1dB steps to ±12dB.

EC (Echo Canceller) Reference A signal that contains an electronic copy of all signals which will be removed from the signal the mics pick up. This is always the far-end audio and, optionally, local audio sources.

EC (Echo Canceller) Reference Summing The ability to combine multiple signals in a single echo cancellation reference signal. See also Virtual Reference.

ERL (Echo Return Loss) The ERL meter shows the coupling between the reference signal and the input to the echo canceller—the ratio of the two levels.

ERLE (Echo Return Loss Enhancement) The echo return loss enhancement (ERLE) meter shows the loss through the echo cancellation and NLP (non-linear processing) chain—the ratio of the two levels.

Expansion Bus Consists of two RJ-45 connectors (the Link In and Link Out ports) on the rear panel of all Converge Pro models. The Expansion Bus allows multiple Converge Pro devices to be linked together using CAT-5 twisted-pair cable.

Expansion Bus Reference The Expansion Bus Reference allows you to reference an output on another Converge Pro device in a site for Echo Cancellation and PA Adaption.

Filter A device that passes and blocks audio signals based on user-definable requirements of the system.

• All Pass A filter that provides only phase shift or phase delay without appreciably changing the magnitude characteristic. The filter produces a flat amplitude response. It is useful for matching the delay of two processing channels with different delays.
  • High Pass A filter that passes high signal frequencies while attenuating low frequencies.
• High Shelving Provides boosting or attenuation of frequencies above a designated frequency. The transition between the spectrum above and below the designated frequency occurs at a fixed 6dB/octave rate. The gain or loss above the corner frequency is adjustable to +/- 15dB.
• Low Pass A filter that passes low frequencies while attenuating high frequencies.
• Low Shelving Provides boosting or attenuation of frequencies below a designated frequency. The transition between the spectrum above and below the designated frequency occurs at a fixed 6dB/octave rate. The gain or loss below the corner frequency is adjustable to +/- 15dB.

First Mic Priority Increases the audio level required to gate on additional microphones after the first mic is on. This helps ensure that only one mic gates on when a person speaks.

Gain The amount a signal is increased over a given reference, typically 0, normally specified in dB (decibels). On Converge Pro devices, gain is adjustable from -65 to 20dB (85dB range) in .5dB increments.

Gain Structure A set of configuration parameters that define the gain characteristics of a signal. The optimal input gain setting is one which provides both an adequate signal-to-noise ratio and reasonable headroom.

Gateway A device used to provide external network access to client devices on IP networks. All traffic with IP addresses outside the specified subnet mask are automatically routed to the gateway. See also DHCP and Subnet Mask.

Gating The activation and deactivation of mic inputs. Converge Pro provides three types of microphone gating:

• Auto The microphone will gate on according to the input level, assigned gating parameters, and gating group.
• Manual On The microphone will gate on unless it exceeds the NOM requirements of the gating group.
  Manual Off• The microphone is deactivated.

Gate Ratio Specifies how much louder the microphone audio level must be over the ambient sound level before a microphone gates on.

Gating Controls The gating parameters that are assigned to a gating group, including:

• Maximum Number of Mics Sets the maximum number of mics that can be gated on simultaneously.
- First Mic Priority Increases the audio level required to gate on additional microphones after the first mic is gated on.
- Last Mic Mode Sets the last-activated mic to Last On, Mic 1-8, or Off.

Gating Groups A set of gating parameters which can be applied to microphones connected to the local device, or to microphones connected to other units on the Expansion Bus (Global Gating Groups A–D). Gating groups provide greater flexibility and control of mics. See also Global Gating Bus and Expansion Bus.

Global Gating Bus Part of the Expansion Bus, these ten mix-minus buses (I-R) pass mic status and gate parameter information such as First Mic Priority and NOM (Number of Open Mics). See also First Mic Priority and NOM.

GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) GPIO enables external devices to access the Converge Pro serial command set, including common functions such as volume control, muting, room combining, and preset changes, via the Control/Status A and B ports. All Converge Pro devices connected via the Expansion Bus can be controlled from a single Control/Status port on any of the devices.

Hold Time The length of time that a microphone remains on after the voice (input) level drops below the gate ratio. This can be used to prevent the microphone from gating off during brief pauses in speech.

HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) Part of the Internet protocol suite, HTTP is used to transmit information, such as HTML pages, between servers and clients on IP networks.

Last Mic Mode Sets the last-activated mic to Last On, Mic 1-8, or Off. The Last On setting leaves the last-activated mic gated on until another mic input gates on.

Macro A series of commands stored and executed together. Macros can be executed from within Converge Console, using serial commands, and within Presets.

Manual Gating Provides the ability to gate a microphone on or off manually. See also Gating.

Matrix Mixer The Converge Pro mixer that allows routing of any input or combination of inputs to an output or any combination of outputs. The Converge Pro mixer permits level control at each cross point in the matrix. See also Cross Point.

Maximum Number of Mics Sets the maximum number of mics that can be gated on simultaneously.

MIB (Management Information Base) A database file that describes networked communication devices for SNMP management purposes. See also SNMP.

Microphone Mixing The process which mixes audio signals from different microphones. All mic signals can be mixed into one signal, any or all outputs, or mixed into separate groups. Microphone signals can also be processed together or individually.

Min/Max Gain Level Yellow and green limit arrows in Console that set minimum and maximum gain levels respectively for all channels. These arrows are available on the Gain Slider for each channel type. Min/Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices, and are used to prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels.

Mixer Mode The matrix mixer in Console has two settings: master and slave. Mixer mode is configured in the Unit Properties window. See also Matrix Mixer and Unit Properties.

Mute A condition in which an audio signal is attenuated below the audible threshold.

NLP (Non-Linear Processing) NLP increases the power of echo cancellation for difficult acoustical environments. NLP has four settings: Soft (6dB), Medium (12dB), Aggressive (18dB), and Off. NLP settings are found in the Channel Properties Configuration window for Mic Input channels.

Noise Cancellation A process which removes ambient noise from a signal.

NTP (Network Time Protocol) Part of the IP protocol suite, NTP is used for clock synchronization between devices on IP-based networks.

NOM (Number of Open Mics)/Constant Gain Mode Adjusts the output level to maintain a specified gain level based on the number of mics gated on and routed to an output.

I-R Buses These ten audio buses are used for routing microphone audio between Converge Pro devices. Information about the number of gated microphones (NOM count) and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses. See also S-Z Buses and PA Adapt/AEC Reference Bus.

Off Attenuation The amount of level reduction a microphone is given when the microphone is not gated on.

PA Adaptive Mode PA Adaptive Mode allows you to specify an output as the ambient reference. This prevents an audio signal from gating on microphones without interfering with speech from conference participants.

PA Adapt/AEC Reference This setting determines which output channel (typically a loudspeaker) is used as the reference for AEC. See also PA Adaptive Mode and AEC.

Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) A multi-band variable equalizer with control of gain, center frequency, and bandwidth. A properly configured PEQ enables Converge Pro devices to offset speaker anomalies and room acoustic imaging deficiencies.

Phantom Power Power supplied by Converge Pro units to power condenser microphones. This feature can be switched off for microphones that do not require phantom power.

Pink Noise An audio test signal containing all the frequencies in a given audio spectrum, with equal energy in each octave.

Pre-AEC Cross Point Setting a Pre-AEC Cross Point in the Matrix bypasses the cross-pointed input audio from the AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) reference. This is primarily used for sound reinforcement applications to prevent mic input channel audio from being degraded by AEC artifacts. See also AEC and Matrix Mixer.

Preset Presets provide the configuration flexibility needed to meet changing conference room requirements. These changes include audio routing, gating, muting, levels, AEC referencing, and signal processing, as well as room combining and room configuration. Presets allow you to make configuration changes instantaneously—without interrupting or affecting any conferences in progress. There are 32 presets available on every Converge Pro device.

Preset Mask Defines whether a Preset executes on a low or high contact closure signal on the rear panel of the unit.

Preset Mode Preset mode is used to create presets and is accessed from the Console toolbar.

Processing Blocks Processing blocks enable you to configure filters, delay, compression, and gain to create precise audio configurations for any venue. A single input or group of inputs can be routed through a processing block and then routed to an output or multiple outputs. There are four processing blocks available for the 840T and eight for the 880 and 8I (A-D for 840T, A-H for 880 and 8I). See also Filters, Delay, Compression, and Matrix.

Q (Quality Factor). It is the ratio of the center frequency divided by the bandwidth. Q reflects an inverse relationship to the bandwidth, and is adjustable from .02:1 to 40:1.

Ratio The amount of compression applied to the output signal compared with the input signal as the signal exceeds the threshold level. See also Compressor, Compression, and Threshold.

Release Time Release is a parameter which determines how quickly compression is released after the input signal drops below the specified threshold. See also Compressor, Compression, and Ratio.

Reverberation A diffused acoustic energy field fed and maintained by sound reflections from the room surfaces.

S-Z Buses These eight buses are line input mixer buses. They are used to route auxiliary audio, such as from a CD player or VCR, to and from other units on the Expansion Bus. These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required. See also Expansion Bus.

Signal Generator A device for generating a reference tone for sound system calibration purposes.

Site File Site Files allow you to store configuration settings for one or more Converge Pro devices, including Inputs, Outputs, Fader channels, Processing channels, Matrix routing, and Presets, for a specific application or venue. Site files also provide Console with the necessary information to communicate with site hardware using your PC.

Site Properties The Site Properties window opens when you select New Site from the File menu or click on the New Site button on the Console button bar. It allows you to enter information about the ,site as well as configure the communication and security settings.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) Part of the IP protocol suite, SMTP servers resolve the DNS address and recipient information used to transport email messages over IP networks. See also DNS.

Subnet Mask A subnet mask defines the range logical IP addresses used for internal network traffic, and is used by DHCP, gateway devices, and routers to distinguish between internal and external network traffic on IP networks. See also DHCP, Gateway, and DNS.

TERL (Telco Echo Return Loss) The TERL meter shows the coupling between the transmit signal and the input to the telephone echo canceller. It is the ratio of the two levels.

TERLE (Telco Echo Return Loss Enhancement) The TERLE meter shows the loss through the telephone echo cancellation process. It is the ratio of the two levels.

Threshold The upper or lower level at which a signal processing begins or terminates.

Unit Properties Unit Properties define properties for a specific Converge Pro unit. Unit Properties enable you to configure unit settings such as name, and telephone country code, as well as IP and serial communication settings. See also Site Properties.

Virtual AEC Reference Virtual AEC References allow you to combine multiple audio sources for applications where there are two speakers (left and right), combined audio/video conferencing, and audio/video teleconferencing. In these and other multiple output applications, using virtual AEC references improves AEC performance.

Web Builder Web Builder consists of User Console and Control Console. These consoles allow you to configure a subset of call management (User Console) and mixing features (Control Console) for access through a web portal integrated into the Converge Pro firmware. The web portal can be accessed over IP with Microsoft's Internet Explorer web browser (requires IE version 5.5 or later).

White Noise Acoustical noise with equal energy throughout a given frequency range.